2009 Outback Owners Manual

Black plate (1,1)
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C copyright 2008 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 1/ 18

Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
1) Legacy Sedan
2) Legacy Station wagon
3) OUTBACK Station wagon

Black plate (3,1)
Chapter 4: Climate control

Warranties How to use this Owner’s 0
Manual This chapter informs you how to operate
& Warranties for U.S.A. the climate control.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual Chapter 5: Audio
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully This chapter informs you how to operate
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the read this manual. To protect yourself and your audio system.
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle, Chapter 6: Interior equipment
warranties: follow the instructions in this manual. This chapter informs you how to operate
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Failure to observe these instructions may interior equipment.
. Emission Control Systems Warranty result in serious injury and damage to your Chapter 7: Starting and operating
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle. This chapter informs you how to start and
This manual is composed of fourteen operate your SUBARU.
All warranty information, including details
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief Chapter 8: Driving tips
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. table of contents, so you can usually tell at This chapter informs you how to drive your
Please read these warranties carefully. a glance if that chapter contains the SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
information you want. plains some safety tips on driving.
& Warranties for Canada Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
airbags This chapter informs you what to do if you
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
have a problem while driving, such as a
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the
flat tire or engine overheating.
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags. Chapter 10: Appearance care
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
. Emission Control Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls This chapter informs you when you need
All warranty information, including details to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
This chapter informs you about the opera-
of coverage and exclusions, is in the scheduled maintenance and informs you
tion of instrument panel indicators and
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please how to use the instruments and other
how to keep your SUBARU running
read these warranties carefully. properly.
switches.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)
Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION Vehicle symbols

This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in There are some of the symbols you may
Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your see on your vehicle.
Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the For warning and indicator lights, refer to
This chapter informs you about Tire caution is ignored. “Warning and indicator lights” in the
information, Uniform tire quality grading illustrated index section in this chapter.
standards and Reporting safety defects.
NOTE Mark Name
Chapter 14: Index
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in tions how to make better use of your WARNING
this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
something you want to read.
CAUTION
& Safety warnings & Safety symbol
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. Passengers’ windows lock
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to Fuel
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care- Front fog lights
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely. Parking lights
WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
A WARNING indicates a situation in You will find a circle with a slash through it
which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do
Seat heater
result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.

Black plate (5,1)
Mark Name Mark Name Mark Name 0

Child restraint lower an- Headlights Rear window defogger/Out-
chorages side mirror defogger
Child restraint top tether an- Turn signal Air recirculation

chorages
Horn Illumination brightness Outside air
Windshield wiper deicer Engine hood Engine oil
Wiper intermittent Trunk lid (Sedan) Washer
Windshield wiper and washer Fan speed Door lock (transmitter)
Windshield wiper mist (for Instrument panel outlets Door unlock (transmitter)
single wipe)
Instrument panel outlets and Trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate

Rear window wiper foot outlets (Station wagon) (transmitter)
Rear window washer Foot outlets
Lights Windshield defroster and foot

outlets
Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate lights and instru- Windshield defroster
ment panel illumination

Black plate (6,1)
Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety
driving considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is
WARNING moving. The passenger cannot
needs enough space for deploy-
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen-
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi-
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control cle.
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in-
dent. move the seat as far back as fants and small children should
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the system which is appropriate for
Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelt the child’s age, height and
vehicle should always wear seat- and SRS airbags” in chapter 1 of this
belts when the vehicle is moving. weight. If a child is too big for a
Owner’s Manual for instructions and pre- child restraint system, the child
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint cautions concerning the seatbelt system
System) airbag does not do away should sit in the REAR seat and
and SRS airbag system. be restrained using the seatbelts.
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat- According to accident statistics,
belts, it offers the best combined children are safer when properly
protection in case of a serious restrained in the rear seating
accident. positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
Not wearing a seatbelt increases to stand up or kneel on the seat.
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the . Put children aged 12 and under in
vehicle has the SRS airbag. the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.

Black plate (7,1)
The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children & Engine exhaust gas (carbon 0
considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci- monoxide)
and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or
dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op- WARNING
years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on
not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly Engine exhaust gas contains
lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause carbon monoxide, a colorless
their risk of being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries and odorless gas which is dan-
deployment is greater. to them. gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD . Help prevent young children from . Always properly maintain the en-
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN locking themselves in the trunk. gine exhaust system to prevent
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO When leaving the vehicle, either engine exhaust gas from enter-
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR close all windows and lock all ing the vehicle.
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- doors or cancel the inside trunk . Never run the engine in a closed
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO lid release. Also make certain space, such as a garage, except
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. that the trunk is closed. On hot for the brief time needed to drive
. Always use the child safety locks or sunny days, the temperature the vehicle in or out of it.
whenever a child rides in the rear in a trunk could quickly become
high enough to cause death or . Avoid remaining in a parked
seat. Serious injury could result vehicle for a lengthy time while
if a child accidentally opened the serious heat-related injuries in-
cluding brain damage to anyone the engine is running. If that is
door and fell out. Refer to the unavoidable, then use the venti-
“Door locks” section in chapter locked inside, particularly for
small children. lation fan to force fresh air into
2. the vehicle.
. Always lock the passenger’s win- Carefully read the sections “Child restraint . Always keep the front ventilator
dows using the lock switch when systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental inlet grille free from snow, leaves
children are riding in the vehicle. Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts” or other obstructions to ensure
Failure to follow this procedure in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for that the ventilation system al-
could result in injury to a child instructions and precautions concerning ways works properly.
operating the power window. Re- the child restraint system, seatbelt system
fer to the “Power windows” sec- . If at any time you suspect that
and SRS airbag system. exhaust fumes are entering the
tion in chapter 2.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)
vehicle, have t he probl em Drunken driving is one of the most you have a medical condition that requires
checked and corrected as soon frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- you to take drugs, please consult with
as possible. If you must drive hol affects all people differently, you may your doctor.
under these conditions, drive have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your Never drive if you are under the influence
only with all windows fully open.
blood is below the legal limit. The safest of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate own health and well-being, we urge you
closed while driving to prevent thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to not to take illegal drugs in the first place
exhaust gas from entering the and to seek treatment if you are addicted
vehicle. drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel. to those drugs.
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy

& Drinking and driving
WARNING WARNING
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
Drinking and then driving is very reaction will be delayed and your
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair perception, judgment and attentive-
stream delays your reaction and ness will be impaired. If you drive
impairs your perception, judgment your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking when tired or sleepy, your, your
and attentiveness. If you drive after passengers’ and other persons’
drinking – even if you drink just a them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk chances of being involved in a
little – it will increase the risk of serious accident may increase.
being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or
accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
Please do not continue to drive but
your passengers and others. In instead find a safe place to rest if you
addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
accident, alcohol may increase the should make periodic rest stops to refresh
severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can yourself before continuing on your journey.
Please don’t drink and drive. impair your driving ability. Do not drive When possible, you should share the
after taking any medications that can driving with others.
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

Black plate (9,1)
& Car phone/cell phone and & Driving with pets & Tire pressures 0
driving Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from WARNING
CAUTION driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown Driving at high speeds with exces-
Do not use a car phone/cell phone around inside the vehicle and hurt you or sively low tire pressures can cause
while driving; it may distract your your passengers. Besides, the pets can the tires to deform severely and to
attention from driving and can lead be hurt under these situations. It is also for rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
to an accident. If you use a car their own safety that pets should be crease in temperature could cause
phone/cell phone, pull off the road properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- tread separation, and destruction of
and park in the a place before using strain a pet with a special traveling the tires. The resulting loss of
your phone. In some States/Pro- harness which can be secured to the rear vehicle control could lead to an
vinces, only hands-free phones seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier accident.
may legally be used while driving. which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s Check and, if necessary, adjust the
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers pressure of each tire (including the spare)
& Modification of your vehicle in the front passenger’s seat. For further at least once a month and before any long
information, consult your veterinarian, journey.
CAUTION local animal protection society or pet Check the tire pressure when the tires are
shop. cold.
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire
parts and accessories. Other types pressures to the values shown on the tire
of modifications could affect its placard.
performance, safety or durability, Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in
and may even violate governmental chapter 11 for detailed information.
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)
& California proposition 65

warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
北米Model "A2450BE-A" Edited: 2008/ 1/ 18

Black plate (12,1)
10
1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-46)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-50)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-51)
5) Moonroof (page 2-28)
6) Roof rail (page 8-15)
7) Door locks (page 2-5)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-36)
9) Flat tires (page 9-4)
10) Tire chains (page 8-13)
11) Fog light switch (page 3-49)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
13) Towing hook (page 9-13)

Black plate (13,1)
11
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-54) 0
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-21)
4) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
5) Towing hook (page 9-13)
6) Trunk lid (page 2-24)
7) Rear gate (page 2-27)
8) Bulb replacement (page 11-53)
9) Rear wiper switch (page 3-53)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (14,1)
12
& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-35)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-13)
3) Center console (page 6-6)
4) Front seat (page 1-2)
5) Rear seat (page 1-9)

Black plate (15,1)
13
1) Top tether anchorages (page 1-38)
2) Dome lights (page 6-2) 0
3) Sun visors (page 6-4)
4) Cargo area light (page 6-2)
5) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-19)
6) Cargo area cover (page 6-14)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)
14
1) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)
2) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-15/
page 7-17)
3) Selector lever (AT) (page 7-19/
page 7-25)
4) Information display (page 3-41)
5) Clock (page 3-41)
6) Dashboard storage compartment
(page 6-5)
7) Navigation system (Refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the navigation
system.)
8) Glove box (page 6-5)
9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)
10) Audio (page 5-1)
11) Climate control (page 4-1)
12) Pocket (page 6-8)
13) Accessory power outlet (page 6-9)
14) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (page 3-59)
15) SI-DRIVE selector (page 7-32)
16) Cup holder (page 6-8)

Black plate (17,1)
15
& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-5)

0
2) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-48)
3) Remote control mirror (page 3-57)
4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-53)
5) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-42)
6) Audio control buttons (page 5-26)
7) Light control lever (page 3-46)
8) Combination meter (page 3-5/page 3-24)
9) Wiper control lever (page 3-49)
10) Paddle shift (page 7-28)
11) Cruise control (page 7-46)
12) S# switch for SI-DRIVE (page 7-33)
13) Horn (page 3-59)
14) SRS airbag (page 1-40)
15) Multi-information display operation
switch (page 3-9)
16) Fuse box (page 11-47)
17) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)
18) Power windows (page 2-21)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)
16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Parking light switch (page 3-48)
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-49)
3) Mist (page 3-51)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-52)
5) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-53)
6) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-52)
7) Wiper control lever (page 3-51)
8) Light control lever (page 3-46)
9) Front fog light switch (page 3-49)
10) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-46)
11) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-46)
12) Turn signal (page 3-47)

Black plate (19,1)
17
& Combination meter 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

0
2) Tachometer (page 3-6)
! U.S.-spec. models (with SI-DRIVE) 3) Shift-up indicator light (MT models)
(page 3-38)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Fuel gauge (page 3-6)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-10)
7) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
8) Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-40)
9) Multi-information display (page 3-9)
10) S# PREP indicator light (page 3-7/
page 3-39)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)
18
! U.S.-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

6) Low fuel warning light (page 3-27)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-25)
8) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-39)
9) Gear position indicator (page 3-39)

Black plate (21,1)
19
! Canada-spec. models (with SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

2) Tachometer (page 3-6) 0
3) Shift-up indicator light (MT models)
(page 3-38)
7) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
8) Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-40)
9) Multi-information display (page 3-9)
10) S# PREP indicator light (page 3-7/
page 3-39)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)
20
! Canada-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

6) Low fuel warning light (page 3-27)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-25)
8) Selector lever position indicator
(page 3-39)
9) Gear position indicator (page 3-39)

Black plate (23,1)
21
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page 0
Mark Name Page / Low fuel warning light 3-36 Headlight indicator light 3-40
Seatbelt warning light 3-29 Low tire pressure

All-Wheel Drive warn- 3-36
ing light (AT models) warning light 3-33
(U.S.-spec. models)
Front passenger’s 3-29
seatbelt warning light Vehicle Dynamics Front passenger’s
Control operation indi- 3-37 / frontal airbag ON indi- 1-48/
cator light (if equipped) cator light 3-31
SRS airbag system 3-30
warning light Vehicle Dynamics Front passenger’s
Control warning light (if / frontal airbag OFF in- 1-48/
CHECK ENGINE equipped)/Vehicle Dy- dicator light 3-31
namics Control OFF 3-37
warning light/Malfunc- 3-31
tion indicator lamp indicator light (if SPORT mode indicator
equipped) light (4-speed AT mod- 3-38
els)
Charge warning light 3-32
Security indicator light 3-38 Shift-up indicator light
(MT models with 3-38
Oil pressure warning SI-DRIVE)
light 3-32 Turn signal indicator
lights 3-40 S# PREP indicator light
(vehicle with 3-39
AT OIL TEMP warning SI-DRIVE)
light (AT models) 3-33 High beam indicator
light 3-40
/ ABS warning light 3-34 Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped) 3-40
/ Brake system warning 3-35

light Cruise control indicator 3-40
light
Door open warning 3-36
light Cruise control set indi- 3-40
cator light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (24,1)
22
& Trunk/cargo area 1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Jack (page 9-18)
3) Spare tire (page 9-2)

Black plate (25,1)
23
Function settings 0
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some
of these functions can be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the monitor
system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-18
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only vehicles Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-20
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
*1
Map light/Dome light illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-16
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-11
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Remote engine start system Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-11
(dealer option)
Rear window defogger for Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-54
the vehicle with the auto- Continuous operation
matic climate control system
Windshield wiper deicer Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-53
(if equipped) Continuous operation
Map light/Dome light Operation of map light/dome light OFF OFF/Short/Normal/Long Normal 6-2/6-3
delay timer
*2
Map light Operation in conjunction with remote ON/OFF ON 6-3
keyless entry system and opening door
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (26,1)
24
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6
function
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-15
*1, *2: To have the map lights illuminate when the alarm system is triggered, it is necessary to set both *1 and *2 settings to “ON”.

Black plate (1,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2 Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-24
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-3 System monitors ............................................... 1-25
Power seat (if equipped) ...................................... 1-4 System servicing ............................................... 1-26
Memory function (driver’s seat — if equipped) ..... 1-5 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-27
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-7 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-27
Active head restraint ........................................... 1-7 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-29
Lumbar support (if equipped) .............................. 1-8 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-30
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-8 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Rear seats............................................................ 1-9 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-30
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-34
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-10 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-35
Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-12
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-38
Loading long objects (Sedan) ............................. 1-12
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-13 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-40
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-13
Vehicle with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-15 restraints for driver, front passenger, and
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor window-side rear passengers........................... 1-40
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-15 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-45
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-15 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-56
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-17 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-63
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-23 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-65
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-66

Black plate (28,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats position when the SRS airbag

WARNING
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag Put children aged 12 and under in
WARNING needs enough space for deploy- the rear seat properly restrained at
ment, the driver should always all times. The SRS airbag deploys
. Never adjust the seat while driv- sit upright and well back in the with considerable speed and force
ing to avoid the possibility of seat as far from the steering and can injure or even kill children,
loss of vehicle control and of wheel as practical while still especially if they are 12 years of age
personal injury. maintaining full vehicle control and under and are not restrained or
. Before adjusting the seat, make and the front passenger should improperly restrained. Because chil-
sure the hands and feet of rear move the seat as far back as dren are lighter and weaker than
seat passengers or luggage are possible and sit upright and well adults, their risk of being injured
clear of the adjusting mechan- back in the seat. from deployment is greater. Conse-
ism. quently, we strongly recommend
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- that ALL children (including those
straint when the occupant sits in child seats and those that have
well back and upright in the seat. outgrown child restraint devices) sit
To reduce the risk of sliding in the REAR seat properly re-
under the seatbelt in a collision, strained at all times in a child
the front seatbacks should be restraint device or in a seatbelt,
always used in the upright posi- whichever is appropriate for the
tion while the vehicle is running. child’s age, height and weight.
If the front seatbacks are not Secure ALL types of child restraint
used in the upright position in a devices (including forward facing
collision, the risk of sliding under child seat) in the REAR seats at all
the lap belt and of the lap belt times.
sliding up over the abdomen will
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
increase, and both can result in
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
serious internal injury or death.
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
. The SRS airbags deploy with INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
considerable speed and force. BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
Occupants who are out of proper TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (29,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
According to accident statistics, ! Reclining the seatback 1

children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to the “Child restraint
systems” section in this chapter.
& Manual seat

! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
WARNING release the lever and make sure the seat
is securely locked into place.
To prevent the passenger from slid- The seatback placed in a reclined position
ing under the seatbelt in the event of can spring back upward with force when
a collision, always put the seatback released. When operating the reclining
in the upright position while the lever to return the seatback, hold it lightly
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not so that it may be raised back gradually.
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
the desired position. Then release the will increase, and both can result in
lever and move the seat back and forth to serious internal injury or death.
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (30,1)
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s & Power seat (if equipped) ! Reclining the seatback
seat)
! Forward and backward adjustment
The height of the seat can be adjusted by WARNING

moving the seat cushion adjustment lever To adjust the seat forward or backward,
up and down. move the control switch forward or back- To prevent the passenger from slid-
ward. ing under the seatbelt in the event of
When the lever is pushed down, the seat a collision, always put the seatback
is lowered. NOTE in the upright position while the
When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises. During backward-forward adjustment vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat place objects such as cushions
cushion angle or seat height. between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.

Black plate (31,1)
. Height of seat
switch.
1
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat) ! Registration of seat position
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of
personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands, feet and posses-
sions of rear seat passengers are
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move clear of the adjusting mechan-
the control switch. ism.
! Seat cushion angle adjustment . Before registering the seat posi-
(driver’s seat) To adjust the seat height, pull up or push tion, confirm that the shift lever is
down the rear end of the control switch. in the “P” position (AT models) or
the parking brake lever is applied
& Memory function (driver’s (MT models).
seat — if equipped)
1. Shift the shift lever in the “P” position
Two of your favorite seat positions can be (AT models) or apply the parking brake
registered. Register the seat position with (MT models).
button “1” or “2” and retrieve the seat 2. Adjust the seat position.
position by pressing either button.
The following seat positions can be
registered:
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up . Angle of seat cushion
or push down the front end of the control
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (32,1)
models). Do not drive until the

retrieval of the seat position is
complete.
. Be sure to press the registered
button of your seat position to
retrieve the seat position. If the
seat position is not optimum, an
incorrect driving position dis-
turbs driving and also the seat-
belt does not function correctly,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
. To retrieve the seat position,
3. While pressing the “SET” button, press make sure the hands, feet or 1. Shift the shift lever in the “P” position
the desired button “1” or “2”. luggage of rear seat passengers (AT models) or apply the parking brake
4. The chirp sounds once, and the seat are clear of the seat adjusting (MT models).
position is registered. mechanism. 2. Press the desired button “1” or “2”.
. When any trouble or malfunction 3. The chirp sounds once and the seat
! Retrieval of seat position moves to the registered position.
occurs during the retrieval of the
seat position, stop the retrieval of 4. When the seat moves to the registered
WARNING the seat position using the con- position, the chirp sounds twice.
. Never retrieve the seat position trol switch for manual adjust-
while driving to avoid the possi- ment. WARNING
bility of loss of vehicle control
and of personal injury. . Be sure to press the registered
button of your seat position to
. Perform the seat position retrie- retrieve the seat position. If the
val before driving. Before retriev- seat position is not the optimum,
ing the seat position, confirm an incorrect driving position dis-
that the shift lever is in the “P” turbs driving and also the seat-
position (AT models) or the park- belt does not function correctly,
ing brake lever is applied (MT which could result in serious

Black plate (33,1)
To raise:
injury or death. equipped with active head restraints. They
automatically tilt forward slightly in the
1
. To retrieve the seat position, Pull the head restraint up.
make sure the hands, feet or To lower: event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
luggage of rear seat passengers Push the head restraint down while decreasing the amount of rearward head
are clear of the seat adjusting pressing the release button on the top of movement and thus reducing the risk of
mechanism. the seatback. whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the
head restraint should be adjusted so that
WARNING the center of the head restraint is closest
NOTE to the top of the occupant’s ears.
. If a new position is registered for the Never drive the vehicle with the
same button, the previous seat posi- head restraints removed because CAUTION
tion is deleted. they are designed to reduce the risk
. Each active head restraint is
. If the battery is disconnected, the of serious neck injury in the event
effective only when its height is
registered seat position is not deleted. that the vehicle is struck from the
rear. properly adjusted and the driver/
passenger sits in the correct
& Head restraint adjustment position on the seat.
& Active head restraint . If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer in-
spect the active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate in the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subjected to
shock. As a result, they may not
The head restraint should be adjusted so function if the vehicle suffers a
that the center of the head restraint is rear impact.
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. The front seats of your vehicle are
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)
& Lumbar support (if equipped) Seat heater (if equipped) adjustment dial for each seat heater
illuminates when that seat heater is
activated.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
Pull the lever forward or backward. to warn the persons concerned.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the The seat heater is equipped in the front
seats. . Do not put anything on the seat
amount of support for your lower back. which insulates against heat,
The seat heater operates when the igni- such as a blanket, cushion, or
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” similar items. This may cause the
position. seat heater to overheat.
Each seat heater has four levels of
adjustment. To use the heater in the NOTE
right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment
Use of the seat heater for a long period
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the
of time while the engine is not running
desired position. To activate the heater in can cause battery discharge.
the left-hand seat, turn the “L” adjustment
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the
desired position. Each heater warms the
seat most quickly with the “ ” mark on the
adjustment dial in the furthest-forward
position. An indicator light next to the

Black plate (35,1)
Rear seats & Folding down the rear seat- 1

back
WARNING
. After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. And
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
WARNING the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
Never stack luggage or other cargo may result in serious injury or
WARNING death.
higher than the top of the seatback
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and . Secure skis and other lengthy
straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a items properly to prevent them
back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident. from being thrown around inside
put cushions or any other materials the vehicle and causing serious
between occupants and seatbacks injury during a sudden stop, a
or seat cushions. If you do so, the sudden steering maneuver or a
risk of sliding under the lap belt and rapid acceleration.
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (36,1)
! Sedan models the key counterclockwise, and then fold & Head restraint adjustment
the seatback down while pushing the
release button. WARNING
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks Never drive the vehicle with the
into place and make sure that it is securely head restraints removed because
locked. they are designed to reduce the risk
! Wagon models of serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
! Rear windows side seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the click position.
Unlock the seatback by pushing the

release button and then fold the seatback
down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
1) Lock into place and make sure that it is securely
2) Unlock locked.
3) Release button
Insert the key into the key cylinder on the
seatback, unlock the seatback by turning

Black plate (37,1)
! Rear center seating position 1

(Station wagon)
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the click position.
A) When not used (retracted position) Station wagon

B) When used (click position) When the seat is occupied:
Raise the head restraint to the click
position by pulling it up.
When the seat is not occupied:
To improve rearward visibility, push the
head restraint down while pressing the
release button on the top of the seatback.
A) When not used (retracted position)

B) When used (click position)
Sedan
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (38,1)
Armrest (if equipped) To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of serious
injury, passengers must never be
allowed to sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
& Loading long objects (Sedan)
When the seat is occupied:

Raise the head restraint to the click
position by pulling it up. Sedan
When the seat is not occupied:
To improve rearward visibility, push the
head restraint down while pressing the
release button on the top of the seatback.
! Rear center seating position (Se-
dan)
The head restraint for the rear center seat
cannot be adjusted.
1) Lock
2) Unlock
Folding down the armrest and opening the
seatback panel affords a loading space for
Station wagon long objects.
To open the seatback panel, unlock with
the key lock and pull the seatback panel

Black plate (39,1)

NOTE
down while pulling the release tab. Seatbelts 1
To protect your belongings in the trunk
WARNING from theft, it is recommended that you & Seatbelt safety tips
lock the seatback panel.
. Secure long objects properly to
prevent them from shooting for- WARNING
ward and causing serious injury . All persons in the vehicle should
during a sudden stop or sharp fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
cornering. Tie long objects down the vehicle starts to move. Other-
with a rope or something equiva- wise, the possibility of serious
lent. injury becomes greater in the
. Avoid loading objects longer event of a sudden stop or acci-
than 6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than dent.
55 lbs (25 kg). Such objects can . All belts should fit snugly in order
interfere with the driver’s proper to provide full restraint. Loose
operation of the vehicle, possibly fitting belts are not as effective in
causing an accident and serious preventing or reducing injury.
injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (40,1)
the rear seat properly restrained According to accident statistics, the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
at all times. The SRS airbag children are safer when properly anchor height (window-side seating posi-
deploys with considerable speed restrained in the rear seating tions only) and then if necessary move the
and force and can injure or even positions than in the front seat- child closer to the belt buckle to help
kill children, especially if they are ing positions. For instructions provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
12 years of age and under and and precautions concerning the be taken to securely place the lap belt as
are not restrained or improperly child restraint system, refer to low as possible on the hips and not on the
restrained. Because children are the “Child restraint systems” child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
lighter and weaker than adults, section in this chapter. belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
their risk of being injured from restraint system should be used. Never
deployment is greater. Conse- Your vehicle is equipped with a crash place the shoulder belt under the child’s
quently, we strongly recommend sensing and diagnostic module, which will arm or behind the child’s back.
that ALL children (including record the use of the seatbelt by the front ! Expectant mothers
those in child seats and those passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
that have outgrown child re- side and curtain airbags deploys.
straint devices) sit in the REAR
! Infants or small children
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device Use a child restraint system that is
or in a seatbelt, whichever is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to the
appropriate for the child’s height “Child restraint systems” section in this
and weight. chapter.
Secure ALL types of child re- ! Children
straint devices (including for- If a child is too big for a child restraint
ward facing child seats) in the system, the child should sit in the rear seat
REAR seats at all times. and be restrained using the seatbelts.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD According to accident statistics, children
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE are safer when properly restrained in the Expectant mothers also need to use the
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS rear seating positions than in the front seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO seating positions. Never allow a child to for specific recommendations. The lap belt
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE stand up or kneel on the seat. should be worn securely and as low as
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses possible over the hips, not over the waist.
THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (41,1)
& Emergency Locking Retrac- Retractor (ALR) mode.

1
tor (ELR) When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
Locking Retractor (ELR). tractor (ELR) function by allowing the
The emergency locking retractor allows seatbelt to retract fully.
normal body movement but the retractor For instructions on how to convert the
locks automatically during a sudden stop, retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly the ELR mode, refer to the “Child restraint
out of the retractor. systems” section in this chapter.
& Automatic/Emergency Lock- & Seatbelt warning light
ing Retractor (A/ELR) and chime Driver’s warning light (vehicle with SI-
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- DRIVE)
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
warning device at the driver’s and front
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
passenger’s seat, as required by current
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
safety standards.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) position, this device reminds the driver
mode” intended to secure a child restraint and front passenger to fasten their seat-
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn belts by illuminating the warning lights in
out completely and is then retracted even the locations indicated in the following
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in illustration and sounding a chime.
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, ALR mode is released. Driver’s warning light (vehicle without SI-
DRIVE)
When securing a child restraint system on
the passengers’ seats, the seatbelt must
be changed over to the Automatic Locking
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)
The warning light(s) for unfastened to fail.

seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not install any accessory such as a
steady illumination and flashing at table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will . Do not store a heavy load in the
not sound. seatback pocket.
– At speeds higher than approxi- . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front
The warning light(s) for unfastened passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback.
flashing and steady illumination at
. Do not use front seats with their back-
15-second intervals and the chime
ward-forward position and seatback not
will sound while the warning light(s)
being locked into place securely. If any of
is/are flashing.
them are not locked securely, adjust them
Front passenger’s warning light . It is possible to cancel the warning again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
operation that follows the 6-second “Manual seat” in the front seats section in
! Operation
warning after turning ON the ignition Chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. (Mod-
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ switch. When the ignition switch is
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when els equipped with manual seats only)
turned ON next time, however, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” complete sequence of the warning If the seatbelt warning device for the front
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will operation resumes. For further details passenger’s seat does not function cor-
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the about canceling the warning operation, rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- please contact your SUBARU dealer. front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will deactivated even when the front passen-
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
NOTE device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s . Ensure that no article is placed on the
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
occupant detection system monitors seat other than a child restraint system
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
whether or not there is a passenger on and the child occupant.
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
to the vehicle speed. Observe the following precautions. Failure seatback pocket.
– At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device sition and seatback of front passenger’s

Black plate (43,1)
seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
WARNING 1
equipped with manual seats only) used in the upright position in a Never place the shoulder belt under
collision, the risk of sliding under the arm or behind the back. If an
If the seatbelt warning device for front the lap belt and of the lap belt
passenger’s seat still does not function accident occurs, this can increase
sliding up over the abdomen will the risk or severity of injury.
correctly after taking relevant corrective increase, and both can result in
actions described above, immediately serious internal injury or death.
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. . Do not put cushions or any other CAUTION
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
& Fastening the seatbelt become very hot in a vehicle that
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap has been closed up in sunny weath-
WARNING belt sliding up over the abdomen er; they could burn an occupant. Do
will increase, and both can result not touch such hot parts until they
. Never use a belt that is twisted or cool.
reversed. In an accident, this can in serious internal injury or
increase the risk or severity of death.
injury. ! Front seatbelts
. Keep the lap belt as low as 1. Adjust the seat position:
possible on your hips. In a colli- Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
sion, this spreads the force of the upright position. Move the seat as far from
lap belt over stronger hip bones the steering wheel as practical while still
instead of across the weaker maintaining full vehicle control.
abdomen. Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- back to the upright position. Move the seat
straint when the occupant sits as far back as possible.
well back and upright in the seat. 2. Sit well back in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
under the seatbelt in a collision, belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the front seatbacks should be the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
always used in the upright posi- return the belt slightly and pull it out more
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the shoulder belt. Pull down the anchor to make sure that it
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible is locked in place.
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again. on your hips, not on your waist.
WARNING
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
When wearing the seatbelts, make
belt anchor height
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push the button on the buckle.
Push the release button and slide the
Before closing the door, make sure that
anchor down.
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

Black plate (45,1)
catching the belt webbing in the door. Push the button on the buckle.
1
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center Before closing the door, make sure that
seatbelt) the belts are retracted properly to avoid
1. Sit well back in the seat. catching the belt webbing in the door.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the ! Rear center seatbelt
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)
Sedan models
WARNING WARNING Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess on the rear shelf behind the rear
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
seat head restraint.
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector’s tongue
pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
cially when inserting the connector’s buckle on the right-hand side),
tor’s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.
Wagon models
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the

Black plate (47,1)
recess of the ceiling. 2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
retractor.
1
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot in the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure

that the “ ” mark on the connector
3. After confirming that the webbing is not (tongue) and the “ ” mark on the buckle
twisted, insert the connector (tongue) face outwards.
Sedan models attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard. If the belt stops before reaching
the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

Wagon models into the center seatbelt buckle marked
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it ! Unfastening the seatbelt

clicks.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed

Push the release button of the center object into the slot in the connector
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to (buckle) on the right-hand side and push
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as unfasten the seatbelt. it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
low as possible on your hips, not on your disconnect from the buckle.
waist.
Sedan models

Black plate (49,1)
CAUTION 1
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
Wagon models Sedan models damage to the trim.
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and & Seatbelt maintenance
guide it back into the retractor while it is To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the recess and then insert the connector the belts because this could seriously
(tongue) plate into the slot. affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
Wagon models
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (50,1)
CAUTION Front seatbelt pretensioners small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not
. Keep the belts free of polishes, harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
oils, chemicals and particularly fire in the vehicle.
battery acid. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
. Never attempt to make modifica- activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
tions or changes that will prevent locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
the seatbelt from operating prop- be pulled out and retracted and therefore
erly. must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
roll-over accidents.
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- . The driver’s seat and passenger’s
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seat pretensioners and frontal airbag
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be operate simultaneously.
activated in the event of an accident . Pretensioners are designed to func-
involving a moderate to severe frontal tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
collision. event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
SRS frontal airbag sensor. If the sensor
replaced and only by an authorized
detects a certain predetermined amount of
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
force during a frontal collision, the front
belt retractor assemblies, use only
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the
genuine SUBARU parts.
retractor to take up the slack so that the
. If either front seatbelt does not
belt more effectively restrains the front
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
seat occupant.
a malfunction or activation of the
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
an operating noise will be heard and a dealer as soon as possible.

Black plate (51,1)
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been
retractor
ping the
assemblies or scrap-
entire vehicle due to
1
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer collision damage or for other
as soon as possible. reasons, consult your SUBARU
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge dealer.
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section. & System monitors
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
occupants should sit in an up-
right position with their seatbelts SRS airbag system warning light (vehicle
properly fastened. Refer to the without SI-DRIVE)
“Seatbelts” section in this chap- A diagnostic system continually monitors
ter. the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
. Do not modify, remove or strike while the vehicle is being driven. The
the front seatbelt retractor as- seatbelt pretensioners share the control
semblies or surrounding area. module with the airbag system. Therefore,
This could result in accidental if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt
activation of the seatbelt preten- SRS airbag system warning light (vehicle pretensioner, the SRS airbag system
sioners or could make the sys- with SI-DRIVE) warning light will illuminate. The SRS
tem inoperative, possibly result- airbag system warning light will show
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt normal system operation by lighting for
pretensioners have no user-ser- approximately 6 seconds when the igni-
viceable parts. For required ser- tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
vicing of front seatbelt retractors The following components are monitored
equipped with seatbelt preten- by the indicator:
s i o n e r s , s e e y o u r n ea r e s t
SUBARU dealer. . Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. When discarding front seatbelt
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)
. Airbag control module (including im- control module & System servicing
pact sensors) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator WARNING
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- . All related wiring
ger’s side) . When discarding a seatbelt re-
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- WARNING tractor assembly or scrapping
hand side) the entire vehicle damaged by a
If the warning light exhibits any of collision, consult your SUBARU
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- the following conditions, there may dealer.
hand side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) . Tampering with or disconnecting
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag the system’s wiring could result
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s system. Immediately take your vehi- in accidental activation of the
side) cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel to have the system checked. Unless bag or could make the system
house right-hand side) checked and properly repaired, the inoperative, which may result in
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS serious injury. Do not use elec-
house left-hand side) airbags will operate improperly (e.g. trical test equipment on any
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) SRS airbags may inflate in a very circuit related to the seatbelt
minor collision or not inflate in a
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) pretensioner and airbag sys-
severe collision), which may in- tems. For required servicing of
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear crease the risk of injury.
center seat) the seatbelt pretensioner, consult
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
ing light
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side) . No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
first turned to the “ON” position
ger’s side)
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension . Continuous illumination of the
sensor warning light
. Front passenger’s occupant detection . Illumination of the warning light
system weight sensor while driving
. Front passenger’s occupant detection

Black plate (53,1)
CAUTION & Precautions against vehicle Child restraint systems 1

modification
The front sub sensors are located in Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
both front fenders and the airbag you want to install any accessory parts to
control module including the impact your vehicle.
sensors is located under the center
console. If you need service or CAUTION
repair in those areas or near the
front seatbelt retractors, have an Do not perform any of the following
authorized SUBARU dealer perform modifications. Such modifications
the work. can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
NOTE . Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
If the front part of the vehicle is skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
damaged in an accident to the extent ine SUBARU accessory parts to Infants and small children should always
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not the front end. be placed in an infant or child restraint
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer system in the rear seat while riding in the
as soon as possible. . Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure. vehicle.
. Installation of a tire of different You should use an infant or child restraint
size and construction from the system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
tires specified on the vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
placard attached to the door cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
pillar or specified for individual your vehicle and is appropriate for the
vehicle models in this Owner’s child’s age and size.
Manual.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (54,1)
tether anchorages (LATCH)”).

WARNING WARNING
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not Never let a passenger hold a child Children should be properly re-
properly secured in the vehicle. When on his or her lap while the vehicle is strained at all times. Never allow a
installing the child restraint system, care- moving. The passenger cannot pro- child to stand up, or to kneel on any
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. tect the child from injury in a colli- seat. Unrestrained children will be
sion, because the child will be thrown forward during sudden stop
According to accident statistics, children caught between the passenger and or in an accident and can be injured
are safer when properly restrained in the objects inside the vehicle. Addition- seriously.
rear seating positions than in the front ally, holding a child in your lap or Additionally, children standing up or
seating positions. arms in the front seat exposes that kneeling on or in front of the front
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces child to another serious danger. seat are exposed another serious
require that infants and small children be Since the SRS airbag deploys with danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
restrained in an approved child restraint considerable speed and force, the ploys with considerable speed and
system at all times while the vehicle is child could be injured or even killed. force, the child could be injured or
moving. even killed.

Black plate (55,1)
& Where to place a child reinstalling a child restraint system. WARNING 1
straint system Some types of child restraints might not be
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s able to be secured firmly due to projection Put children aged 12 and under in
recommendations on where to place a of the seat cushion. the rear seat properly restrained at
child restraint system in your vehicle. In this seating position, you should use all times. The SRS airbag deploys
only a child restraint system that has a with considerable speed and force
bottom base that fits snugly against the and can injure or even kill children,
contours of the seat cushion and can be especially if they are 12 years of age
securely retained using the seatbelt. and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because chil-
C: Rear seat, center seating position dren are lighter and weaker than
Installing a child restraint system is not adults, their risk of being injured
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- from deployment is greater.
belt and an upper anchorage (tether For that reason, be sure to secure
anchorage) are provided in this position. ALL types of child restraint devices
Some types of child restraints might not be (including forward facing child
able to be secured firmly due to projection seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
of the seat cushion. You should choose a restraint de-
In this seating position, you should use vice which is appropriate for the
A: Front passenger’s seat only a child restraint system that has a child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
You should not install a child restraint bottom base that fits snugly against the cording to accident statistics, chil-
system (including a booster seat) due to contours of the seat cushion and can be dren are safer when properly re-
the hazard to children posed by the securely retained using the seatbelt. strained in the rear seating posi-
passenger’s airbag. tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)
& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys-

system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING Unsecured child restraint sys-
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A (weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
R E A R W A R D FA C I N G C H I L D child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO cle Safety Standards for United States or
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO for Canada. It can be identified by looking
THE SRS AIRBAG. for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacture’s statement of com-
pliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
will be used.

Black plate (57,1)
or around the child restraint system

CAUTION
following the instructions provided by its
1
When you install a child restraint manufacturer.
system, follow the manufacturer’s 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
instructions supplied with it. After until you hear a click.
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child 6. Push and pull the child restraint
restraint system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. seat cushion and then tightening the
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the seatbelt.
retractor to change the retractor over from 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) properly functioning).
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
8. To remove the child restraint system, 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
press the release button on the seatbelt 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
buckle and allow the belt to retract retractor to change the retractor over from
completely. The belt will return to the the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
ELR mode. to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
WARNING into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- retractor functions as ALR.
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO seating position.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its
SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer.

Black plate (59,1)
additional instructions.
1
6. Before having a child sit in the child Sedan

restraint system, move it back and forth 9. To remove the child restraint system,
and right and left to check if it is firmly press the release button on the seatbelt
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can buckle and allow the belt to retract
be more firmly secured by pushing it down completely. The belt will return to the
into the seat cushion and then tightening ELR mode.
the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt NOTE
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
When the child restraint system is no
properly functioning).
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Station wagon
8. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
Refer to the “Top tether anchorages” for
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)
& Installing a booster seat CAUTION following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
WARNING When you install a child restraint 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
system, follow the manufacturer’s until you hear a click. Take care not to
. Child restraint systems and seat- instructions supplied with it. After twist the seatbelt.
belts can become hot in a vehicle installing the child restraint system, Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
that has been closed up in sunny check to ensure that it is held across the center of child’s shoulder and
weather; they could burn a small securely in position. If it is not held that the lap belt is positioned as low as
child. Check the child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your possible on the child’s hips.
system before you place a child child suffering personal injury in the
in it. event of an accident may be in-
. Do not leave an unsecured child creased.
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it. The WARNING
child should sit well back on the booster
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
seat.
reversed. In an accident, this can
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through increase the risk or severity of
or around the booster seat and the child injury to the child.

Black plate (61,1)
. Never place the shoulder belt & Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your 1
under the child’s arm or behind systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
the child’s back. If an accident tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
occurs, this can increase the risk creased.
or severity of injury to the child. WARNING
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in Some types of child restraint systems can
order to provide full restraint. . Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
Loose fitting belts are not as belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
effective in preventing or redu- that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
cing injury. weather; they could burn a small dedicated anchorages provided on the
child. Check the child restraint vehicle body.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A system before you place a child The lower and tether anchorages are
high-positioned lap belt will in- in it. sometimes referred to as the LATCH
crease the risk of sliding under . Do not leave an unsecured child system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
the lap belt and of the lap belt restraint system in your vehicle. CHildren).
sliding up over the abdomen, and Unsecured child restraint sys-
both can result in serious inter- tems can be thrown around in-
nal injury or death. side of the vehicle in a sudden
. Make sure the shoulder belt is stop, turn or accident; they can
positioned across the center of strike and injure vehicle occu-
child’s shoulder. Placing the pants as well as result in serious
shoulder belt over the neck may injuries or death to the child.
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (62,1)
the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower Station wagon

anchorages (bars) and three upper an- The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- chorages) are provided for all the seating
modating such child restraint systems. positions (center and both window-side
ones) of the rear seat.
Sedan
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the

Black plate (63,1)
rear seat seatbacks. These marks indicate

the positions of the lower anchorages
Peel off the anchorage cover from the
selected side of the rear seatback to
1
(bars). expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
Each lower anchorage is located behind for installation of the child restraint system.
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
2. If your child restraint system is of a
tight and secure, the danger of your
flexible attachment type (which uses
child suffering personal injury in the
tether belts to connect the child restraint
event of an accident may be in-
system properly to the lower anchorages),
creased.
1. While following the instructions sup- while pushing the child restraint into the
plied by the child restraint system manu- seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the tether belts up to secure the child restraint
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on system firmly by taking up the slack in the
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the belt.
hooks are connected, make sure the 3. Connect the top tether hook to the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, read the following “Top tether
anchorages”.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)
instructions by the child restraint system ! Station wagon

manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Tether anchorage location
! Sedan
4. Before seating a child in the child

restraint system, try to move seat back Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
and forth and left and right to verify that it right, center and left positions, are already
is held securely in position. installed on the rear edge of the roof.
5. To remove the child restraint system, Open the cover flap to use each ancho-
follow the reverse procedures of installa- rage.
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages Three tether anchorages are installed on

Your vehicle is equipped with three top the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
tether anchorages so that a child restraint restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
system having a top tether can be anchorage.
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the

Black plate (65,1)
! To hook the top tether 4. Tighten the top tether securely.

1
! Sedan
CAUTION
Do not route the top tether over the
head restraint. It may happen that
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
When the child restraint system is to
be secured using the top tether,
pass the top tether under the head
restraint between the head restraint
stay posts. If the top tether still
2. Open the cover flaps to use the cannot be fastened tightly, remove
anchorages. the head restraint.
1. Remove the head restraint at the

! Station wagon
seating position where the child seat has
been installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages; lift up the head restraint while
pressing the release button.
Store the head restraint in the trunk. Avoid
placing the head restraint in the passen-
ger compartment to prevent it from being
thrown around in the passenger compart-
ment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
1. Remove the head restraint at the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (66,1)
seating position where the child restraint *SRS airbag (Supplemental

system has been installed with the seat-
belt or lower anchorages; lift up the head
Restraint System airbag)
restraint while pressing the release button. *SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
Store the head restraint in the cargo area. straint system. This name is used be-
Avoid placing the head restraint in the cause the airbag system supplements the
passenger compartment to prevent it from vehicle’s seatbelts.
being thrown around in the passenger
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
turn. sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper & Vehicle with SRS airbags and
anchorage. lap/shoulder restraints for
4. Tighten the top tether securely. driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers
CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
Always remove the head restraint lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
when mounting a child restraint position and each rear window-side seat-
system with a top tether. Otherwise, ing positions. The supplemental restraint
2. Open the cover flaps to use the it may happen that the top tether system (SRS) consists of six airbags.
anchorages. cannot be fastened tightly. The configurations are as follows:
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-

Black plate (67,1)
gers) refer to the “Seatbelts” section in needs enough space for deploy- 1
this chapter. ment, the driver should always
These SRS airbags are designed only
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily sit upright and well back in the
as a supplement to the primary protec-
close to the SRS airbag. Because seat as far from the steering
tion provided by the seatbelt.
the SRS airbag deploys with wheel as practical while still
The system also controls front seatbelt considerable speed – faster than maintaining full vehicle control
pretensioners. For operation instructions the blink of an eye – and force to and the front passenger should
and precautions concerning the seatbelt protect in high speed collisions, move the seat as far back as
pretensioner, refer to the “Front seatbelt the force of an airbag can injure possible and sit upright and well
pretensioners” section in this chapter. an occupant whose body is too back in the seat.
close to SRS airbag. . Do not place any objects over or
WARNING near the SRS airbag cover or
It is also important to wear your
between you and the SRS airbag.
. To obtain maximum protection in seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS If the SRS airbag deploys, those
the event of an accident, the
airbag contacts an occupant not objects could interfere with its
driver and all passengers in the
in proper position such as one proper operation and could be
vehicle should always wear seat-
thrown forward during pre-acci- propelled inside the vehicle and
belts when the vehicle is moving.
dent braking. cause injury.
The SRS airbag is designed only
as a supplement to the primary Even when properly positioned,
protection provided by the seat- there remains a possibility that
belt. It does not do away with the an occupant may suffer minor
need to fasten seatbelts. In com- injury such as abrasions and
bination with the seatbelts, it bruises to the face or arms
offers the best combined protec- because of the SRS airbag de-
tion in case of a serious accident. ployment force.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases . The SRS airbags deploy with
the chance of severe injury or considerable speed and force.
death in a crash even when the Occupants who are out of proper
vehicle has the SRS airbag. position when the SRS airbag
For instructions and precautions deploys could suffer very serious
concerning the seatbelt system, injuries. Because the SRS airbag
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)
restraint devices) sit in the REAR SRS airbag deploys with consid-
seat properly restrained at all erable force and can injure or
times in a child restraint device even kill the child.
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight. CAUTION
Secure ALL types of child re- . When the SRS airbag deploys,
straint devices (including for- some smoke will be released.
ward facing child seats) in the This smoke could cause breath-
REAR seats at all times. ing problems for people with a
According to accident statistics, history of asthma or other
children are safer when properly breathing trouble. If you or your
restrained in the rear seating passengers have breathing pro-
WARNING positions than in the front seat- blems after SRS airbag deploys,
ing positions. get fresh air promptly.
. Put children aged 12 and under in For instructions and precautions . A deploying SRS airbag releases
the rear seat properly restrained concerning the child restraint hot gas. Occupants could get
at all times. The SRS airbag system, refer to the “Child re- burned if they come into direct
deploys with considerable speed straint systems” section in this contact with the hot gas.
and force and can injure or even chapter.
kill children, especially if they are
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
12 years of age and under and
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
NOTE
are not restrained or improperly When you sell your vehicle, we urge
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
restrained. Because children are you to explain to the buyer that it is
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
lighter and weaker than adults, equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
their risk of being injured from him or her to the applicable section in
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
deployment is greater. this Owner’s Manual.
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Consequently, we strongly re-
. Never allow a child to stand up,
commend that ALL children (in-
or to kneel on the front passen-
cluding those in child seats and
ger’s seat, or never hold a child
those that have outgrown child
on your lap or in your arms. The

Black plate (69,1)
! Components 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side) 1
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
Sedan
1) Airbag control module (including impact 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
sensors) 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side) side)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)
10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
right-hand side)
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
system weight sensor
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
Station wagon
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensors) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) hand side)

Black plate (71,1)
& SUBARU advanced frontal system. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE 1

airbag system The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
in the center portion of the steering wheel. THE SRS AIRBAG.
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com- The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard
requirements in the amended Federal under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
No. 208. the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
system automatically determines the de- seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal driver’s and front passenger’s head and
airbag at the time of deployment as well as chest.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the WARNING
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH Never allow a child to stand up, or to
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
attached to the glove box lid beginning The SRS airbag deploys with con-
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air siderable force and can injure or
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read even kill the child.
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU WARNING
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
seated in an appropriate child restraint SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your

Black plate (73,1)

NOTE . Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
1
The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- . Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
sioner are not controlled by the ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- immediately.
tem. . Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag . Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator senger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
the severity of impact. la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
The total load on the seat is monitored by . The front passenger’s seat must not be
WARNING the passenger’s occupant detection sys- used with the head restraint removed.
tem weight sensor under the seat.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not leave any article including a
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- The system has another sensor that child restraint system on the front passen-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the monitors the tension of the front passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
SRS airbag deploys, those objects ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and buckle engaged when you leave your
could become projectiles that could seatbelt tension data from the sensors, vehicle.
seriously injure vehicle occupants. the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal . Do not place a magnet near the
airbag should or should not be inflated. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag The occupant detection system may not . Do not use front seats with their back-
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal ward-forward position and seatback not
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal being locked into place securely. If any of
different ways depending on the severity airbag deploys. This is normal. them are not locked securely, adjust them
of impact. again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
Observe the following precautions. Failure “Manual seat” in the front seats section in
Have the system inspected by your to do so may prevent the SUBARU Chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. (Mod-
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS advanced frontal airbag system from els equipped with manual seats only)
airbag system warning light illuminates. functioning correctly or cause the system
to fail. If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)
passenger’s occupant detection system ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU
have failed, the SRS airbag system OFF indicators advanced frontal airbag system monitor-
warning light will illuminate. Have the ing.
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
er immediately if the SRS airbag system is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
warning light illuminates. ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this indicator will remain extinguished.
may affect the proper function of the If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
Have your vehicle inspected at your airbag ON indicator will remain extin-
SUBARU dealer. guished while the OFF indicator will
illuminate.
NOTE If both the ON and OFF indicators remain
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, lit or extinguished simultaneously, the
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU
tensioner are not controlled by the or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag dealer immediately for an inspection.
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- ON indicator
tem. ! Conditions in which front passen-
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
and OFF indicators show you the status of
will not be activated when any of the
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
following conditions are met regarding the
The indicators are located between the front passenger’s seat:
map lights.
. The seat is empty.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
facing child restraint system and an infant
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
which time the system is checked. Follow-
follows.)
ing the system check, both indicators
extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one . The seat is equipped with a forward
of the indicators illuminates depending on facing child restraint system and a small
the status of the front passenger’s SRS child is restrained with it. (See WARNING

Black plate (75,1)
that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- ! If the front passenger’s frontal air- 1
. The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest bag ON indicator illuminates and the
seat and a small child is in the booster place for children. OFF indicator extinguishes even
seat. (See WARNING that follows.) when an infant or a small child is in
. The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu- a child restraint system (including
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following booster seat)
mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
. The seat is occupied by a child who the load on the front passenger’s seat, position if the front passenger’s frontal
has outgrown a child restraint system activating the front passenger’s SRS airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a frontal airbag even though that seat is OFF indicator extinguishes even when an
small adult. occupied by a child. infant or a small child is in a child restraint
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- . Do not place any article on the seat system (including booster seat). Remove
tion system is faulty. other than the child occupant and a child the child restraint system from the seat. By
restraint system. referring to the child restraint manufac-
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on turer’s recommendations as well as the
the seat. child restraint system installation proce-
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a dures in the “Child restraint systems”
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback. section in this chapter, correctly install
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the the child restraint system. Turn the ignition
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket. switch to the “ON” position and make sure
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be that the front passenger’s frontal airbag
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
sure to install it in the REAR seat in ON indicator goes out and the OFF
place his/her hands or legs on the front
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly indicator illuminates.
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
recommended that any forward fa-
pull the seatback. If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take
even children who have outgrown a the following actions.
child restraint system be also . Ensure that no article is placed on the
seated in the REAR seat. This is seat other than the child restraint system
because children sitting in the front and the child occupant.
passenger’s seat may be killed or . Ensure that there is no article left in the
severely injured should the front seatback pocket.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- the fact that the actions noted above . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
sition and seatback of front passenger’s have been taken, seat the child/small lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
seat are locked into place securely by adult in the rear seat and immediately using his/her feet.
moving the seat back and forth. (Models contact your SUBARU dealer for an . Do not place any article under the front
equipped with manual seats only) inspection. Even if the system has passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
passed the dealer inspection, it is from behind and under the seat. This may
If the ON indicator still illuminates while recommended that on subsequent trips
the OFF indicator extinguishes after taking lift the seat cushion.
the child/small adult always take the . Do not squeeze any article between
relevant corrective actions described rear seat.
above, relocate the child restraint system the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
to the rear seat and immediately contact Children who have outgrown a child pillar, door or center console box. This
your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. restraint system should always wear the may lift the seat cushion.
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
NOTE is deactivated or activated. ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen- indicator illuminates and the ON
restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated indicator extinguishes even when
seated in the front passenger’s seat, the front passenger’s seat is occu-
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag pied by an adult
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
system may or may not activate the This can be caused by the adult incor-
impact when any of the following condi-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
tions is met regarding the front passen-
depending on the occupant’s seating
ger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS position. Ask the front passenger to set
frontal airbag is activated (the ON . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
indicator illuminates while the OFF . When a heavy article is placed on the straight in the center of the seat cushion,
indicator extinguishes), take the follow- seat. correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
ing actions. her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
. Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
. Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat, indicator remains illuminated while the ON
the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS indicator remains extinguished, take the
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat following actions.
If the ON indicator still illuminates while
is occupied by an adult. . Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
the OFF indicator extinguishes despite
position.

Black plate (77,1)
. Ensure that there is no article, book, bag system. If you have any questions, in such an area, please contact the
shoe, or other object trapped under the you may contact the following SUBARU SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
1
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side distributors: you bought your vehicle.
of the seat.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- of Columbia>
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by Subaru of America, Inc.
moving the seat back and forth. (Models Customer Dealer Services Department
equipped with manual seats only) P.O. Box 6000
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
tors extinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
ON indicator should illuminate while the 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
OFF indicator remains extinguished. HI 96819
808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still illuminates while
the ON indicator remains extinguished, <Guam>
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
frame, instrument panel, combination me- 00910
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, 787-793-2828
suspension or floor panel can affect the There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
operation of the SUBARU advanced air- tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)
! Operation system is designed to determine the from detecting impact to the deflation of
activation or deactivation condition of the the SRS airbag after deployment is short-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag er than the blink of an eye.
depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
passenger’s occupant detection system airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
weight sensor. For this reason, only the passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
the event of a collision, but this does not pretensioners operate at the same time.
mean failure of the system. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
If the front sub sensors inside both front airbag would activate in a non-accident
fenders and the impact sensors in the situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
airbag control module detect a predeter- will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
mined amount of force during a frontal and will not interfere with the driver’s
collision, the control module sends signals ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
module or both driver’s and front passen- fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) some smoke will be released. These
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The occurrences are a normal result of the
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal deployment. This smoke does not indicate
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two a fire in the vehicle.
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending CAUTION
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending Do not touch the SRS airbag system
on the severity of impact and the total load components around the steering
on the seat in the case of the front wheel and dashboard with bare
1) Driver’s side hands right after deployment. Doing
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
2) Passenger’s side so can cause burns because the
The SRS airbag can function only when After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- components can be very hot as a
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s result of deployment.
vision is not obstructed. The time required
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

Black plate (79,1)
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front ! Examples of accident in which the ! Examples of the types of accidents 1
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- driver’s/driver’s and front passen- in which it is possible that the
signed to deploy in the event of an ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
accident involving a moderate to severe likely deploy. ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-
frontal collision. It is basically not designed ploy.
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
cause the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are basically not designed to deploy in
side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the A head-on collision against a thick con-
level of force experienced in the passen- crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
ger compartment during a collision. That mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
level differs from one type of collision to only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
another, and it may have no bearing on driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
the visible damage done to the vehicle airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
itself. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).

Black plate (81,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole. 1
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag and SRS
in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
curtain airbag
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar.
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not
frontal airbags are designed basically not be activated on the second impact.

Black plate (83,1)
WARNING door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than
1
The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of
curtain airbag are designed as only a side impact collision. However,
a supplement to the primary protec- the force of SRS side airbag
tion provided by the seatbelt. They deployment may cause injuries
do not do away with the need to if your head or other parts of the
fasten seatbelts. It is also important body are too close to the SRS
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid side airbag.
injuries that can result when an . Since your vehicle is equipped
occupant is not seated in a proper with SRS curtain airbags, do not
upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms and hands out of the win- WARNING
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on Do not rest your arm on either front
each side of the cabin is stored in door or its internal trim. It could be
the roof side (between the front injured in the event of SRS side
pillar and a point over the rear airbag deployment.
seat), and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact. However, the force
of its deployment may cause
injuries if your head is too close
to it.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the
strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
any passenger’s seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the
side window or put their head, vehicle’s occupants and cause
arms and hands out of the win- injuries.
dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to
airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win-
her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other
curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

Black plate (85,1)
A hands-free microphone or ! Operation 1

other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. If such items
were hanging on the coat hooks
during deployment of the SRS
curtain airbags, they could cause
serious injuries by coming off the WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
coat hooks and being thrown Do not put any kind of cover or airbag can function only when the ignition
through the cabin or by prevent- clothes or other objects over either switch is in the “ON” position.
ing deployment of the curtain front seatback and do not attach
airbags. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
labels or stickers to the front seat side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
Before hanging clothing on the surface on or near the SRS side deploy independently of each other since
coat hooks, make sure there are airbag. They could prevent proper each has its own impact sensor. There-
no sharp objects in the pockets. deployment of the SRS side airbag, fore, they may not both deploy in the same
Hang clothing directly on the reducing protection available to the accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
coat hooks without using hang- front seat’s occupant. SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
ers.
of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the left and
right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
Another impact sensor, which also senses
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)
impact force, is located under the rear the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, it is basically not designed to
center seat. applied. deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
If one of the center pillar impact sensors When the SRS side airbag and SRS deployment would not help the occupant
and the impact sensor that is located curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud in those situations.
under the rear center seat together sense inflation noise will be heard and some
an impact force above a predetermined smoke will be released. These occur- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
level in a side collision, the control module rences are a normal result of the deploy- airbag are designed to function on a one-
causes both the SRS side airbag and ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire time-only basis.
curtain airbag on the impacted side to in the vehicle. SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
inflate regardless of whether the rear deployment depend on the level of force
wheel house impact sensor on the same CAUTION experienced in the passenger compart-
side senses an impact. ment during a side impact collision. That
Do not touch the SRS side airbag level differs from one type of collision to
If one of the rear wheel house impact system components around the
sensors and the impact sensor that is another, and it may have no bearing on
front seat seatback with bare hands the visible damage done to the vehicle
located under the rear center seat to- right after deployment. Doing so can
gether sense a sufficiently strong impact itself.
cause burns because the compo-
force, the control module causes only the nents can be very hot as a result of
SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side deployment.
to inflate. After deployment, do not touch any
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
for a while following deployment then airbag are designed to deploy in the event
slowly deflates. of an accident involving a moderate to
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. It is basically
airbag deploy even when no one occupies not designed to deploy in a lesser side

Black plate (87,1)
! Example of the type of accident in 1

which the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag will most likely de-
ploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (89,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
1
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- & SRS airbag system monitors
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
Vehicle with SI-DRIVE

1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag
ary).
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (90,1)
ger’s side) WARNING

. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side) If the warning light exhibits any of
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- the following conditions, there may
hand side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s system. Immediately take your vehi-
side) cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel checked and properly repaired, the
house right-hand side) seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
house left-hand side) SRS airbags may inflate in a very
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE . Curtain airbag module (right-hand side) minor collision or not inflate in a
A diagnostic system continually monitors . Curtain airbag module (left-hand side) severe collision), which may in-
the readiness of the SRS airbag system . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear crease the risk of injury.
(including front seatbelt pretensioners) center seat) . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
while the vehicle is being driven. The . Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) ing light
SRS airbag system warning light “AIR- . Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- . No illumination of the warning
BAG” will show normal system operation ger’s side) light when the ignition switch is
by lighting for approximately 6 seconds
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- first turned to the “ON” position
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ger’s side) . Continuous illumination of the
“ON” position.
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension warning light
The following components are monitored sensor . Illumination of the warning light
by the indicator: . Front passenger’s occupant detection while driving
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side) system weight sensor
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side) . Front passenger’s occupant detection
. Airbag control module (including im- control module
pact sensors) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- . All related wiring

Black plate (91,1)
& SRS airbag system servicing CAUTION parts.

1
WARNING If you need service or repair in areas NOTE
listed in the following, have an In the following cases, contact your
. When discarding an airbag mod- authorized SUBARU dealer perform SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
ule or scrapping the entire vehi- the work. The SRS airbag control . The front part of the vehicle was
cle damaged by a collision, con- module, impact sensors and airbag involved in an accident in which the
sult your SUBARU dealer. modules are stored in these areas. only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
. The SRS airbag has no user- . Under the center console both driver’s and front passenger’s
serviceable parts. Do not use SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
. Inside each front fender . The pad of the steering wheel, the
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag . Steering wheel and column and cover over the front passenger’s SRS
system. For required servicing of nearby areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the SRS airbag, consult your . Top of the dashboard on front the front pillar to a point over the rear
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
ing with or disconnecting the areas wise damaged.
system’s wiring could result in . Center pillar, rear wheel house or
. Each front seat and nearby area
accidental inflation of the SRS rear sub frame, or an area near these
. Inside each center pillar parts, was involved in an accident in
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in . In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
serious injury. pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
. Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front
and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
side damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
. Under the rear center seat involved in an accident.
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (92,1)
& Precautions against vehicle . Installation of additional electri- etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
modification cal/electronic equipment such as accessory parts to the side body.
a mobile two-way radio on or
WARNING near the SRS airbag system Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
components and/or wiring is not you want to install any accessory parts on
To avoid accidental activation of the advisable. This could interfere your vehicle.
system or rendering the system with proper operation of the
inoperative, which may result in SRS airbag system.
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system. CAUTION
This includes following modifica- Do not perform any of the following
tions: modifications. Such modifications
. Installation of custom steering can interfere with proper operation
wheels of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of additional trim . Attachment of any equipment
materials to the dashboard (bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
. Installation of custom seats plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU acces-
. Replacement of seat fabric or sory parts.
leather
. Modification of the suspension
. Installation of additional fabric or system or front end structure.
leather on the front seat
. Installation of a tire of different
. Attachment of a hands-free mi- size and construction from the
crophone or any other accessory tires specified on the vehicle
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a placard attached to the driver’s
rear pillar, the windshield, a side door pillar or specified for indivi-
window, an assist grip, or any dual vehicle models in this Own-
other cabin surface that would be er’s Manual.
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag. . Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,

Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Alarm system ..................................................... 2-16

Key number ........................................................ 2-2 System alarm operation ..................................... 2-16
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16
2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4 system ............................................................ 2-17
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Arming the system ............................................ 2-17
Door locks ........................................................... 2-5 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-19
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-6 Passive arming .................................................. 2-19
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6 Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-20
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-7 Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-20
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-7 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-21
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8 Windows............................................................. 2-21
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9 Power windows ................................................. 2-21
Unlocking the doors ........................................... 2-10 Trunk lid (Sedan) ............................................... 2-24
Unlocking the trunk lid/rear gate ......................... 2-10 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-24
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10 To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-24
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-11 To lock and unlock the trunk lid release
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-11 lever................................................................ 2-25
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11 Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-25
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-13 Rear gate (Station wagon) ................................ 2-27
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-28
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan)......................... 2-29
Moonroof (Station wagon) .................................. 2-30

Black plate (96,1)
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys and door locks. You can keep the trunk number plate attached to the key set.
and glove box locked when you leave your Write down the key number and keep it in
vehicle and valet key at a parking facility. another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
CAUTION key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs For information on making replacement
against your knees while you are keys for vehicles with the immobilizer
driving, it could turn the ignition system, refer to the “Immobilizer” section
switch from the “ON” position to the in this chapter.
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number

1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box 1) Key number plate
. Trunk lid release lever 2) Security ID plate
The valet key fits only the ignition switch The key number is stamped on the key

Black plate (97,1)
Keys and doors 2-3
Immobilizer device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key
ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
The immobilizer system is designed to accept any interference received, in- immediately.
prevent an unauthorized person from cluding interference that may cause 2
starting the engine. Only keys registered undesired operation.
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if pressly approved by the party respon-
an unregistered key fits into the ignition sible for compliance could void the
switch and can be turned to the “START” user’s authority to operate the equip-
position, the engine will automatically stop ment.
after several seconds.
NOTE
Each immobilizer key contains a trans- To protect your vehicle from theft,
ponder in which the key’s ID code is please pay close attention to the fol-
stored. When a key is inserted into the lowing security precautions:
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
position, the transponder transmits the
with its keys inside.
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
windows and lock the doors and rear
matches the ID code registered in the
gate (Station wagon). 1) Key number plate
immobilizer system, the system allows the
. Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
record of your key number in the
transmitted and acted upon almost in- The security ID is stamped on the security
vehicle.
stantly, the immobilizer system does not ID plate attached to the key set. Write
impede normal starting of the engine. down the security ID and keep it in
If the engine does not start, pull out the CAUTION another safe place, not in the vehicle.
key once before trying again. Refer to the . Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace-
“Ignition switch” section in chapter 3. sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it
become hot. inside the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of This number is also needed for replace-
Industry Canada. Operation is subject ment or repair of the engine control unit,
to the following two conditions: (1) This integrated unit, and combination meter.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)
2-4 Keys and doors
& Security indicator light equipped with an immobilizer system. It have their ID codes erased and re-
begins flashing approximately 60 seconds registered when a new key is made.
after the ignition switch is turned from the Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” be presented when a new key is regis-
position or immediately after the key is tered. Any key that is not re-registered
pulled out. when a new key is made cannot be used
If the security indicator light does not flash, after the other keys are re-registered. For
the immobilizer system may be faulty. If information on replacement keys and on
this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer the registration of keys with your immo-
as soon as possible. bilizer system, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
an imitation key), the security indicator NOTE
light illuminates. A vehicle that is equipped with the
remote engine start system as the
Vehicle with SI-DRIVE NOTE dealer option can register up to three
Even if the security indicator light keys for use with one vehicle.
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
& Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
The security indicator light deters potential For security, all the keys registered with
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

Black plate (99,1)
Keys and doors 2-5
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from 2
the outside
Locking without the key Locking without the key

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. 1) Push the power door locking switch
2) Close the door. forward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and To lock the door from the outside using the
To lock the driver’s door from the outside power door locking switch, push the
then close the door.
with the key, turn the key toward the rear. switch forward (“LOCK” side) and then
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the close the door. In this case, all closed
front. doors and the rear gate (Station wagon)
Lift the outside door handle to open an are locked at the same time.
unlocked door. Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (100,1)
2-6 Keys and doors
& Locking and unlocking from To lock the door from the inside, rotate the & Battery drainage prevention
the inside lock lever rearward. function
If a door or the rear gate (Station wagon)
WARNING is not completely closed, the interior lights
will remain illuminated as a result. How-
Keep all doors locked when you ever, several lights are automatically
drive, especially when small chil- turned off by the battery drainage preven-
dren are in your vehicle. tion function to prevent the battery from
Along with the proper use of seat- going dead. The following interior lights
belts and child restraints, locking are affected by this function.
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an Item Switch Automatically turning
accident. position off
It also helps prevent passengers Map lights OFF Approximately 30
seconds later
from falling out if a door is acciden-
To unlock the door from the inside, rotate Dome Approximately 10
tally opened, and intruders from DOOR
the lock lever forward. lights minutes later
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle. The red mark on the lock lever appears Ignition — Approximately 10
when the door is unlocked. switch light minutes later
Pull the inside door handle to open an Door step — None*
unlocked door. lights
Always make sure that all doors and the Cargo area DOOR None*
light
rear gate (Station wagon) are closed and
locked before starting to drive. *: Door step lights and the cargo area light are
not affected by the battery drainage prevention
function, so the lights do not turn off automa-
tically. To turn off the lights, it is necessary that
each door and the rear gate (Station wagon) are
completely closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of

Black plate (101,1)
Keys and doors 2-7
this function can be changed by a Power door locking switches All doors and the rear gate (Station
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest wagon) can be locked and unlocked by
SUBARU dealer if you would like to the power door locking switches located at
change the setting. the driver’s side and the front passenger’s 2
side doors.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting) To lock all doors (including the rear gate of
for this function is set as “operational”. a Station wagon), push the switch to the
. When leaving the vehicle, please front (“LOCK”) position.
make sure that all doors and the rear To unlock all doors (including the rear gate
gate (Station wagon) are completely of a Station wagon), pull the switch to the
closed. rear position.
. The battery drainage prevention When you close the doors after you set
function does not operate while the the door locks, the doors remain locked.
key is in the ignition switch.
Driver’s switch NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
Front passenger’s switch With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switch is pushed to the front
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (102,1)
2-8 Keys and doors
(“LOCK”) position. NOTE Remote keyless entry system

! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . The factory setting (default setting)
tion function non-operational for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure CAUTION
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
you are holding the key before locking
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
the doors. . Do not expose the transmitter to
open and the driver’s door is then closed severe shocks, such as those
with the lock lever in that position, the experienced as a result of drop-
driver’s door is locked. ping or throwing.
. If the spare key is used to lock the . Do not take the transmitter apart
driver’s door from the outside of the except when replacing the bat-
vehicle, the door is locked. tery.
This function’s operational/non-opera- . Do not get the transmitter wet. If it
tional setting can be changed. gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
Vehicle with genuine SUBARU naviga- immediately.
tion system:
The operational/non-operational setting This device complies with Part 15 of
can be changed using the monitor. For the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
details, please refer to the Owner’s Man- Industry Canada. Operation is subject
ual supplement for the monitor system. to the following two conditions: (1) This
The setting can also be changed by a device may not cause harmful inter-
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest ference, and (2) this device must
SUBARU dealer for details. accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
Vehicle without genuine SUBARU navi-
undesired operation.
gation system:
Changes or modifications not ex-
The setting can be changed by a
pressly approved by the party respon-
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
sible for compliance could void the
SUBARU dealer for details.
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.

Black plate (103,1)
Keys and doors 2-9
The transmitter for the remote keyless NOTE & Locking the doors
entry system is located inside the key The remote keyless entry system does
head. not operate when the ignition key is
inserted in the ignition switch. 2
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate on the Station wagon) without a
key
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
trunk lid on the Sedan) without key
. Unlocking the rear gate on the Station
wagon without key
. Unlocking the trunk lid on the Sedan
without key
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
. Sounding a panic alarm rear gate (Station wagon). An electronic
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- chirp will sound once and the turn signal
tem. See the next section “Alarm system” : Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button lights will flash once.
for detailed information. : Unlock/disarm button If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
: Lock/arm button lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
The operable distance of the remote A: Panic button
keyless entry system is approximately 30 will sound five times and the turn signal
feet (10 meters). However, this distance lights will flash five times to alert you that
will vary depending on environmental the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are
conditions. The system’s operable dis- not properly closed. When you close the
tance will be shorter in areas near a door, it will automatically lock and then an
facility or electronic equipment emitting electronic chirp will sound once and the
strong radio waves such as a power plant, turn signal lights will flash once.
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (104,1)
2-10 Keys and doors
& Unlocking the doors & Unlocking the trunk lid/rear & Vehicle finder function
gate Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not re-
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s spond to the signals from the remote
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice transmitter.
! Sedan
and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button
(Station wagon), briefly press the “ ” is pressed continuously for at least 2
button a second time within 5 seconds. seconds. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the turn signal lights will flash
NOTE twice.
If the interval between the first and ! Station wagon
second presses of the “ ” button (for Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
unlocking of all of the doors and the gate.
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond. An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.

Black plate (105,1)
Keys and doors 2-11
& Sounding a panic alarm signal. You can also use the same steps swallow them.
to restore the function. . Danger of explosion if battery is
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
incorrectly replaced. Replace 2
only with the same or equivalent
2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the type.
power door locking switch. . Batteries shall not be exposed to
3. While holding down the “UNLOCK” excessive heat such as sun-
side of the power door locking switch, pull shine, fire or the like.
the key out and re-insert it into the ignition
switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds If the transmitter fails to operate when
after Step 2. used within the standard distance, this
4. Open and close the driver’s door once may indicate a weak battery. Replace the
within 10 seconds after Step 3. battery as soon as possible. The battery
5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to can be replaced by your authorized
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” indicate completion of the setting. SUBARU dealer. If you replace the battery
button once. by yourself, use utmost care that no dust,
You may have the above settings done by oil or water enters the transmitter.
The horn will sound and the turn signal
your SUBARU dealer.
lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any & Replacing the battery
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote transmitter is CAUTION
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
& Selecting audible signal op- cing the battery.
eration . Be careful not to damage the
Using an electronic chirp, the system will printed circuit board in the trans-
give you an audible signal when the doors mitter when replacing the battery.
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn . Be careful not to allow children to
the audible signal off. touch the battery and any re-
Do the following to deactivate the audible moved parts; children could
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)
2-12 Keys and doors
To replace the battery:
3. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
1. Remove the screw on the key head. key head. 5. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent)
making sure to install the new battery with
the negative (−) side facing up.
6. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
7. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
8. Reinstall the screw on the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
2. Open the key head using a flat-head 4. Open the transmitter case by releasing six times to synchronize the unit.
screwdriver. the hooks.

Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors 2-13
& Replacing lost transmitters Programming transmitter codes into sary to program the transmitter’s code
If you lose a transmitter or want to system: (identification number) into the system. A
tag showing the code is affixed to the key
purchase additional transmitters (up to
unit, and another is affixed to the circuit 2
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secur- board inside the transmitter. If there is no
ity reasons. It is recommended that you tag, open the transmitter case and make a
have your dealer program all of your note of the eight-digit number. Program
transmitters into your system. the number into the system in accordance
with the following procedure:
! Programming the transmitters 1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
The remote keyless entry system is gate (Station wagon) or trunk lid (Sedan).
equipped with a special code learning 2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the
feature that allows you to program new driver’s seat, and close the door.
transmitter codes into the system or to 3. Perform the following steps within 45
delete old ones. The system can learn up seconds.
to four unique transmitter codes. The four Key unit tag
transmitter codes may be the same or
different.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door

Transmitter circuit board
once.
To register a new transmitter with the
remote keyless entry system, it is neces-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)
2-14 Keys and doors
NOTE NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is . The electronic tone will stop sound-
completed, an electronic tone will ing when you start entering the num-
sound for 30 seconds. ber.
. If you do not perform the operations . If you do not start entering the
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error number using the lock knob before
will occur and the electronic tone will the electronic tone stops sounding, an
not sound. In this event, perform the error will occur. In this event, perform
registration steps again beginning with the registration steps again beginning
part 3 of the procedure. with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one push of
the knob and the next exceeds five
seconds, an error will occur. In this
1) LOCK event, perform the procedure again
2) ON beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
(2) Insert the key into the ignition six times, perform the procedure again
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK” starting with part 3.
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and 5. Before the electronic tone stops
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will sounding, press the power door lock knob
occur. An electronic tone will not to the “LOCK” side the same number of
sound. In this event, perform the whole times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-
procedure again beginning with part 1. ter code. For example, press the lock knob
4. Open and close the door once within eight times if the leftmost digit of the code
15 seconds. is 8.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, pull the lock knob to the “UN-

Black plate (109,1)
Keys and doors 2-15
LOCK” side within 5 seconds. NOTE ! Deleting old transmitter codes

If you do not start entering the number The control unit of the remote keyless
NOTE using the lock knob before the electro- entry system has four memory locations to
. An electronic tone will sound. nic tone stops sounding, an error will store transmitter codes, giving it the ability 2
. If you pull the lock knob to the occur. In this event, perform the proce- to operate with up to four transmitters.
“UNLOCK” side when more than 5 dure again beginning with part 3. When you lose a transmitter, the lost
seconds have passed, an error will transmitter’s code remains in the memory.
occur. In this event, perform the proce- 9. When you have finished entering the For security reasons, lost transmitter
dure again beginning with part 4. If an code a second time, an electronic tone will codes should be deleted from the mem-
error occurs six times, perform the sound for 1 second to indicate completion ory.
procedure again starting with part 3. of registration, provided the code entered To delete old transmitter codes, program
the second time is identical to that entered four transmitter codes into the system. If
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure the first time.
for each of the remaining digits of the you have only one current transmitter,
transmitter code beginning with the sec- NOTE program it four times. If you have two
ond digit (counting from the left) and current transmitters, program each one
If the code entered the second time is
finishing with the eighth digit. twice. If you have three current transmit-
not identical to the code entered the ters, program two of them once and the
first time, an error will occur. In this third one twice. This process will leave
NOTE event, perform the procedure again
. When you finish entering the eighth only current transmitter codes in the
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs system’s memory.
digit, an electronic tone will sound for five times, perform the procedure again
30 seconds. starting with part 3.
. If the interval between one push of
the knob and the next exceeds 5 10. If you wish to program another trans-
seconds, an error will occur. In this mitter code into the system (up to four
event, perform the procedure again transmitter codes can be programmed into
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs the system), perform the procedure begin-
six times, perform the procedure again ning with part 4. When you have finished
starting with part 3. programming all of the necessary trans-
mitter codes into the system, remove the
8. Before the electronic tone stops key from the ignition switch.
sounding, use the power door lock knob 11. Test every registered transmitter to
to again enter the transmitter code begin- confirm correct operation.
ning with the leftmost digit.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)
2-16 Keys and doors
NOTE Alarm system sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

Make sure no one else is operating The alarm is triggered by:
their remote keyless entry system with- The alarm system helps to protect your
in range of your vehicle when program- vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk
ming transmitters. If someone else sounds and the turn signal lights flash if lid
were to operate their remote transmit- someone attempts to break into your . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
ter while you are programming your vehicle. The starter motor is also inter- forced entry (only vehicles with shock
transmitters, it is possible that their rupted to prevent starting the vehicle sensors (dealer option))
transmitter code will be programmed without a key.
into your system, allowing them un-
NOTE
authorized access to your vehicle. The system can be armed and disarmed The alarm system can be set to trigger
with the remote transmitter. illumination of map lights and dome
The system does not operate when the light. The map lights and dome light
key is inserted into the ignition switch. notification is deactivated as the fac-
tory setting. Refer to the “Function
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set settings” section that is mentioned
for activation at the time of shipment from earlier in this manual. A SUBARU deal-
the factory. You can set the system for er can activate the system. Contact
deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer for details.
your SUBARU dealer.
& System alarm operation & Activating and deactivating

The alarm system will give the following
the alarm system
alarms when triggered: To change the setting of your vehicle’s
. The vehicle’s horn will sound and the alarm system for activation or deactiva-
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds. tion, do the following.
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) 1. Disarm the alarm system (refer to
remains open after the 30-second period, “Disarming the system” in this section).
the horn will continue to sound for a 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the Station wagon).
horn is sounding, the horn will stop 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

Black plate (111,1)
Keys and doors 2-17
position. & If you have accidentally trig-

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the gered the alarm system
driver’s power door locking switch, open
the driver’s door within the following 1 ! To stop the alarm 2
second, and wait 10 seconds without Do any of the following operations:
releasing the switch. The setting will then . Insert the key in the door lock of the
be changed as follows: driver’s door and turn it to the unlock
position.
If the system was previously activated:
. Press any button on the remote trans-
For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the
mitter.
odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL
oF”, and for a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
multi-information display shows “Security position.
alarm: OFF” and the horn sounds twice, : Press to Arm the system.
indicating that the system is now deacti- & Arming the system : Press to Disarm the system.
vated. ! To arm the system using remote
If the system was previously deacti- transmitter
vated: 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the equipped).
odometer/trip meter screen displays “AL 2. Remove the key from the ignition
on”, and for a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the switch.
multi-information display shows “Security 3. Open the doors and get out of the
alarm: ON” and the horn sounds once, vehicle.
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated. 4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid on the Sedan) are locked.
NOTE 5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on
You may have the above setting the Station wagon).
change done by your SUBARU dealer. Vehicle with SI-DRIVE
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)
2-18 Keys and doors
tically lock. sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
! To arm the system using power once and the indicator lights will start
door locking switches flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the indicator
1. Close all windows. lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-
2. Remove the key from the ignition mately every 2 seconds), indicating that
switch. the system has been armed for surveil-
3. Open the doors and get out of the lance.
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is NOTE
locked. . The system can be armed even if the
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on engine hood, the windows and/or
the station wagon) but leave only the moonroof are opened. Always make
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door sure that they are fully closed before
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less open. arming the system.
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear . The 30-second standby time can be
gate on the Station wagon) will lock, an eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
electronic chirp will sound once, the turn formed by your SUBARU dealer.
signal lights will flash once, and the . If your vehicle is a Sedan and you
indicator lights will start flashing rapidly. unlock the trunk using the remote
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand- transmitter’s “ ” button with the
by time), the indicator lights will then flash alarm system armed, the system will
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec- be temporarily placed in a standby
onds), indicating that the system has been state. The system will go back to the
armed for surveillance. surveillance state upon locking the
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid) trunk.
is not fully closed, an electronic chirp . The system is in the standby mode
sounds five times, the turn signal lights for a 30-second period after locking the
flash five times to alert you that the doors 6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of doors with the remote transmitter. The
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed. the power door locking switch to set the security indicator light will flash at
When you close the door, the system will door locks. short intervals during this period.
automatically arm and doors will automa- 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will . If any of the following actions is

Black plate (113,1)
Keys and doors 2-19
done during the standby period, the driver’s door and turn it to the unlock To exit valet mode, change the setting of
system will not switch to the surveil- position. your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
lance state. mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
– Doors are unlocked using the ! Emergency disarming ing the alarm system” in this section. 2
remote transmitter. If you cannot disarm the system using the
– Any door (including the rear gate transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, & Passive arming
of a Station wagon or the trunk of a broken or the transmitter battery is too When passive arming mode has been
Sedan) is opened. weak), you can disarm the system without programmed by the dealer, arming of the
– Ignition switch is turned to the using the transmitter. system is automatically accomplished
“ON” position. The system can be disarmed if you turn without using the remote transmitter. Note
the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
& Disarming the system “ON” position with a registered key. MANUALLY LOCKED.
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than Insert the key in the door lock of the
driver’s door and turn it to the unlock ! To enter the passive mode
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic position. If you wish to program the passive arming
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal mode, have it done by your SUBARU
lights will flash twice and the indicator & Valet mode dealer.
light will go off. When you choose the valet mode, the ! Arming the system
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate alarm system does not operate. In valet
(Station wagon), briefly press the “ ” mode, the remote transmitter is used only CAUTION
button a second time within 5 seconds. for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (Station wagon) and panic In passive mode, the system will
NOTE activation. automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the
If the interval between the first and To enter the valet mode, change the doors. In order to lock the doors
second presses of the “ ” button (for setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for you must either lock them as in-
unlocking of all of the doors and the deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating dicated in step 4 below or with the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- and deactivating the alarm system” in this key once they have been closed.
tem may not respond. section. The security indicator light will Failure to lock the doors manually
Or the system can be disarmed by the continue to flash once every 3 seconds will result in a higher security risk.
following method, too. indicating that the system is in the valet
. Insert the key in the door lock of the mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (114,1)
2-20 Keys and doors
position. & Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, the indicator light will
light for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
When a door or rear gate (Station
wagon) was opened: 5 times
When the trunk (Sedan) was opened:
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors 4 times
1) LOCK with the inside door lock levers.
2) ON When a strong impact or multiple
5. Close the doors. The system will impacts were sensed: twice (only
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to automatically arm after one minute. vehicles with shock sensors (dealer
“LOCK” position and remove the key from In the passive mode, the system can also option))
the ignition switch. be armed with the remote transmitter or When a light impact was sensed: once
3. Open the doors and get out of the with the power door locking switches. If (only vehicles with shock sensors
vehicle. the remote transmitter or power door (dealer option))
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard- & Shock sensors (dealer op-
less of whether or not the passive mode tion)
has been selected. The shock sensors trigger the alarm
! Disarming the system system when they sense impacts applied
To disarm the system, briefly press the to the vehicle and when any of their
“ ” button on the transmitter. electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of

Black plate (115,1)
Keys and doors 2-21
a strong impact or multiple impacts by Child safety locks Windows

sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30 & Power windows 2
seconds. WARNING
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can WARNING
connect them and set them for activation Always use the child safety lock
or deactivation. whenever a child rides in the rear To avoid serious personal injury
seat. Serious injury could result if a caused by entrapment, you must
NOTE child accidentally opened the door conform to the following instruc-
. The shock sensors are not always and fell out. tions without exception.
able to sense impacts caused by break- . When operating the power win-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that dows, be extremely careful to
does not cause vibration (such as prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
breaking the glass using a rescue neck or head from being caught
hammer). in the window.
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration like those shown in the follow- . Always lock the passengers’ win-
ing and trigger the alarm system. dows using the lock switch when
Select the settings of the alarm system children are riding in the vehicle.
and shock sensors appropriately de- . Before leaving the vehicle, al-
pending on where you usually park ways remove the key from the
your vehicle. ignition switch for safety and
Example: never allow an unattended child
Vibration from construction site to remain in the vehicle. Failure
Vibration in multistory car park Each rear door has a child safety lock that to follow this procedure could
Vibration from trains prevents the doors from being opened result in injury to a child operat-
. You can have the sensitivity of the even if the inside door handle is pulled. ing the power window.
shock sensors adjusted to your pre- When the child safety lock lever is in the
ference by your SUBARU dealer. The power windows operate only when
lock position, the door cannot be opened the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
from inside regardless of the position of
the inner door handle lock lever. The door
can only be opened from the outside.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (116,1)
2-22 Keys and doors
! Driver’s side switches ! Operating the driver’s window
To close:
1) Lock switch 1) Open
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
2) For driver’s window 2) Automatically open window will close as long as the switch is
3) For front passenger’s window held.
4) For rear left passenger’s window To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. ! Operating the passengers’ windows
5) For rear right passenger’s window
The window will open as long as the
All door windows can be controlled by the switch is held.
power window switch cluster at the driver This switch also has a one-touch auto
side door. down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.

Black plate (117,1)
Keys and doors 2-23
To open: ! Locking the passengers’ windows ! Passengers’ side switches

Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reaches the
desired position. 2
To lock: Front passenger’s window switch

Push the lock switch. When the lock 1) Open
switch is in the pushed “LOCK” position, 2) Close
To close:
the passengers’ windows cannot be To open:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
opened or closed. Push the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To unlock: window reaches the desired position.
Push the lock switch again.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (118,1)
2-24 Keys and doors
Trunk lid (Sedan) trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
WARNING Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
& To open the trunk lid from
while driving. inside
. Help prevent young children from
locking themselves in the trunk.
When leaving the vehicle, either
close all windows and lock all
Rear passengers’ window switches doors or cancel the inside trunk
1) Open lid release. Also make certain
2) Close that the trunk is closed. On hot
To close: or sunny days, the temperature
Pull the switch up and hold it until the in the trunk could quickly be-
window reaches the desired position. come high enough to cause
death or serious heat-related in-
When the lock switch on the power juries including brain damage to
window switch cluster, located on the anyone locked inside, particu-
driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” larly for small children. Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches. & To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to the
“Remote keyless entry system” section in
this chapter.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the

Black plate (119,1)
Keys and doors 2-25
& To lock and unlock the trunk handle allows them to open the lid. The WARNING
lid release lever handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid. Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release 2
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
When you entrust your vehicle key to To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, handle may be damaged.
another person, you can lock the trunk lid press the yellow handle downward as . Do not use the handle as a hook
release lever to prevent luggage in the indicated by the arrow on the handle. This to fasten straps or ropes to
trunk from being stolen. To lock the trunk operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push secure your cargo in the trunk.
lid release lever, insert the master key or up the lid. Such use may result in damage
submaster key into the key cylinder at the of the handle.
rear of the release lever and turn it The handle is made of material that
counterclockwise. To unlock the trunk lid remains luminescent for approximately . Load the trunk so that cargo can
release lever, turn the key clockwise. an hour in the dark trunk space after it is not strike the release handle. If
exposed to ambient light even for a short the cargo hits the handle while
time. the vehicle is being driven, the
& Internal trunk lid release handle may be pushed down and
handle the trunk lid may open. That may
The internal trunk lid release handle is a cause cargo to fall out of the
device designed to open the trunk lid from trunk, which could create a traffic
inside the trunk. In the event children or safety hazard.
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (120,1)
2-26 Keys and doors
! Inspection If the latch is not released, contact your

Perform the following steps at least twice SUBARU dealer.
a year to check the release handle for In that case, use the key to release the
correct operation. latch, then close the trunk lid.
1. Open the trunk lid. Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
This places the latch in the locked posi-

tion.
2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.

Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit
aperture of the lock assembly fully to the
end until you hear a click.
3. Move the release handle, from outside

the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.

Black plate (121,1)
Keys and doors 2-27
Rear gate (Station wagon) WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle, 2
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
To close:
Lower it slowly and push down firmly until
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked the latch engages. CAUTION
using either the remote keyless entry The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
system or power door locking switch. pull it down holding the recessed grip. . Do not jam a plastic bag in or
Refer to the “Power door locking switches” place cellophane tape on the rear
and “Remote keyless entry system” sec- gate stays or scratch the stays
tion in this chapter. while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
To open: from the stays, which may result
First unlock the rear gate lock then pull the in their inability to hold the rear
outside handle up. gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (122,1)
2-28 Keys and doors
NOTE Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en-

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due trapment function by deliberately
to a discharged battery of the vehicle, a placing part of your body in the
malfunction in the door locking/unlock- WARNING moonroof.
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
rear gate lock release lever. head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
For the procedure, refer to the “Rear the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
gate (Station wagon) – if the rear gate
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
cannot be unlocked” section in chapter
9. vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, you must conditions have caused it to
conform to the following instruc- freeze shut.
tions without exception. . The anti-entrapment function
. Before closing the moonroof, does not operate when the moon-
make sure that no one’s hands, roof is being tilted down. Be sure
arms, head or other objects will to confirm that it is safe to do so
be accidentally caught in the before tilting the moonroof down.
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
ways remove the key from the functions.
ignition switch for safety and The moonroof operates only when the
never allow an unattended child ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof.

Black plate (123,1)
Keys and doors 2-29
& Tilting/sliding moonroof NOTE To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

(Sedan) One-touch operation does not take way position while opening or closing it,
place when the moonroof is tilted up momentarily push the switch to the
! Tilt function and down. Push the switch continu- “OPEN” or “CLOSE” side. 2
ously to tilt the moonroof up and down. After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
! Sliding function wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses an object
trapped between its glass and the vehi-
cle’s roof during closure, it automatically
moves back to either of the following
positions according to the point at which
it senses the object:
1) Tilt up . When the moonroof senses the object
2) Tilt down at a point between the halfway stop
The tilting function will only operate when position and fully closed position, it moves
1) Open back to the halfway stop position and
the moonroof is fully closed. 2) Close stops there.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to . When the moonroof senses the object
raise the moonroof. open the moonroof. The sun shade will at a point between the halfway stop
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to also be opened together with the moon- position and fully open position, it moves
lower the moonroof. roof. back to the fully open position and stops
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to there.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com- close the moonroof. The moonroof will The anti-entrapment function may also be
pletely. Pushing the switch continuously stop halfway if you continue to press on activated by a strong shock on the moon-
may cause damage to the moonroof. the switch. Release the switch once and roof even when there is nothing trapped.
push it again to close the moonroof
completely.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (124,1)
2-30 Keys and doors
NOTE ! Tilting moonroof ! Sliding moonroof

For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
! Sun shade
1) Open 1) Open
2) Close 2) Close
To tilt up the front moonroof, open the sun To fully open the rear moonroof, tilt up the
shade and pull the switch to the “OPEN” front moonroof then pull the switch to the
The sun shade can be slid forward or side. “OPEN” side and quickly release it. The
backward by hand while the moonroof is To tilt down the front moonroof, push the rear moonroof will stop at a position
closed. switch to the “CLOSE” side, then quickly approximately 6.7 in (17 cm) from its fully
release it. If you wish to stop the tilting- closed position.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back. down motion of the front moonroof part- After confirming safety, pull the switch to
way, either pull the switch to the “OPEN” the “OPEN” side again and quickly release
side or push it to the “CLOSE” side. it. The rear moonroof will open to its fully
& Moonroof (Station wagon) open position. To stop the rear moonroof
The front moonroof has a tilting function at some selected mid-way point while it is
and the rear moonroof has a sliding moving toward its fully open position,
function. momentarily push the switch to the
Both moonroof operates only when the “CLOSE” or “OPEN” side.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. To fully close the rear moonroof, push the

Black plate (125,1)
Keys and doors 2-31
switch to the “CLOSE” side then quickly ! Sun shade

release it.
The rear moonroof will stop at a position
approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) before its 2
fully closed position. After confirming
safety, pull the switch to the “CLOSE”
side again and quickly release it. The rear
moonroof will fully close. The front moon-
roof can then be fully closed.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses an object
trapped between its glass and during
closure, it automatically moves back by
5.9 in (15 cm) from that point and then
stops. The anti-entrapment function may The sun shade can be slid forward or
also be activated by a strong shock on the backward by hand while the moonroof is
moonroof even when there is nothing closed.
trapped. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
NOTE
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
. Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to gen-
erate at high speeds. If such a condi-
tion has been encountered, use the
moonroof at the initial stop position of
6.7 in (17 cm).

Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 movement upon turning on the ignition
Acc..................................................................... 3-4 switch ............................................................. 3-24
ON...................................................................... 3-4 Speedometer ..................................................... 3-24
START ................................................................ 3-4 Odometer .......................................................... 3-25 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5 Double trip meter............................................... 3-25
Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-5 Tachometer ....................................................... 3-26
Fuel gauge ........................................................ 3-26
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5
Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-27
Meters and gauges (vehicle with SI-DRIVE)...... 3-5
Warning and indicator lights............................. 3-28
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5
Seatbelt warning light and chime ....................... 3-29
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6
SRS airbag system warning light........................ 3-30
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-6
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-6 indicators ........................................................ 3-31
Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-7 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
ECO gauge ......................................................... 3-8 indicator lamp ................................................. 3-31
Multi-information display Charge warning light.......................................... 3-32
(vehicle with SI-DRIVE) .................................... 3-9 Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-32
Display ............................................................... 3-9 AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT models).............. 3-33
Operation switch ................................................. 3-9 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
Odometer and trip meter .................................... 3-10 models) ........................................................... 3-33
Current and average fuel consumption ............... 3-11 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-34
Outside temperature and journey time ................ 3-12 Brake system warning light................................ 3-35
Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-14 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-36
Clock (vehicle with genuine SUBARU navigation Door open warning light .................................... 3-36
system)............................................................ 3-15 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) .......... 3-36
SI-DRIVE display ................................................ 3-15 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator
Meter settings .................................................... 3-15 light (if equipped)............................................. 3-37
Warning messages and driver’s information........ 3-20 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (if
Meters and gauges equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
(vehicle without SI-DRIVE).............................. 3-24 indicator light (if equipped) .............................. 3-37
Combination meter illumination .......................... 3-24 Security indicator light....................................... 3-38

Black plate (6,1)
Instruments and controls
SPORT mode indicator light Driving range on remaining fuel ......................... 3-44
(4-speed AT models)......................................... 3-38 Journey time ..................................................... 3-45
Shift-up indicator light Light control switch........................................... 3-46
(MT models with SI-DRIVE) .............................. 3-38 Headlights ......................................................... 3-46
S# PREP indicator light High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-46
(vehicle with SI-DRIVE) ..................................... 3-39
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-47
Selector lever position indicator (AT models)
(if equipped)..................................................... 3-39 Daytime running light system............................. 3-47
Gear position indicator (AT models) Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-47
(if equipped)..................................................... 3-39 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-48
Selector lever and gear position indicator Parking light switch........................................... 3-48
(AT models) (if equipped).................................. 3-40 Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-49
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-40 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-49
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-40 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-51
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-40 Rear window wiper and washer switch
Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-40 (Station wagon) ............................................... 3-53
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-40 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).............. 3-53
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-40
Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-54
Clock (vehicle without genuine SUBARU Mirrors ................................................................ 3-56
navigation system).......................................... 3-41
Inside mirror...................................................... 3-56
Information display (2.5 L non-turbo model Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-56
without genuine SUBARU navigation
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-57
system) ............................................................ 3-41
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-42 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-59
Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-43 Horn .................................................................... 3-59
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-43

Black plate (129,1)
Instruments and controls 3-3
Ignition switch tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi- . If the ignition switch will not move
tion, thereby stopping the engine. from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
Also, if the key is attached to a position, turn the steering wheel
WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of slightly to the left and right as you turn
other keys, centrifugal force may act the ignition switch.
. Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting 3
“LOCK” while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition & LOCK
being driven or towed because switch.
that will lock the steering wheel, The key can only be inserted or removed
preventing steering control. And in this position. The ignition switch will lock
The ignition switch has four positions:
when the engine is turned off, it the steering wheel when you remove the
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
takes a much greater effort than key.
usual to steer. If turning the key is difficult, turn the
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ways remove the key from the as you turn the key.
ignition switch for safety and ! Automatic transmission vehicles
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the sunroof
or other controls or even make
the vehicle move.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running.
key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a
against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the The key can be turned from “Acc” to
you were driving, it could turn the “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the “LOCK” only when the selector lever is in
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- battery to go dead. the “P” position.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls
! Manual transmission vehicles

& START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
If the engine does not start with your . The key grip is touching another key
The key can be turned from “Acc” to registered key, pull out the key once (at or a metallic key holder.
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in this time, the security indicator light will
while turning it. blink), wait for at least 10 seconds,
reinsert the key in the ignition switch and
& Acc then try to start the engine again.
In this position the electrical accessories NOTE
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used. The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.

Black plate (131,1)
& Key reminder chime Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges (vehicle
The reminder chime sounds when the with SI-DRIVE)
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the key is removed from the NOTE
ignition switch. Liquid-crystal displays are used in 3
some of the meters and gauges in the
& Ignition switch light combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
For easy access to the ignition switch in
polarized glasses.
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when any of the doors are opened.
The light remains on for a several seconds & Combination meter illumina-
and gradually goes out after all doors are tion
closed or if the key is inserted in the When the ignition switch is turned to the
ignition switch.
The hazard warning flasher is used to “ON” position, the various parts of the
warn other drivers when you have to park combination meter are illuminated in the
your vehicle under emergency conditions. following sequence:
The hazard warning flasher works with the 1. Meter needles, gauge needles and
ignition switch in any position. multi-information display light up.
2. Meter needles and gauge needles
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, each show MAX position.
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
each show MIN position.
push the button again.
4. Dials in meters and gauges light up.
NOTE 5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
When the hazard warning flasher is on, gins.
the turn signals do not work.
NOTE
The above sequence of operations may
not take place if you quickly turn the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)
ignition switch to start the engine. This & Fuel gauge door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the
is not an indication of a problem. “E” position and the dial and needle will go
off.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red The fuel gauge shows the approximate
zone. In this range, fuel injection will amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
be cut by the engine control module The dial of the fuel gauge flashes five
to protect the engine from overrev- When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” times when the amount of remaining fuel
ving. The engine will resume run- or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge shows “E” reaches 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal).
ning normally after the engine speed even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
is reduced below the red zone. The gauge may move slightly during “LOCK” position and back to the “ON”
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel position, the dial will again flash five times.
level movement in the tank.
NOTE (3.0 L models only) If you press the trip knob while the ignition
To protect the engine while the selector switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the the fuel gauge’s dial and needle will light
engine is controlled so that the engine up and the needle will indicate the amount
speed may not become too high even if of fuel remaining in the tank.
the accelerator pedal is depressed If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
hard. the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 5
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s

Black plate (133,1)

NOTE ! Low fuel warning light CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause 3
damage to the engine.
& Temperature gauge
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel 1) Low fuel warning light
gauge. The low fuel warning light illuminates
This indicates that the fuel filler door when the tank is nearly empty [Approxi-
(lid) is located on the right side of the mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 lmp gal)].
vehicle.
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
NOTE 1) Normal operating range
This light does not go out unless the 2) S# PREP indicator light
tank is replenished up to an internal The temperature gauge shows engine
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US coolant temperature when the ignition
gal (15 liters, 3.3 lmp gal). switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (134,1)
We recommend that you drive moderately & ECO gauge NOTE

until the pointer of the temperature gauge . The ECO gauge shows only an
reaches near the middle of the range. approximate indication.
Engine operation is optimum with the . After resetting the trip meter, the
engine coolant at this temperature range. average rate of fuel consumption is not
And high revving operation while the shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
engine is not warmed up enough should Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
be avoided. operate.
When the engine is not warmed up
sufficiently, the S# PREP indicator light
turns on. While this indicator light is on,
the SI-DRIVE mode cannot be changed to
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. For details
about the SI-DRIVE mode, refer to the “SI-
DRIVE (turbo and 3.0 L models)” section The ECO gauge shows the difference
in chapter 7. between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption and the current rate of fuel
CAUTION consumption. Using the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
If the pointer exceeds the normal last reset, if the current rate of fuel
operating range, safely stop the consumption is higher than the average
vehicle as soon as possible. rate of fuel consumption, the indicator
Refer to “In case of emergency” in needle points to the “+” or right side, and if
chapter 9. the current rate of fuel consumption is
lower than the average rate of fuel
consumption, the indicator needle points
to the “−” or left side. When the indicator
needle is pointing to the “+” or right side, it
indicates fuel-efficient driving.

Black plate (135,1)
Multi-information display & Operation switch With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, each successive push of the
(vehicle with SI-DRIVE) operation switch changes the display in
CAUTION
& Display the following sequence:
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator 3
during driving, as an accident could
result.
1) Next (up)
2) Information display
3) Back (down)
Use the “ ” and “ ” switches to change
the display screen forward and backward.
The “ /SET” switch is used to show the
warning message again after a warning
message has been displayed once, and it
is also used to enter the desired setting *: Only for vehicles equipped with a
menu. navigation system
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (136,1)
& Odometer and trip meter that the vehicle has been driven.
! Odometer If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you
do not press the trip knob within 5
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go
off.
The odometer/trip meter will also go off if
you open and close the driver’s door
within 5 seconds of illumination of the
odometer/trip meter.
Canada-spec. models
! Double trip meter
This indication shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
U.S.-spec. models it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the trip knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to set the trip meter to zero while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 5 seconds of
U.S.-spec. models illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the
odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you
Canada-spec. models
open and close the driver’s door within 5
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
This indication shows the total distance trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go

Black plate (137,1)
off. When either of the trip meter indications is

reset, the corresponding average fuel
NOTE consumption value is also reset.
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any NOTE
reason such as vehicle maintenance or . The indicated values vary in accor- 3
fuse replacement, the data recorded on dance with changes in the vehicle’s
the trip meter will be lost. running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
& Current and average fuel actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
consumption . When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
Canada-spec. models corresponding to that trip meter indica-
1) Current fuel consumption tion is not shown until the vehicle has
2) Average fuel consumption subsequently covered a distance of 1
Current fuel consumption shows the rate mile (or 1 km).
of fuel consumption at the present mo-
ment. Average fuel consumption shows
the average rate of fuel consumption since
the trip meter was last reset.
When the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 6 mph (9.5 km/h), the
current fuel consumption is not displayed.
U.S.-spec. models The displayed number with “A” is the
average fuel consumption corresponding
to the A trip meter indication, and the
displayed number with “B” is the average
fuel consumption corresponding to the B
trip meter indication.
Those A and B indications can be
changed by depressing the trip knob.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (138,1)
& Outside temperature and 1) Outside temperature

2) Journey time
journey time
The indicator shows the outside tempera-
! Outside temperature ture in a range from −22 to 1228F (−30 to
508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature Canada-spec. models
falls outside the specified indicator range. When the outside temperature is 378F
(38C) or lower, the display flashes “OUT
TEMP 378F (38C)” for 3 seconds and
U.S.-spec. models gives a notice to the driver that the road
surface may be frozen. After 3 seconds, it
returns to its original indication of the
outside temperature and journey time.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display shows “OUT
TEMP 378F (38C)” for 3 seconds before
returning to its original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
U.S.-spec. models outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
“ON” position, the display does not shows
Canada-spec. models “OUT TEMP 378F (38C)”.

Black plate (139,1)

NOTE After 2 hours have passed for the journey
The outside temperature indication time, the display indication flashes “E/T
may differ from the actual outside 2:00” at the center of the display for 3
temperature. The indication “OUT seconds and gives a notice to the driver to
TEMP 378F (38C)” should be treated take a rest. After 3 seconds, it returns to its
only as a guide. Be sure to check the original indication of the outside tempera- 3
condition of the road surface before ture and journey time.
driving. If you continue to drive your vehicle
without stopping the engine, the display
! Journey time flashes the journey time for 3 seconds at
the center of the display after each
additional hour has elapsed.
If the display shows an indication other
Canada-spec. models than the journey time, the display switches
1) Outside temperature to the journey time for 3 seconds for each
2) Journey time
additional hour that has elapsed after the
The journey time shows the time that has first 2 hours. After 3 seconds, it returns to
elapsed since the ignition switch was its original indication. However, if the
turned to the “START” position. journey time indication overlaps with an-
other indication, the journey time indica-
tion is shortened.
NOTE
U.S.-spec. models The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position. It is also reset if the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
“Acc” position prior to restarting of
the engine.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)
& Driving range on remaining units of 10 miles (10 km) that can be
fuel driven by taking into consideration the fuel
remaining in the tank and the average rate
of fuel consumption over the last 30 miles
(30 km).
Canada-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
U.S.-spec. models there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
ately.
U.S.-spec. models
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Canada-spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance in

Black plate (141,1)
& Clock (vehicle with genuine & SI-DRIVE display needles

SUBARU navigation system) . Present date & time
. Birthday
. Anniversary
Within 12 seconds after turning on the 3
ignition switch, press the “ /SET” switch
for at least 2 seconds.
The display can be switched as shown
below by pressing the “ ” or “ ” switch.
1) Sport Sharp (S#) mode

The clock receives the correct time from 2) Sport (S) mode
the navigation system. To adjust the time 3) Intelligent (I) mode
shown by the clock, refer to the Owner’s 4) Throttle angle
*: This display means that the Sport Sharp
Manual supplement for the monitor sys- (S#) mode is in the selected condition.
tem and adjust the time of the navigation *: “Present date & time”, “Birthday” and
system. This display indicates the current SI- “Anniversary” can be registered in the
DRIVE mode with its throttle angle. “Date/Time” setting menu.
CAUTION For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to the
“SI-DRIVE (turbo and 3.0 L models)” Refer to the following procedure for further
To ensure safety, do not attempt to section in chapter 7. steps.
set the time during driving, as an
accident could result. ! Initial movement setting
& Meter settings It is possible to activate or deactivate the
The following items can be set or regis- initial movement of the meter needles and
tered on the multi-information display as gauge needles that takes place when the
desired. ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
. Initial movements of the meter/gauge position.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (142,1)
To change the current setting, take the

following steps.
1. Within 12 seconds after turning on the
ignition switch, press the “ /SET” switch
for at least 2 seconds.
4. Select “ON” for activated initial move- 5. Select “End” by pressing the “ ” or
ment or “OFF” for deactivated initial move- “ ” switch. And press the “ /SET” switch
ment by pressing the “ ” or “ ” switch. to finish the meter setting menu.
And press the “ /SET” switch to decide
the desired setting. NOTE
2. T h e d i s p l a y s h o w s “ M E T E R If you do not need to change the previous . Your vehicle’s initial movement
SETTING”, and then changes to the setting, select “ ” and press the “ /SET” setting of the meter/gauge needles
setting screen. switch. has been set for activation “ON” at
3. When the setting screen is displayed, the time of shipment from the factory.
select “Initial movement” by pressing the . If you turn the ignition switch to the
“ ” or “ ” switch. And press the “ / “Acc” position, turn the ignition switch
SET” switch to enter the setting process. to the “LOCK” position, or open and
close the driver’s door during the
setting procedure, the new setting will
be canceled.
. It is not possible to cancel sequen-
tial illumination of the combination
meter while sequential illumination is
actually taking place. Cancel sequen-

Black plate (143,1)
tial illumination when regular illumina- 2. T h e d i s p l a y s h o w s “ M E T E R

tion (for driving) has begun. SETTING”, and then changes to the
setting screen.
! Date/Time settings
The following items can be set or regis-
tered in the “Date/Time” setting menu. 3
. Present date & time
. Birthday
. Anniversary
NOTE
To enter “Birthday” and “Anniversary”,
“Present date & time” must be set.
To enter the “Date/Time” setting menu, Refer to the following procedure for further
take the following steps. steps.
1. Within 12 seconds after turning on the ! Present date & time
ignition switch, press the “ /SET” switch 3. When the setting screen is displayed,
for at least 2 seconds. select “Date/Time” by pressing the “ ” or 1. Press “ ” or “ ” until “Present date &
“ ” switch. And press the “ /SET” switch time” is displayed, and press “ /SET”.
to enter the “Date/Time” settings.
After the Date/Time setting screen has
been displayed, the display can be
switched as shown below by pressing
the “ ” or “ ” switch.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)
2. Select an item that you desire to set time. When completed, select “OK”, and
with “ ” and “ ”, and press “ /SET”. press “ /SET”.
! Birthday
1. Press “ ” or “ ” until “Birthday” is
displayed, and press “ /SET”.
3. Select a value for the setting item with

“ ” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with
3. Select a value for the setting item with “ /SET”.
“ ” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with 4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and
“ /SET”. time. When completed, select “OK” and
press “ /SET”.
2. Select an item that you desire to set When a birthday is registered and the date
with “ ” and “ ”, and press “ /SET”. that was set nears, a message is dis-
played when the ignition switch is turned
on.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and

Black plate (145,1)
time. When completed, select “OK”, and

press “ /SET”.
When an anniversary is registered and the
date that was set nears, a message is
displayed when the ignition switch is 3
turned on.
From a week before to the day before 2. Select an item that you desire to set
with “ ” and “ ”, and press “ /SET”.
From a week before to the day before
On the date that was set
! Anniversary 3. Select a value for the setting item with

“ ” and “ ”, and confirm the setting with
1. Press “ ” or “ ” until “Anniversary” is “ /SET”.
displayed and press “ /SET”. 4. Repeat step 3 to enter the date and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (146,1)
SET”. & Warning messages and dri-

ver’s information
When the following safety warning or
driver’s information occurs, the interrup-
tive message will be indicated on the
display.
On the date that was set
! Clear all dates NOTE

1. Press “ ” or “ ” until “Clear all dates” When “YES” is selected, the dates for
is displayed and press “ /SET”. “Birthday” and “Anniversary” can be
reset. Note that “Present date & time”
will not be reset. U.S.-spec. models
2. Select “YES” or “NO” and press “ /

Black plate (147,1)
Canada-spec. models
The display shows the interruptive mes-
sage for 3 seconds and then returns to its
original display. At this time, the specified
warning message leaves the “ ” mark on
the lower left side of the display. When the
“ ” mark is indicated, it is possible to
display the warning message again by
pressing the “ /SET” switch.
If the interruptive message overlaps with
another indication, the interruptive mes-
sage is shortened.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (148,1)
Warning messages Details
Door open warning

When any of the doors, the rear gate (Station wagon) or the trunk lid
(Sedan) is not fully closed, it is indicated by the corresponding part of the
door light.
Always make sure this warning message is out before you start to drive.
The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds.
Parking brake warning

This warning message illuminates with the parking brake applied while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It goes out when the parking brake is
fully released.
The display shows the interruptive warning message for 3 seconds and
then returns to its original display. The interruptive warning message will be
displayed again after 20 seconds.
Run mode change system warning

This warning message indicates a malfunction of the “SI-DRIVE mode”
change. If this warning message is shown on the display, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the SI-DRIVE mode system inspected.
Engine coolant temperature warning

When the engine coolant temperature reaches 2488F (1208C), this warning
message is indicated. If this warning message is displayed, refer to the
“Engine overheating” section in chapter 9 for details the necessary measures.

Black plate (149,1)
Driver’s information Details
3
Low temperature information
This message is displayed when the outside temperature is 378F (38C).
When this message appears on the display, be careful because the road
surface may be frozen. For details of this indication, refer to the “Outside
temperature and journey time” section in this chapter.
Rest information
This message shows that the continuous driving time has reached 2 hours,
and a notice is displayed to take a rest. If you continue to drive the vehicle
without stopping the engine, the display is indicated after every hour that
has elapsed. For details of this indication, refer to the “Outside temperature
and journey time” section in this chapter.

Black plate (150,1)
Meters and gauges (vehicle & Canceling the function for : Activated
without SI-DRIVE) meter/gauge needle move- : Deactivated
ment upon turning on the Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip
ignition switch meter indication.
NOTE
Liquid-crystal displays are used in If you turn the ignition switch to the
some of the meters and gauges in the “LOCK” position, turn the ignition switch
combination meter. You will find their to the “ON” position, or open and close the
indications hard to see if you wear driver’s door during the setting procedure,
polarized glasses. the new setting will be canceled. Also, if
you do not press the trip knob for a period
& Combination meter illumina- of 10 seconds, the new setting will be
tion canceled.
When the ignition switch is turned to the NOTE
“ON” position, the various parts of the It is not possible to cancel sequential
combination meter are illuminated in the illumination of the combination meter
following sequence: while sequential illumination is actually
1. Combination meter dials light up. It is possible to activate or deactivate the taking place. Cancel sequential illumi-
2. Meter needles and gauge needles movement of the meter needles and nation when regular illumination (for
each show MAX position. gauge needles that takes place when the driving) has begun.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
each show MIN position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc”
& Speedometer
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be- The speedometer shows the vehicle
position. With the A trip meter indication
gins. speed.
selected, briefly press the trip knob twice.
You can now establish the activated/
NOTE deactivated setting for movement of the
The above sequence of operations may meter needles and gauge needles. To
not take place if you quickly turn the change the current setting, press the trip
ignition switch to start the engine. This knob for at least 2 seconds.
is not an abnormality.

Black plate (151,1)
& Odometer & Double trip meter To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
3
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will go off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
This meter displays the odometer when This meter displays the two trip meters door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc” when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
or “ON” position. “Acc” or “ON” position. meter will go off.
The odometer shows the total distance The trip meter shows the distance that the
that the vehicle has been driven. vehicle has been driven since you last set CAUTION
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition To ensure safety, do not attempt to
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the To change the mode indication, briefly change the function of the indicator
odometer/trip meter will light up. If you push the knob. during driving, as an accident could
do not press the trip knob within 10 Each press of the knob changes the mode result.
seconds of illumination of the odometer/ indication alternately.
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go
off. NOTE
Also, if you open and close the driver’s If the connection between the combina-
door within 10 seconds of illumination of tion meter and battery is broken for any
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip reason such as vehicle maintenance or
meter will go off. fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)
! Vehicle communication system & Tachometer & Fuel gauge

fault indication The tachometer shows the engine speed
The vehicle communication system car- in thousands of revolutions per minute.
ries various types of information (vehicle
speed, running conditions, etc.) to control CAUTION
modules. In the event of a fault in this
communication system, the trip meter will Do not operate the engine with the
show “ ”. pointer of the tachometer in the red
If the trip meter shows “ ”, immediately zone. In this range, fuel injection will
contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and be cut by the engine control module
have the vehicle communication system to protect the engine from overrev-
inspected. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
If you press the trip knob while the trip The fuel gauge shows the approximate
meter is showing “ ”, the trip meter NOTE amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
indication will appear for 10 seconds. When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK
To protect the engine while the selector
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for (off)” or “Acc” position, the fuel gauge
AT models) or the shift lever is in the shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
neutral position (for MT models), the fuel.
engine is controlled so that the engine The gauge may move slightly during
speed may not become too high even if braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
the accelerator pedal is pressed hard. level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the fuel
gauge’s dial will light up and the needle
will indicate the amount of fuel remaining
in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10

Black plate (153,1)
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s ! Low fuel warning light NOTE
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the . The low fuel warning light illumi-
“E” position and the dial and needle will go nates when the remaining amount of
off. fuel in the tank has reached approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp.
NOTE gal). 3
. The low fuel warning light does not
turn off unless the tank is replenished
up to a fuel quantity of approximately
4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
& Temperature gauge
1) Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the fuel tank is nearly empty. It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel “ON” position. When this light illuminates,
gauge. fill the fuel tank immediately.
This indicates that the fuel filler door CAUTION
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle. Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light 1) Normal operating range
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause The temperature gauge shows engine
damage to the engine. coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)
accordance with the outside temperature Warning and indicator lights : Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
and driving conditions. indicator light (if equipped)
We recommend that you drive moderately Several of the warning and indicator lights : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
until the pointer of the temperature gauge illuminate momentarily and then go out (if equipped)/Vehicle Dynamics Control
reaches near the middle of the range. when the ignition switch is initially turned OFF indicator light (if equipped)
Engine operation is optimum with the to the “ON” position. This permits check-
engine coolant at this temperature range. ing the operation of the bulbs. / : Brake system warning light
Also, high revving operation while the Apply the parking brake and turn the : All-Wheel Drive warning light
engine is not sufficiently warmed up ignition switch to the “ON” position. The (AT models)
should be avoided. following lights illuminate:
: Low tire pressure warning light
: Seatbelt warning light (U.S.-spec. models)
CAUTION (The seatbelt warning light goes out
If the pointer exceeds the normal only when the driver fastens the : SPORT mode indicator light
operating range, safely stop the seatbelt.) (4-speed AT models)
vehicle as soon as possible. : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
Refer to “In case of emergency” in light ON indicator light
chapter 9. (The seatbelt warning light goes out
only when the front seat passenger / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
fastens the seatbelt.) OFF indicator light
: SRS airbag system warning light or : Low fuel warning light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- or : Door open warning light

function indicator lamp : Cruise control indicator light
: Charge warning light : Cruise control set indicator light
: Oil pressure warning light : Shift-up indicator light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light (MT models with SI-DRIVE)
(AT models) : S# PREP indicator light
/ : ABS warning light (vehicle with SI-DRIVE)

Black plate (155,1)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
3
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” Driver’s warning light (vehicle with SI- Front passenger’s warning light
position, this device reminds the driver DRIVE)
and front passenger to fasten their seat- ! Operation
belts by illuminating the warning lights in If the driver and/or front passenger have/
the locations indicated in the following has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
illustration and sounding a chime. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
Driver’s warning light (vehicle without SI- 6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
DRIVE) device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (156,1)
The warning light(s) for unfastened . Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth. (Models
seatbelt(s) will alternate between table or TV onto the seatback. equipped with manual seats only)
steady illumination and flashing at . Do not store a heavy load in the
15-second intervals. The chime will seatback pocket. If still the seatbelt warning device for front
not sound. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
– At speeds higher than approxi- place his/her hands or legs on the front
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) tions described above, immediately con-
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
The warning light(s) for unfastened pull the seatback.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between tion.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
ward-forward position and seatback not & SRS airbag system
being locked into place securely. If any of warning light
will sound while the warning light(s) them are not locked securely, adjust them
is/are flashing. again. For adjusting procedure, refer to When the ignition switch is turned to the
. It is possible to cancel the warning the “Manual seat” in the front seats section “ON” position, the SRS airbag system
operation that follows the 6-second in chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual. warning light will illuminate for approxi-
warning after turning ON the ignition (Models equipped with manual seats only) mately 6 seconds and go out. This shows
switch. When the ignition switch is the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
turned ON next time, however, the If the seatbelt warning device for the front airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-
complete sequence of the warning passenger’s seat does not function cor- belt pretensioners are in normal operation.
operation resumes. For further details rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
about canceling the warning operation, front passenger’s seat is empty or it is WARNING
please contact your SUBARU dealer. deactivated even when the front passen-
If there is no passenger on the front ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), If the warning light exhibits any of
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning take the following actions. the following conditions, there may
device for the front passenger’s seat will . Ensure that no article is placed on the be a malfunction in the seatbelt
be deactivated. The front passenger’s seat other than a child restraint system pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
occupant detection system monitors and its child occupant. system. Immediately take your vehi-
whether or not there is a passenger on . Ensure that there is no article left in the cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
the front passenger’s seat. Observe the seatback pocket. to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
following precautions. Failure to do so . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
may prevent the device from functioning seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
correctly or cause the device to fail. airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
seat are locked into place securely by

Black plate (157,1)
SRS airbags may inflate in a very & Front passenger’s frontal of the indicators illuminates depending on
minor collision or not inflate in a airbag ON and OFF indica- the status of the front passenger’s SRS
severe collision), which may in- tors frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU
crease the risk of injury. advanced frontal airbag system monitor-
. Flashing or flickering of the warning.
ing light If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag 3
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
. No illumination of the warning
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
light when the ignition switch is
indicator will remain extinguished.
first turned to the “ON” position
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Continuous illumination of the is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
warning light airbag ON indicator will remain extin-
. Illumination of the warning light guished while the OFF indicator will
while driving illuminate.
If both the ON and OFF indicators remain
lit or extinguished simultaneously, the
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag system is faulty. Contact your SUBARU
ON indicator dealer immediately for an inspection.
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator & CHECK ENGINE warn-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ing light/Malfunction
and OFF indicators show you the status of indicator lamp
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located between the CAUTION
map lights. If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
When the ignition switch is turned to the malfunction indicator lamp illumi-
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF nates while you are driving, have
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as
ing the system check, both indicators possible. Continued vehicle opera-
extinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one tion without having the emission
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)
control system checked and return off immediately. It may take several If the light illuminates while driving or does
paired as necessary could cause driving trips. If the light does not go out, not go out after the engine starts, stop the
serious damage, which may not be take your vehicle to your authorized engine at the first safe opportunity and
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. SUBARU dealer immediately. check the alternator belt. If the belt is
! If the light is blinking loose, broken or if the belt is in good
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks condition but the light remains on, contact
while the engine is running, it may indicate If the light is blinking while driving, an your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-
that there is a problem or potential engine misfire condition has been de- ately.
problem somewhere in the emission con- tected which may damage the emission
trol system. control system. & Oil pressure warning
To prevent serious damage to the emis- light
! If the light illuminates steadily sion control system, you should conform
If the light illuminates steadily while driving to the following instructions. CAUTION
or does not go out after the engine starts, . Reduce vehicle speed.
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid hard acceleration. Do not operate the engine with the
has been detected. . Avoid steep uphill grades. oil pressure warning light on. This
You should have your vehicle checked by may cause serious engine damage.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ble.
ately. If this light illuminates when the engine is
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as running, it may indicate that the engine oil
NOTE possible. pressure is low and the lubricating system
This light also illuminates when the fuel The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- is not working properly.
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. function indicator lamp may stop blinking If the light illuminates while driving or does
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, and illuminate steadily after several driv- not go out after the engine starts, stop the
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning ing trips. You should have your vehicle engine at the first safe opportunity and
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on checked by an authorized SUBARU deal- check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. er immediately. low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
Remove the cap and retighten it until it at the proper level but the light remains on,
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering & Charge warning light contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the immediately.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
running, it may indicate that the charging
warning light/malfunction indicator lamp
system is not working properly.

Black plate (159,1)
& AT OIL TEMP warning properly. If there is no problem and all tires to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
light (AT models) are properly inflated, the light will go out. pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with
The AT oil temperature warning light “AT should be checked monthly when cold a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition and inflated to the inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly.
switch is turned to the “ON” position and recommended by the vehicle manufac- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- 3
goes out after approximately 2 seconds. turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
If this light illuminates when the engine is pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of When the system detects a malfunction,
running, it may indicate that the automatic a different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one
transmission fluid temperature is too hot. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- minute and then remain continuously
If the light illuminates while driving, im- sure label, you should determine the illuminated. This sequence will continue
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place proper inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
and let the engine idle until the warning as the malfunction exists. When the
light goes off. As an added safety feature, your vehicle malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
has been equipped with a tire pressure system may not be able to detect or signal
! Automatic transmission control monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
system warning a low tire pressure telltale when one or malfunctions may occur for a variety of
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes more of your tires is significantly under- reasons, including the installation of re-
after the engine has started, it may inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire placement or alternate tires or wheels on
indicate that the automatic transmission pressure telltale illuminates, you should the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
control system is not working properly. stop and check your tires as soon as functioning properly. Always check the
Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for possible, and inflate them to the proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
service immediately. pressure. Driving on a significantly under- one or more tires or wheels on your
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, to continue to function properly.
models) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea-
When the ignition switch is turned to the dily after blinking for approximately one
Please note that the TPMS is not a minute, have the system inspected by
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- substitute for proper tire maintenance,
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible.
seconds to check that the tire pressure maintain correct tire pressure, even if
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning under-inflation has not reached the level
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)
WARNING the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires.
four road wheels. Contact your
If this light does not illuminate SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking The ABS warning light illuminates when
steadily after blinking for approxi-
for approximately one minute, the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
mately one minute, you should have
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer position and goes out after approximately
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
to have the system inspected. 2 seconds.
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible. This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
CAUTION
CAUTION
driving straight ahead while gradu- The tire pressure monitoring system
ally reducing speed. Then slowly is NOT a substitute for manually If the warning light behaves as
pull off the road to a safe place. checking tire pressure. The tire follows, the ABS system may not
Otherwise an accident involving pressure should be checked peri- work properly.
serious vehicle damage and serious odically (at least monthly) using a When the warning light is on, the
personal injury could occur. tire gauge. After any change to tire ABS function shuts down; however,
If this light still illuminates while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- the conventional brake system con-
driving after adjusting the tire pres- itoring system will not re-check tire tinues to operate normally.
sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle . The warning light does not illu-
damage and a fast leak that causes is first driven more than 20 mph (32 minate when the ignition switch
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- is turned to the “ON” position.
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the . The warning light illuminates
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- when the ignition switch is
When a spare tire is mounted or a turned to the “ON” position, but
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low it does not go out even when the
original pressure sensor/transmitter vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
sure warning light will illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be . The warning light illuminates dur-
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for ing driving.

Black plate (161,1)
If any of these conditions occur, When the battery becomes fully charged, of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
have the ABS system repaired at the light will go out. switch in the “ON” position and with the
the first available opportunity by parking brake fully released.
your SUBARU dealer. & Brake system If the brake system warning light should
warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
3
gether with the brake system warning light WARNING switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
if the EBD system becomes faulty. For
. Driving with the brake system indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
further details of the EBD system fault
warning light on is dangerous. brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
warning, refer to “Brake system warning
This indicates your brake system stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
light”.
may not be working properly. If and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
NOTE the light remains on, have the level is below the “MIN” mark in the
If the warning light behavior is as brakes inspected by a SUBARU reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
described in the following conditions, dealer immediately. the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
the ABS system may be considered . If at all in doubt about whether
normal. the brakes are operating prop- ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
. The warning light illuminates right erly, do not drive the vehicle. (EBD) system warning
after the engine is started but goes out Have your vehicle towed to the The brake system warning light also
immediately, remaining off. nearest SUBARU dealer for re- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
. The warning light remains on after pair. EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
the engine has been started, but it goes together with the ABS warning light.
out when the vehicle speed reaches This light has the following three functions: The EBD system may be faulty if the
approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). brake system warning light and ABS
! Parking brake warning
. The warning light illuminates during warning light illuminate simultaneously
driving, but it goes out immediately and The light illuminates with the parking
during driving.
remains off. brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It goes out when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
When driving with an insufficient battery parking brake is fully released. tional braking system will still function.
voltage such as when the engine is jump However, the rear wheels will be more
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- ! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
and does not indicate a malfunction. level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)
what harder to control. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp Always make sure this light is out before
If the brake system warning light and ABS gal). It only operates when the ignition you start to drive.
warning light illuminate simultaneously, switch is in the “ON” position.
take the following steps: & All-Wheel Drive
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
NOTE warning light
flat place. This light does not go out unless the (AT models)
tank is replenished up to an internal
2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US WARNING
3. Release the parking brake. If both gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
warning lights go out, the EBD system Continued driving with the AWD
may be faulty. warning light flashing can lead to
CAUTION
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU powertrain damage. If the AWD
dealer and have the system inspected. Promptly put fuel in the tank when- warning light flashes, promptly park
4. If both warning lights illuminate again ever the low fuel warning light in a safe place then check whether
and stay illuminated after the engine has illuminates. Engine misfires as a all four tires are the same diameter
been restarted, shut down the engine result of an empty tank could cause and whether any of the tires has a
again, apply the parking brake, and check damage to the engine. puncture or has lost air pressure for
the brake fluid level. some other reason.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be & Door open warning The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi-
faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest light nates when the ignition switch is turned to
SUBARU dealer and have the system the “ON” position and goes out after the
inspected. When any of the doors, the rear gate engine has started.
(Station wagon) or the trunk lid (Sedan) is
6. If the brake fluid level is below the ! For 5-speed automatic transmis-
not fully closed, the door open warning
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. sion vehicles
light illuminates.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. For a vehicle without SI-DRIVE, the This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
open door is indicated by the correspond- with tires of different diameters fitted on its
& Low fuel warning ing part of the door open warning light. wheels or with the air pressure exces-
sively low in any of its tires.
light For a vehicle with SI-DRIVE, the opening
door is indicated on the multi-information
The low fuel warning light illuminates display.
when the tank is nearly empty approxi-

Black plate (163,1)
! For 4-speed automatic transmis- & Vehicle Dynamics . The warning light illuminates while the
sion vehicles Control warning light (if vehicle is running.
This light illuminates when All-Wheel equipped)/Vehicle Dy- . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Drive is disengaged and the drive me- namics Control OFF in- Dynamics Control system itself becomes
chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive faulty, the warning light only illuminates. At
dicator light (if this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- 3
for maintenance or similar purposes. equipped)
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven tem) remains fully operational.
with tires of different diameters fitted on its This warning light has both the function of . The warning light illuminates when the
wheels or with the air pressure exces- indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics electronic control system of the ABS/
sively low in any of its tires. Control system and the function of indicat- Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-
ing that the Vehicle Dynamics Control comes faulty.
& Vehicle Dynamics system has been deactivated.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Control operation indi- It illuminates in the event of a fault in the
system and is on when the system is not provides its ABS control through the
cator light (if equipped) electrical circuit of the ABS system.
operating.
This light illuminates when the ignition Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the
This warning light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system be-
switch is ON and goes out approximately ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
2 seconds later. comes unable to provide ABS control. As
position and goes out after the engine a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
It blinks when the skid suppression func- has started. It indicates that the Vehicle
tion is activated. It illuminates when only system also becomes inoperative, caus-
Dynamics Control system is in normal ing the warning light to illuminate. Though
the traction control function is operating. operation. both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ABS systems are inoperative in this case,
probably faulty under any of the following the ordinary functions of the brake system
light
conditions. Have your vehicle checked at are still available. You will be safe while
a SUBARU dealer immediately. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the driving with this condition, but have your
. The light does not illuminate when the vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- soon as possible.
position.
ately. NOTE
. The light does not go out even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after . The warning light does not illuminate If the warning light behavior is as
the ignition switch has been turned to the when the ignition switch is turned to the described in the following examples,
“ON” position. “ON” position. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (164,1)
may be considered normal. SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. & SPORT mode indicator
. The warning light illuminates right . The light does not go out even after the light (4-speed AT mod-
after the engine is started but goes out lapse of several minutes (the engine has els)
immediately, remaining off. warmed up) after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates after This light illuminates when the ignition
engine startup and goes off while the & Security indicator light switch is turned to the “ON” position and
vehicle is subsequently being driven. goes out after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates during This indicator light shows the status of the When the selector lever is moved to the
driving, but it goes out immediately and alarm system. It also indicates operation manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-
remains off. of the immobilizer system. lected and the indicator light illuminates.
! Alarm system Refer to the “Automatic transmission – 4-
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- speed” section in chapter 7.
dicator light It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
. It illuminates when the Vehicle Dy- information, refer to the “Alarm system” & Shift-up indicator light
namics Control OFF switch is pressed. section in chapter 2. (MT models with SI-
. It also illuminates when the Vehicle DRIVE)
Dynamics Control system is deactivated. ! Immobilizer system
This light blinks approximately 60 seconds When the ignition switch is turned to the
NOTE after the ignition switch is turned from “ON” position, the indicator light illumi-
. The light may stay on for a while “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” nates for 3 seconds, and then turns off.
after the engine has been started, position or immediately after the key is While selecting the Intelligent (I) mode of
especially in cold weather. This does pulled out. Refer to the “Door locks” SI-DRIVE, this indicator light illuminates
not indicate the existence of a problem. section in chapter 2. and informs the upshift timing to the driver
The light should go out as soon as the for fuel-efficient driving.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
engine has warmed up.
indicate that immobilizer system may be
. The indicator light illuminates when
faulty. Contact your nearest SUBARU
the engine has developed a problem
dealer immediately.
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator lamp is on. In the event that an unauthorized key (for
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
probably faulty under the following condi- used, the security indicator light illumi-
tion. Have your vehicle checked at a nates.

Black plate (165,1)
& S# PREP indicator light & Selector lever position indi- & Gear position indicator (AT
(vehicle with SI-DRIVE) cator (AT models) (if models) (if equipped)
equipped)
When the manual mode is selected, the

1) S# PREP indicator light This indicator shows the position of the gear position indicator (which shows the
selector lever. current gear selection) and the upshift/
When the engine is not warmed up downshift indicator light up. Refer to the
sufficiently, the S# PREP indicator light “Automatic transmission – 4-speed” sec-
turns on. While this indicator light is on, tion in chapter 7.
the SI-DRIVE mode cannot be changed to
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. For details
about the SI-DRIVE mode, refer to the “SI-
DRIVE (turbo and 3.0 L models)” section
in chapter 7.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (166,1)
& Selector lever and gear posi- out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
tion indicator (AT models) (if Refer to the “Replacing bulbs” section in dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
equipped) chapter 11. ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& High beam indicator
light & Cruise control set in-
This light shows that the headlights are in dicator light
the high beam mode. The cruise control set indicator light
This indicator light also illuminates when illuminates when the ignition switch is
the headlight flasher is operated. turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after approximately 3 seconds.
& Cruise control indica- This light illuminates when vehicle speed
tor light has been set.
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to & Headlight indicator
the “ON” position and goes out after light
This indicator shows the position of the
selector lever. approximately 3 seconds. This indicator light illuminates when the
When the manual mode is selected, the This light illuminates when the “CRUISE” light switch is turned to the “ ” position
gear position indicator (which shows the main switch is pressed. (to turn on the parking lights) or to the
current gear selection) and the upshift/ “ ” position (to turn on the headlights).
NOTE
downshift indicator light up. Refer to the
“Automatic transmission – 5-speed” sec-
. If you move the cruise control lever & Front fog light indicator
or press the main switch button while light (if equipped)
tion in chapter 7.
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the
cruise control function is deactivated This indicator light is on while the front fog
& Turn signal indicator and the “CRUISE” indicator light lights are on.
lights flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
These lights show the operation of the turn function, turn the ignition switch back
signal or lane change signal. to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink then turn it again to the “ON” position.
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned . If this indicator light and the CHECK

Black plate (167,1)
Clock (vehicle without genu- The clock shows the time while the Information display (2.5 L
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
ine SUBARU navigation sys- position.
non-turbo model without
tem) genuine SUBARU navigation
system)
NOTE 3
. If your vehicle is a 2.5 L non-turbo NOTE
model equipped with the genuine If your vehicle is a 2.5 L non-turbo
SUBARU navigation system, refer to model equipped with the genuine
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the SUBARU navigation system, refer to
navigation system. the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
. If your vehicle is a turbo model or a monitor system.
3.0 L model equipped with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, refer to
the “Clock (vehicle with genuine
SUBARU navigation system)” in the
multi-information display (vehicle with To adjust the time shown by the clock,
SI-DRIVE) section in this chapter. press the “+” button or the “−” button. The
indicated time will change in one-minute
increments. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.
To reset the minutes to “00” with a radio
time signal, push the “SET” button.
With the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, each successive push of the
“DISP” button toggles the display in the
following sequence:
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (168,1)
! Road surface freeze warning indi-

cation
& Outside temperature indica-

tor
Canada-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from U.S.-spec. models
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; while running at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
U.S.-spec. models down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
Canada-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to

Black plate (169,1)
378F (38C) or lower, the temperature & Current fuel consumption & Average fuel consumption
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside 3
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
“ON” position, the indication does not
flash. U.S.-spec. models U.S.-spec. models
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
Canada-spec. models Canada-spec. models

This indication shows the rate of fuel This indication shows the average rate of
consumption at the present moment. fuel consumption since the trip meter was
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)
last reset. & Driving range on remaining that can be driven taking into account the
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica- fuel amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
tion between the average fuel consump- the average rate of fuel consumption.
tion corresponding to the A trip meter When the low fuel warning light illumi-
indication and the average fuel consump- nates, the driving range indication flashes
tion corresponding to the B trip meter for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
indication. to the driving range indication if it was
When either of the trip meter indications is originally giving some other indication.)
reset, the corresponding average fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the U.S.-spec. models
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter indica-
tion is not shown until the vehicle has U.S.-spec. models
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
Canada-spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance

Black plate (171,1)
& Journey time display is giving an indication other than

the journey time, the display switches to
the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds,
and returns to its original indication each
time a complete hour has elapsed.
3
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position. It is also reset if the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
“Acc” position prior to restarting of
the engine.
Canada-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”, The journey time shows the time that has
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the elapsed since the ignition switch was
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi- turned to the “START” position.
ately.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
The journey time indication flashes each

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

Black plate (172,1)
Light control switch & Headlights & High/low beam change

(dimmer)
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge result-
ing from accidentally leaving your
lights on when your vehicle is
parked, the light switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. In any other
position, the vehicle’s lights will be
out.
If you park your vehicle on a road-
side at night, use the hazard warn-
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
ing flasher to alert the other drivers.
the end of the turn signal lever. To change from low beam to high beam,
The light switch operates only when the push the turn signal lever forward. When
first position
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. the headlights are on high beam, the high
Parking lights, instrument panel illumina- beam indicator light “ ” on the instru-
tion, front side marker lights and license ment panel is also on.
plate lights are on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
second position back to the detent position.
Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-
nel illumination, front side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are on.

Black plate (173,1)
& Headlight flasher & Daytime running light system Turn signal lever
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced 3
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions:
CAUTION . The parking brake is fully released. To activate the right turn signal, push the
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” turn signal lever up. To activate the left
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position. turn signal, push the turn signal lever
position for more than just a few down. When the turn is finished, the lever
seconds. NOTE will return automatically. If the lever does
When the light switch is in the “ ” not return after cornering, return the lever
To flash the headlights, pull the lever position, the front side marker lights, to the neutral position by hand.
toward you and then release it. The high parking lights and license plate lights
beam will stay on for as long as you hold are illuminated. To signal a lane change, push the turn
the lever. The headlight flasher works signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
even though the lighting switch is in the during the lane change. The turn signal
“OFF” position. indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
When the headlights are on high beam, return automatically to the neutral position
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the when you release it.
instrument panel also illuminates.

Black plate (174,1)
Illumination brightness con- becomes the maximum and the auto- Parking light switch
matic dimming function does not work
trol at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
The parking light switch operates regard-

The brightness of clock display, audio, air less of the ignition switch position.
conditioner, information display and meter/ By pushing the front end of this switch,
gauge illumination dims when the light following lights will illuminate.
switch is in the “ ” or “ ” position. You
– Parking lights
can adjust brightness of the meter/gauge
illumination for better visibility. – Front and rear side marker lights
For turbo and 3.0 L models, you can also – Tail lights
adjust the brightness of the meter/gauge – License plate lights
illumination when the lighting switch is in
To turn off, push the rear end of the
the OFF position.
parking light switch.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long
To darken, turn the control dial downward. time because that will run down the
NOTE battery.
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness

Black plate (175,1)
Front fog light switch Wiper and washer

(if equipped)
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the 3
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
The front fog lights operate only when the tinuously for more than 10 sec-
light switch is in the “ ” position. onds, or when the washer fluid
However, the front fog lights turn off when tank is empty. This may cause
the headlights are switched to high beam. overheating of the washer motor.
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front Check the washer fluid level
fog light switch on the turn signal lever frequently, such as at fuel stops.
upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the . Do not operate the wipers when
front fog lights, turn the switch back down the windshield or rear window is
to the “OFF” position. dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
The indicator light located on the combi-
on a dry windshield or rear
nation meter will illuminate when the front
window, always use the wind-
fog lights are on.
shield washer.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (176,1)
. In freezing weather, be sure that fluid” section in chapter 11. . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
the wiper blades are not frozen to Also, when driving the vehicle rial on the windshield or the wiper
the windshield or rear window when there are freezing tempera- blades results in jerky wiper operation
before switching on the wipers. tures, use non-freezing type wi- and streaking on the glass. If you
Attempting to operate the wiper per blades. cannot remove those streaks after
with the blades frozen to the operating the washer or if the wiper
window glass could cause not . Do not clean the wiper blades operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
only the wiper blades to be with gasoline or a solvent, such face of the windshield or rear window
damaged but also the wiper mo- as paint thinner or benzine. This and the wiper blades using a sponge or
tor to burn out. If the wiper will cause deterioration of the soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
blades are frozen to the window wiper blades. mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
glass, be sure to operate the rinse the window glass and wiper
d e f r o s t e r, w i p e r d e i c e r ( i f NOTE blades with clean water. The glass is
equipped) or rear window defog- clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
ger before turning on the wiper.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
. If the wipers stop during opera- If the motor operates continuously
tion because of ice or some other even after following this procedure,
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new
obstruction on the window, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
wiper motor could burn out even ones. Refer to the “Replacement of
motor temporarily. If this happens, park wiper blades” section in chapter 11 for
if the wiper switch is turned off. If your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
this occurs, promptly stop the replacement instructions.
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
vehicle in a safe place, turn the mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
ignition switch to the “LOCK” will reset itself, and the wipers will
position and clean the window again operate normally.
glass to allow proper wiper op- . Clean your wiper blades and win-
eration. dow glass periodically with a washer
. Use clean water if windshield solution to prevent streaking, and to
washer fluid is unavailable. In remove accumulations of road salt or
areas where water freezes in road film. Keep the washer button
winter, use SUBARU Windshield depressed at least for 1 second so that
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. washer solution will be sprinkled all
Refer to the “Windshield washer over the windshield or rear window.

Black plate (177,1)
& Windshield wiper and washer ! Mist (for a single wipe)

switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
! Windshield wipers 3
Sedan
OFF : Park
Station wagon
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
Station wagon control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
Sedan
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the
lever toward you. The wipers operate until
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)
you release the lever. position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
! Wiper intermittent time control ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in nine steps from
the shortest interval to the longest.
! Washer
Sedan
To wash the windshield, push the washer
Station wagon button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
Station wagon while you push the button.
Sedan
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

Black plate (179,1)
& Rear window wiper and When you subsequently move the selec- Windshield wiper deicer
washer switch (Station wa- tor lever of the automatic transmission to
the “R” position, the rear wiper will switch
(if equipped)
gon)
to continuous operation. When you move
the selector lever from the “R” position to
some other position, the rear wiper will 3
return to intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever downward to
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation) the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays The windshield wiper deicer operates only
ON: Continuous and the wiper operates until you release when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
INT: Intermittent the knob. position.
OFF: Park
: Washer Before turning on the windshield wiper
deicer, remove any snow from the wind-
! Rear wiper shield. To turn on the windshield wiper
deicer, push the button. The indicator light
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
located on the button lights up while the
the end of the wiper control lever upward
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
The windshield wiper deicer will automa-
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
tically shut off after approximately 15
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
With the switch turned to the “INT” have been deiced completely before that
position, the rear wiper will operate inter- time, push the button to turn it off. It also
mittently at intervals corresponding to the turns off when the ignition switch is turned
vehicle speed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing . The battery voltage decreases below Rear window defogger but-
is not complete, you have to push the the permissible level.
button to turn the deicer on again.
ton
If you wish, you can set the windshield CAUTION
wiper deicer for continuous operation.
To prevent the battery from being
. Vehicle with genuine SUBARU navi- discharged, do not operate the
gation system: windshield wiper deicer continu-
The windshield wiper deicer setting can be ously for any longer than necessary.
changed for continuous operation by
means of the monitor. For details, please
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the monitor system.
The setting can also be changed by a
. Vehicle without genuine SUBARU
navigation system: Vehicle with manual climate control sys-
tem
The setting can also be changed by a
Once the windshield wiper deicer has
been set for continuous operation, press-
ing the button results in continuous opera-
tion. The windshield wiper deicer auto-
matically stops operating if any one of the
following conditions occurs during contin-
uous operation.
. The outside temperature becomes
418F (58C) or higher.
. The vehicle speed remains less than 9
mph (15 km/h) for 15 minutes.

Black plate (181,1)
is not complete, you have to push the CAUTION

button to turn it on again.
For the vehicle with the automatic climate . Do not use sharp instruments or
control system, if you wish, you can set window cleaner containing abra-
the rear window defogger for continuous sives to clean the inner surface
operation as follows. of the rear window. They may 3
. Vehicle with genuine SUBARU navi- damage the conductors printed
gation system: on the window.
The rear window defogger setting can be . To prevent the battery from being
changed for continuous operation by discharged, do not operate the
means of the monitor. For details, please defogger continuously for any
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement longer than necessary.
for the monitor system.
Vehicle with automatic climate control
system The setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Please contact the near- NOTE
The rear window defogger operates only est SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” outside mirror defogger, the outside
position. . Vehicle without genuine SUBARU
navigation system: mirror defogger operates while the rear
The rear window defogger button is window defogger is operating.
located on the climate control panel. The setting can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Please contact the near-
To turn on the defogger, push the button. est SUBARU dealer for details.
To turn it off, push the button again. Once the rear window defogger has been
The indicator light located on the button set for continuous operation, by pushing
lights up while the rear window defogger is the button, the rear window defogger
operating. repeatedly runs according to the following
The defogger will automatically shut off cycle: operates for 15 minutes, stops for 2
after approximately 15 minutes. If the minutes, operates for 15 minutes, stops
window clears before that time, push the for 2 minutes. If the battery voltage drops
button to turn it off. It also turns off when below the permissible level, continuous
the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or operation is canceled and the defogger
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging stops operating.

Black plate (182,1)
Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com- button, the compass display is toggled on

pass (if equipped) or off. When the compass is on, an
Always check that the inside and outside illuminated compass reading will appear
mirrors are properly adjusted before you in the lower part of the mirror.
start driving.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
& Inside mirror transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an
The inside mirror has a day and night anti-glare feature which automatically re-
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the duces glare coming from headlights of
mirror toward you for the night position. vehicles behind you. It also contains a
Push it away for the day position. The built-in compass.
night position reduces glare from head- . By pressing and releasing the left The mirror has a photosensor attached on
lights. button, the automatic dimming function is both the front and back sides. If the glare
toggled on or off. When the automatic from the headlights of vehicles behind you
dimming function is on, the auto dimming strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
indicator light (green) located to the right and make the reflection surface of the
of the button will illuminate. mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
being blinded. For this reason, use care
. By pressing and releasing the right not to cover the sensors with stickers, or

Black plate (183,1)
other similar items. Periodically wipe the ! Compass zone adjustment determine the actual size and dis-
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft tance of objects that you view in
1. The zone setting is factory preset to
cotton cloth or an applicator. convex mirror.
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration
! Compass calibration zone” map attached to the end of this
manual to verify that the compass zone ! Remote control mirror switch
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
setting is correct for your geographical
3
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning location.
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all 2. Press and hold the right button for 3
doors are shut. seconds then release, and the word
2. Drive to an open, level area away from “ZONE” will briefly appear and then the
large metallic objects or structures and zone number will be displayed.
make certain the ignition switch is in the 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
“ON” position. to cycle the display through all possible
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 zone settings. Stop cycling when the
seconds then release, and the compass correct zone setting for your location is
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and displayed.
direction will be displayed. 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” exit the zone setting mode.
disappears from the display (approxi- The remote control mirrors operate only
mately two or three circles). The compass & Outside mirrors when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
is now calibrated. “Acc” position.
! Convex mirror (passenger side) 1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the mirror the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
to read inaccurately. You will know that WARNING adjust the right-hand mirror.
this has occurred if your compass begins Objects look smaller in a convex 2. Move the knob in the direction you
to read in only limited directions. Should mirror and farther away than when want to move the mirror.
you encounter this situation, return to step viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use 3. Return the knob to the neutral position
one of the above procedure and recali- the convex mirror to judge the to prevent unintentional operation.
brate the mirror. distance of vehicles behind you The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
when changing lanes. Use the inside ally.
mirror (or glance backwards) to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (184,1)
! Outside mirror defogger The outside mirror defogger shares the

(if equipped) CAUTION
button with rear window defogger.
The outside mirror defogger operates only To prevent the battery from being
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” discharged, do not operate the de-
position. fogger continuously for any longer
To turn on the outside mirror defogger, than necessary.
push the button.
To turn it off, push the button again. The
indicator light located on the button lights
up while the outside mirror defogger is
operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the
mirror clears before that time, push the
Vehicle with manual climate control sys- button to turn it off. It also turns off when
tem the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging
is desired when you restart your vehicle,
you have to push the button to turn it on
again.
NOTE
. While the outside mirror defogger is
operating, the rear window defogger
also operates.
. When the rear window defogger has
been set for continuous operation, the
outside mirror defogger also operates
continuously. Refer to the “Rear win-
Vehicle with automatic climate control dow defogger button” section in this
system chapter.

Black plate (185,1)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel “Front seats” section in chapter 1. Horn

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
WARNING level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
wheel in place. 3
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
vehicle control and result in securely locked by moving it up and down,
personal injury. and forward and backward.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
and result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

Black plate (7,1)
Climate control
Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2 Efficient cooling after parking in direct

Air flow selection ................................................ 4-2 sunlight ........................................................... 4-12
Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-3 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit............................................................. 4-12
Manual climate control system
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-3 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-12
Control panel ...................................................... 4-3 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Heater operation ................................................. 4-5 low temperature weather condition................... 4-12
4
Air conditioner operation ..................................... 4-7 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Automatic climate control system is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
(if equipped) ..................................................... 4-7 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Control panel ...................................................... 4-8 Air filtration system ........................................... 4-13
Temperature sensors.......................................... 4-11
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner....................................................... 4-12
Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-12

Black plate (188,1)
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection

Black plate (189,1)
Climate control 4-3
& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left
to adjust the flow direction. Move the tab up and down or right and left
to adjust the flow direction. 1) Temperature control dial
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille 2) Fan speed control dial
open/close wheel upward to the “ ” posi- 3) Air flow control dial
tion. 4) Air conditioner button
5) Air inlet selection button
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the 6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“ ” position. the “Rear window defogger button” sec-
tion in chapter 3.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (190,1)
4-4 Climate control
! Temperature control dial The fan operates only when the ignition : Air flows through the instrument panel
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The outlets and the windshield defroster out-
fan speed control dial is used to select lets.
four fan speeds.
NOTE
! Air flow control dial
In a vehicle equipped with an air
conditioner, when the dial is placed in
the “ ” position or “ ” position the
air conditioner compressor automati-
cally operates to quickly defog the
windshield. However the indicator on
the air conditioner button will not
illuminate. At the same time, the air
inlet selection is automatically set to
“outside air” mode.
This dial regulates the temperature of air
In this state, you cannot select “recir-
flow from the air outlets over a range from
culation” mode by manually pressing
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
the air inlet selection button.
! Fan speed control dial Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
This dial has the following five positions: tioner compressor by pressing the air
: Air flows through the instrument panel conditioner button.
outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
outlets, the foot outlets, and some through
the windshield defroster outlets.
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets,
and the foot outlets.

Black plate (191,1)
Climate control 4-5
! Air conditioner button ! Air inlet selection button WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
4
& Heater operation
! Defrosting or defogging the wind-
shield
To direct warm air to the windshield and
front door windows:
The air conditioner operates only when ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
the engine is running. recirculated inside the vehicle. OFF position.
Push the air inlet button to the ON 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
Push the air conditioner button while the position.
fan is in operation to turn on the air position. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place this button in the ON position when 3. Turn the temperature control dial all
conditioner. The indicator light will illumi- the way to the right.
nate. you wish to cool the cabin quickly (in a
vehicle with an air conditioner) or are 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. driving on a dusty road. highest speed.
OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment. NOTE
Push the air inlet button again to the OFF . In a vehicle equipped with an air
position. The indicator light will go off. conditioner, when the dial is placed in
Place this button in the OFF position when the “ ” position or “ ” position the
you reach a road that is not dusty and air conditioner compressor automati-
when you wish to achieve a comfortable cally operates to quickly defog the
temperature in the cabin. windshield. However the indicator on
the air conditioner button will not
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (192,1)
4-6 Climate control
illuminate. At the same time, the air air conditioner compressor automati- NOTE
inlet selection is automatically set to cally operates to quickly defog the Warm air also comes out from the right
“outside air” mode. windshield. However the indicator on and left air outlets. To stop warm air
In this state, you cannot select “recir- the air conditioner button will not flow from these outlets, turn the corre-
culation” mode by manually pressing illuminate. At the same time, the air sponding wheel to the “ ” position.
the air inlet selection button. inlet selection is automatically set to
Also, you cannot stop the air condi- “outside air” mode. ! Bi-level heating
tioner compressor by pressing the air In this state, you cannot select “recir- This setting allows you to direct air of
conditioner button. culation” mode by manually pressing different temperatures from the instrument
. Warm air also comes out from the the air inlet selection button. panel and foot outlets. The air from the
right and left air outlets. To stop warm Also, you cannot stop the air condi- foot outlets is slightly warmer than from
air flow from these outlets, turn the tioner compressor by pressing the air the instrument panel outlets.
corresponding wheel to the “ ” posi- conditioner button. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
tion. . Warm air also comes out from the OFF position.
right and left air outlets. To stop warm 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
! Heating and defrosting air flow from these outlets, turn the position.
To direct warm air toward the floor and the corresponding wheel to the “ ” posi- 3. Set the temperature control dial to the
windshield: tion. desired temperature level.
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
“OFF” position. ! Heating
desired speed.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” To direct warm air toward the floor:
position. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the Setting the temperature control dial fully
3. Set the temperature control dial to the OFF position. turned to the red area or blue area
most comfortable level. 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” decreases the temperature difference
position. between the air from the instrument panel
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
3. Set the temperature control dial to the outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
desired speed.
most comfortable level. ! Ventilation
NOTE 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the To force outside air through the instrument
desired speed. panel outlets:
. In a vehicle equipped with an air
conditioner, when the dial is placed in 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
the “ ” position or “ ” position the OFF position.

Black plate (193,1)
Climate control 4-7
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” desired speed. Automatic climate control
position.
! Defrosting or defogging
system (if equipped)
3. Set the temperature control dial all the
way left. To direct warm air to the windshield and
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the front door windows: NOTE
desired speed. 1. Set the air outlet control dial to the . Operate the automatic climate con-
“ ” position. trol system when the engine is running.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air
inlet control button to the ON position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the . The blower fan rotates at a low 4
red side. speed when the engine coolant tem-
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the perature is low.
WARNING
highest speed. For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
Continued operation in the ON posi- ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
tion may fog up the windows. Switch button.
to the OFF position as soon as the
NOTE . Even when cooling is not necessary,
outside dusty condition clears. In a vehicle equipped with an air setting the temperature much lower
conditioner, when the dial is placed in than the current outlet air temperature
the “ ” position or “ ” position the turns on the air conditioner compres-
& Air conditioner operation air conditioner compressor automati- sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-
cally operates to quickly defog the cator light on the control panel illumi-
! Cooling or dehumidifying
windshield. However the indicator on nates.
For cooling and dehumidification of the the air conditioner button will not
passenger compartment, air flows through The automatic climate control system
illuminate. At the same time, the air
the instrument panel outlets: automatically controls outlet air tempera-
inlet selection is automatically set to
ture, fan speed, air flow distribution air-
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “outside air” mode.
OFF position. inlet control, and air conditioner compres-
In this state, you cannot select “recir- sor operation. It activates when the
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” culation” mode by manually pressing “AUTO” button is pressed, and is used to
position. the air inlet selection button. maintain a constant, comfortable climate
3. Set the air conditioner button to the Also, you cannot stop the air condi- within the passenger compartment.
“ON” position. tioner compressor by pressing the air The temperature can be set within a range
4. Set the temperature control dial to the conditioner button. of 65 to 858F (18 to 328C).
blue side.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (194,1)
4-8 Climate control
! OFF button
& Control panel ! AUTO button
AUTO mode operation:
1) AUTO button
The Automatic Climate Control system
turns off (the air conditioner compressor
2) Temperature control dial (driver’s side) When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the
and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is
3) Defroster button indicator light “AUTO” on the display
4) Temperature control dial (passenger’s pressed.
illuminates. In this state, fan speed, air
side)
flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air When the “OFF” button is pressed, the
5) Rear window defogger button (Refer to outside air introduction mode (air inlet
the “Rear window defogger button” sec- conditioner compressor operation are
automatically controlled. selection OFF) is automatically selected.
tion in chapter 3.)
6) Air conditioner button
Manual mode operation:
7) Air flow mode selection button
8) Fan speed control button If you operate any of the buttons on the
9) Air inlet selection button control panel other than the “OFF” button
10) OFF button and temperature control dial during auto-
matic mode operation, the indicator light
“AUTO” on the control panel will go out.
You can then manually control the system
as desired using the button you operated.
To change the system back to the AUTO
mode, press the “AUTO” button.

Black plate (195,1)
Climate control 4-9
! Temperature control dial passenger’s side. Each temperature windows, and the indicator light on the
setting is shown on the display. With the button illuminates.
dial set at your desired temperature, the After eliminating the fogging from the
system automatically adjusts the tempera- windshield, return the climate control
ture of air supplied from the outlets such system to the AUTO mode by pushing
that the desired temperature is achieved the “AUTO” button or turn off by pushing
and maintained. the “OFF” button.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, Alternatively, push the “ ” button again 4
the system gives maximum cooling per- to return the system to the setting that was
formance. If the dial is turned fully clock- selected before you activated the defros-
wise, the system gives maximum heating ter.
performance.
! Fan speed control button
! – Defroster button
Driver’s side
The fan speed control button has 6

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield different fan speed positions.
and front door windows, push the defros- The fan speed is shown by the display.
Passenger’s side ter button “ ”. When the “ ” button is
It is possible to make separate tempera- pushed, outside air is drawn into the
ture settings for the driver’s side and passenger compartment, air flow is direc-
ted towards the windshield and front door
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (196,1)
4-10 Climate control
! A/C – Air conditioner button ! Air flow mode selection button ! Air inlet selection button
If the windshield starts to fog when the Select the desired air flow mode by Select air flow by pushing the air inlet
climate control system is operated in the pushing the air flow mode selection selection button “ / ”.
AUTO mode, push the air conditioner button. The selected air flow mode is The selected air inlet setting is shown on
button “A/C” to defog and dehumidify. shown by the display. the control panel.
When this button is pushed, the air (Ventilation): Air flows through the (Recirculation): Interior air recirculates
conditioner compressor turns on and the instrument panel outlets. inside the passenger compartment. Use
indicator light “A/C” on the display illumi- this position when quickly cooling down
nates. After eliminating the fogging from (Bi-level): Air flows through the instru- the passenger compartment or to prevent
the windshield, set the system back to the ment panel outlets and the foot outlets. outside air from entering the passenger
AUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO” compartment. When the recirculation
(Heat): Air flows through the instrument
button. mode is selected, a “ ” indicator light
panel outlets, the foot outlets, and some
appears on the display.
NOTE through the windshield defroster outlets.
(Outside air): Outside air is drawn into
The air conditioner compressor does (Heat-def): Air flows through the instru- the passenger compartment. When the
not operate when the outside air tem- ment panel outlets, the windshield defros- climate control system is operated in the
perature is below 328F (08C). ter outlets, and the foot outlets. “AUTO” mode, this position is selected
automatically. (There is one exception:

Black plate (197,1)
Climate control 4-11
When the temperature control dial is & Temperature sensors – Interior air temperature sensor: on the
turned fully counterclockwise, the recircu- side of the driver-side part of the center
lation mode is automatically selected.) panel
When the outside air mode is selected, a – Outside temperature sensor: behind
“ ” indicator light appears on the dis- front grille.
play.
WARNING 4
Continued operation in the “ ”
position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the “ ” position as soon
as the outside dusty condition
clears.
1) Solar sensor
NOTE 2) Interior air temperature sensor
When driving on a dusty road or behind The automatic climate control system
a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust employs several sensors. These sensors
gases, set the air inlet selection button are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
to the “ ” position. and become damaged, the system may
From time to time, return the air inlet not be able to control the interior tempera-
selection button to the “ ” position ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
to draw outside air into the passenger sensors, observe the following precau-
compartment. tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside windshield
defroster grille

Black plate (198,1)
4-12 Climate control
Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
& Cleaning ventilator grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate

system before summer sea- control system
son Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Please have the air refrigerant is different from the method for
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. conditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
the radiator, this area should be kept clean result of using the wrong refrigerant are
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in not covered under warranty.
by any accumulation of insects and leaves high humidity and low tem-
on the condenser.
perature weather condition
& Efficient cooling after parking Under certain weather conditions (high
in direct sunlight relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning

Black plate (199,1)
Climate control 4-13
Air filtration system NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
equipped with an air filtration system. mance if not properly maintained.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule shown in the
following table. This schedule should be
followed to maintain the filter’s dust 4
collection ability. Under extremely dusty
conditions, the filter should be replaced
more frequently. Have your filter checked
or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For
replacement, use only a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000
km) whichever comes first
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
. Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.

Black plate (9,1)
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 Display selection ............................................... 5-14

Printed antenna................................................... 5-2 CD player operation .......................................... 5-15
FM reception ....................................................... 5-2 How to insert a CD (type A)................................ 5-15
XMTM satellite radio reception (if equipped)...... 5-2 How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-15
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-17
Audio set ............................................................. 5-5 To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-17
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-18
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Repeating .......................................................... 5-19
Power and sound controls ................................. 5-7 Random playback .............................................. 5-20 5
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7 Scan ................................................................. 5-21
Tone and balance control .................................... 5-7 Display selection ............................................... 5-22
Folder selection ................................................. 5-22
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-10
How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ......... 5-23
FM/AM selection................................................. 5-10
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-23
Tuning ............................................................... 5-10
When the following messages are displayed....... 5-24
Station preset .................................................... 5-11
AUX unit operation ............................................ 5-25
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-12
AUX jack ........................................................... 5-25
XMTM satellite radio ............................................ 5-12
AUX inputs selection button............................... 5-25
Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-12
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-12
Audio control buttons (if equipped) ................. 5-26
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-12 MODE button ..................................................... 5-26
Band selection ................................................... 5-12 Precautions to observe when handling a
Channel and category selection .......................... 5-13 compact disc................................................... 5-27
Channel preset................................................... 5-14

Black plate (202,1)
5-2 Audio
Antenna system XMTM satellite radio reception

(if equipped)
& Printed antenna
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite
CAUTION radio service including music, news,
sports, talk and children’s programming.
Do not use sharp instruments or XMTM provides digital quality audio and
window cleaner containing abra- text information, including song title and
sives to clean the inner surface of artist name. A service fee is required to
the window on which the antenna is receive the XM TM service. For more
printed. Doing so may damage the information, contact XMTM at
antenna printed on the window. w w w. x m r a d i o . c o m o r c a l l 1 - 8 0 0 -
XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S.
Station wagon
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR
The antenna is printed on the inner (1-877-438-9677) for Canada.
surface of the rear window glass.
The XMTM satellite radio receiver that is
& FM reception fitted to your vehicle receives the neces-
sary signals from two specially designated
Although FM is normally static free, satellites that are in a geostationary orbit
reception can be affected by the surround- over the equator. One satellite covers the
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station east coast and the other covers the west
strength and transmitter distance. Build- coast. Both of them direct their signals
ings or other obstructions may cause north. These signals are then relayed
momentary static, flutter or station inter- throughout the USA by a network of
ference. If reception continues to be ground repeater stations. The satellite
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station. radio signals are transmitted as “line of
Sedan
sight” signals. Line of sight signals can be
blocked by objects such as buildings, but
the network of repeater stations allows
signal coverage within urban areas such
as cities.

Black plate (203,1)
Audio 5-3
You may experience problems in receiving

XMTM satellite radio signals in the follow-
ing situations.
. If you are driving northward in a coastal
area
You will notice that the XMTM satellite
radio antenna is fixed to the upper right
hand corner of your windshield.
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . If you are driving in an area with tall
covered parking area trees that block the signal (10 m or more),
. If you are driving beneath the top level for example on a road that goes through a
of a multi-level freeway dense forest
. If you drive under a bridge . The signal can become weak in some
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle areas that are not covered by the repeater
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the station network.
signal Please note that these may be other
The signal comes from the south and may . If you are driving in a valley where the unforeseen circumstances when there
not be able to reach the antenna in some surrounding hills or peaks block the signal are problems with the reception of XMTM
circumstances when you are driving north. from the south satellite radio signals.
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains

Black plate (204,1)
5-4 Audio
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.

Black plate (205,1)
Audio 5-5
Audio set The audio set will operate only when the
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages position.
indicated in this section for operating details. . Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
& Type A audio set (if equipped) . Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-12
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-15 5
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (206,1)
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-12
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-15
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

Black plate (207,1)
Audio 5-7
Power and sound controls & Tone and balance control ! To change tone control modes
& Power switch and volume

control
The volume control dial normally functions Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button
as a volume control. This dial becomes a changes control modes in the following
control for Bass, Midrange, Treble, Fader sequence starting from volume control
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) or Balance when you select the appro- mode. (When the radio is first turned on,
and volume control. The radio is turned priate tone and balance control mode. the control mode is in the volume control.)
ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the Choose desired volume level for each
volume is controlled by turning the dial. mode by turning the volume control dial.
The dial can also be used for tone and The control function returns to volume
balance adjustment. control mode after approximately 5 sec-
onds.
The “AUDIO” button is used for selecting
the following control modes:
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (208,1)
5-8 Audio
Control mode (Range of levels) ! To change balance control modes
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound Each brief press of the “BAL” button
Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound changes control modes in the following
sequence starting from volume control
Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
mode. (When the radio is first turned on,
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume the control mode is in the volume control.)
AUX volume control* (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.
The “BAL” button is used for selecting the

following control modes:

Black plate (209,1)
Audio 5-9
Control mode (Range of levels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Fader control (R9 to F9) To decrease front speaker vo- To decrease rear speaker vo-
lume lume
Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker vo- To increase right speaker vo-
lume and decrease right lume and decrease left speaker
speaker volume volume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
* Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

Black plate (210,1)
5-10 Audio
FM/AM radio operation & Tuning NOTE

While you are holding down either side
& FM/AM selection ! Manual tuning of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning
frequency will not stop changing even
if the frequency of a receivable station
is reached.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
Push the “FM AM” button when the radio Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK
is off to turn on the radio. button to increase the tuning frequency
and press the tuning button marked “ ”
Push the “FM AM” button when the radio to decrease it.
is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
Each time the button is pressed, the
Each brief press of the “FM AM” button frequency interval can be changed be-
changes the radio in the following se- tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2
quence starting from the last radio band MHz in the FM mode.
that you selected.
If you hold down the “ ” side of the If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
button, the tuning frequency will increase SEEK/SCAN button briefly, the radio will
continuously, and if you hold down the automatically search for a receivable
“ ” side of the button, the tuning station and stop at the first one it finds.
frequency will decrease continuously. Re- This function may not be available, how-
lease the button when your desired ever, when radio signals are weak. In such
frequency is reached. a situation, perform manual tuning to
select the desired station.

Black plate (211,1)
Audio 5-11
! Scan tuning (SCAN) to low frequencies). This noise does not indicate a problem
Automatic tuning may not function prop- with the radio.
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to ! Selecting preset stations
tall buildings and hills.
& Station preset

! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM AM” button to select 5
FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
button or tune the radio manually until the
desired station frequency is displayed.
If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
SEEK/SCAN button for 0.5 second or
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
longer, the radio will switch to scan mode.
frequency. If the button is pressed for less
In this mode, the radio scans through the Presetting a station with a preset button
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
radio band until a station is found. The allows you to select that station in a single
will remain in memory.
radio will stop at the station for 5 seconds operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2
while displaying the frequency, after which stations each may be preset.
scanning will continue until the entire band NOTE
has been scanned. . If the connection between the radio
Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the button and battery is broken for any reason
again to cancel the scan mode and to stop such as vehicle maintenance or radio
on any displayed frequency. removal, all stations stored in the
If you hold down the “ ” side of the preset buttons are cleared. If this
button, the radio will scan up the fre- occurs, it is necessary to reset the
quency band (from low frequencies to high preset buttons.
frequencies). If you hold down the “ ” . If a cell phone is placed near the
side of the button, the radio will scan down radio, it may cause the radio to emit
the frequency band (from high frequencies noise when the phone receives calls.

Black plate (212,1)
5-12 Audio
Satellite radio operation details, please contact your SUBARU The satellite radio ID will be needed when
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at you activate satellite radio and receive
(if equipped) www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS satellite radio customer support.
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to (7474) for more information. Sirius, the The satellite radio ID can be found on the
install the SUBARU genuine satellite Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.
receiver (dealer option) and to enter into are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Turn the “TUNE/TRACK” button to select
a contract. For details, please contact your Inc. the satellite radio channel.
SUBARU dealer.
& Satellite radio reception & Band selection
& XM TM
satellite radio Satellite radio signals are best received in
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
radio service including music, news, areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
sports, talk and children’s programming. tunnels or other structures that may
XMTM provides digital quality audio and obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
text information, including song title and may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
artist name. A service fee is required to stances that may result in signal loss
receive the XMTM service. For more include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
information, contact your SUBARU dealer or driving on the lower level of a multi-
or XMTM at tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
w w w. x m r a d i o . c o m o r c a l l 1 - 8 0 0 - To help reduce this condition, satellite
XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S. radio providers have installed ground-
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR based repeaters in heavily populated
(1-877-438-9677) for Canada. areas. However, you may still experience Push the “SAT” button when the radio is
reception problems in some areas. off to turn on the radio.
& Sirius satellite radio Push the “SAT” button when the radio is
& Displaying satellite radio ID on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
that allows the listener to experience of tuner tion.
digital sound quality and to have a greater When you activate satellite radio, you
variety of channels. should have your satellite radio tuner ID
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a ready because each tuner is identified by
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For its unique satellite radio tuner ID.

Black plate (213,1)
Audio 5-13
& Channel and category selec- ! Category selection ! Channel scan

tion
! Channel selection
Press “ ” of the FOLDER/CATEGORY Press the “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN

button to select the next category and button to change the radio to the SCAN
press “ ” of the button to select the mode. In this mode, the radio scans
Press “ ” of the TUNE TRACK button to previous category. through the channel until a station is
select the next channel and press “ ” of found. The radio will stop at the station
the button to select the previous channel. for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
Keep pressing “ ” of the button to number, after which scanning will continue
change to the next channel continuously until the entire channel has been scanned
and keep pressing “ ” of the button to from the low end to the high end.
change to the previous channel continu- Press the “ ” side of the button again to
ously. cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (214,1)
5-14 Audio
& Channel preset ! Selecting preset channels & Display selection

! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1,
SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Press the SEEK/SCAN button or the
TUNE TRACK button to select the chan-
nel.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
channel. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
NOTE Presetting a channel with a preset button Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
If the connection between the radio and allows you to select that channel in a the satellite radio to change the display as
battery is broken for any reason such single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 follows:
as vehicle maintenance or radio re- and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset buttons.

Black plate (215,1)
Audio 5-15
CD player operation & How to insert a CD (type A) no idle position in the magazine.
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole 2. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes,
NOTE while gripping the edge of the disc, then insert the disc. Once you have inserted
. Make sure to always insert a disc insert it in to the slot (with the label side the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will go off.
with the label side up. If a disc is up) and the player will automatically pull The disc will then be automatically drawn
inserted with the label side down, the the disc into position. in, and the player will begin to play back
player displays “CHECK DISC”. the first track of the disc.
Refer to “When the following messages
NOTE
. To insert more discs in succession,
are displayed” in this section. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
. If a disc is inserted during a radio DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME. be loaded with discs in ascending order of 5
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the position number.
broadcast. & How to insert a CD(s) (type B) If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
. After the last song finishes, the disc after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,
will automatically return to track 1 (the the player will begin to play back the first
first song on the disc) and will auto- track of the last disc you have inserted.
matically play back. . The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
. The player is designed to be able to disc is already inserted in the correspond-
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, ing position of the magazine.
but it may not be able to play certain
. While the player is in the loading mode,
ones.
if you press the “FM AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”
. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
button, the player will enter the standby
are not supported, and if inserted, they
mode. Press the “CD” button to start
will be immediately ejected.
playback.
. A file (song) that is protected by a
copyright of WMA cannot be played,
and the player will skip to the next file
(song). 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)
5-16 Audio
! Inserting a disc in a desired posi- Press the “CD” button to start playback.
tion ! Loading all the magazine (full disc
loading mode)
2. Press the disc select button at the

position where you want to insert a disc.
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the 3. When the “LOAD” indicator flashes,
magazine in the player has an idle insert the disc. Once you have inserted
the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will go off. 1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”
position where you can insert a disc, the button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
disc number indicator associated with the The disc will then be automatically drawn
in, and the player will begin to play the first player will produce a beep sound and will
idle position will blink. enter the full disc loading mode.
track on the disc.
The positions in the magazine for which 2. When the disc number indicator and
the indicator steadily lights up are already . If you wish to insert another disc, “ALL LOAD” indicator start flashing, insert
loaded with discs. repeat the procedure beginning with step a disc within 15 seconds. If a disc is
1. successfully loaded during this period, the
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds disc number indicator will stop blinking
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, and will steadily light.
the player will begin to play back the first 3. When the loading of a disc is com-
track of the last disc you have inserted. plete, the next disc number indicator will
. While the player is in the loading mode, blink. Then repeat Step 2.
if you press the “FM AM”, “SAT” or “AUX” 4. When the magazine is filled with discs
button, the player will enter standby mode. by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

Black plate (217,1)
Audio 5-17
start playback of the discs, beginning with player will start playback. & To select a track from its
the one inserted first. ! When there are CDs loaded (type B) beginning
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 ! Forward direction
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
! When there is no CD inserted
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
5
CD (type A)” / “How to insert a CD(s) (type
B)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
Press the desired disc select button for
! When CD is in the player (type A) which the disc number indicator is lit. The
player will then start playback of the Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/
selected CD, beginning with the first track. TRACK button to skip to the beginning of
the next track/file (track). Each time the
If a disc that the player cannot read has button is pressed, the indicated track/file
been loaded, the player will display the (track) number will increase.
message “CHECK DISC”.
NOTE
In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past
the last track/file (track) will take you
back to the first track/file (track) in the
folder.
When the “CD” button is pressed, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (218,1)
5-18 Audio
! Backward direction & Fast-forwarding and fast-re- ! Fast-reversing

versing
! Fast-forwarding
Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE/ Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK
TRACK button to skip to the beginning of button continuously to fast-reverse the
the current track/file (track). Each time the disc/folder.
button is pressed, the indicated track/file Press the “ ” side of the TUNE/TRACK Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
(track) number will decrease. button continuously to fast-forward the
disc/folder. NOTE
NOTE Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
the first track/file (track) will take you to NOTE will stop and the player will start play-
the last track/file (track) in the folder. If you fast-forward to the end of the last back.
track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).

Black plate (219,1)
Audio 5-19
& Repeating ! To repeat the currently playing disc/

folder
! To repeat the currently playing
track/file (track)
If you accidentally press the button and

cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play
mode, press it again to reselect the
repeat-play mode.
. The repeat-play mode will be can- 5
celled if you perform any of the follow-
ing steps:
. Press the “RPT” button
. Press the “ ” button
. Press the disc select button
To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,
. Select the radio or AUX mode press the “RPT” button twice while a track/
To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the file (track) is playing. The display will show
the “RPT” button while the track/file (track) SEEK/SCAN button on folder re- “D-RPT” for non-MP3/WMA disc, “F-RPT”
is playing. The display will show “RPT”, peating (MP3 or WMA disc) for MP3/WMA folder. And the disc/folder
and the track/file (track) will be repeated. . Press the “LOAD” button when will be played repeatedly.
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play there is free space in the CD To cancel the disc/folder repeat play
mode, briefly press the “RPT” button magazine. mode, press the “RPT” button once more.
twice. The “RPT” indication will go off, . Turn off the power of the audio The “D-RPT” or “F-RPT” indication will go
and the normal playback mode will be equipment. off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed. . Turn the ignition switch to the resumed.
“LOCK” position.
NOTE NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the . Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence. next one in the following sequence.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (220,1)
5-20 Audio
& Random playback . Press the disc select button

. Select the radio or AUX mode
. Press the “LOAD” button when
there is free space in the CD magazine.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
If you accidentally press the button and . Turn the ignition switch to the
cancel the disc/folder repeat-play “LOCK” position.
mode, press it again to reselect the
disc/folder repeat-play mode. ! MP3/WMA disc
. For MP3 and WMA discs, they can Press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or
play back repeatedly only for the longer during disc playback to play all of
currently playing file folder. They can- the tracks in the folder currently being
not play back the whole disc. played in random order. The display will
. The disc/folder repeat-play mode show “F-RDM” during the folder random
will be cancelled if you perform any of ! Non-MP3/WMA disc mode. Press the “RPT” button again for
the following steps: 0.5 second or longer to play all of the
Press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or
. Press the “RPT” button longer during disc playback to play all of tracks on the disc in random order. The
. Press the “ ” button the tracks on the disc in a random order. display will show “D-RDM” during the disc
. Press the disc select button The display will show “RDM”, and all of the random mode.
. Select the radio or AUX mode tracks on the disc will be played in a To cancel the random mode, press the
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the random order. “RPT” button for 0.5 second or longer
SEEK/SCAN button in the folder To cancel random playback, press the during “D-RDM” random playback. The
repeating mode “F-RPT” “RPT” button again for at least 0.5 second. “D-RDM” indication will go off, and the
. Turn off the power of the audio The “RDM” indication will go off, and the normal playback mode will be resumed.
equipment. normal playback mode will be resumed. NOTE
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position. NOTE . Each time you press the button for
Random playback will be cancelled if 0.5 second or longer, the mode will
you perform any of the following steps: change to the next one in the following
sequence.
. Press the “ ” button

Black plate (221,1)
Audio 5-21
& Scan NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps:
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
If you accidentally press the button and TUNE/TRACK button
cancel the random mode, press it again . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
to reselect the random mode. SEEK/SCAN button
. Random playback will be cancelled . Press the “ ” button
if you perform any of the following . Press the disc select button
steps: 5
. Select the radio or AUX mode
. Press the “RPT” button . Press the “LOAD” button when
. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the there is free space in the CD magazine.
SEEK/SCAN button in the folder . Turn off the power of the audio
random mode “F-RDM” equipment.
. Press the “ ” button The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track/file (track) in . Turn the ignition switch to the
. Press the disc select button “LOCK” position.
succession. Press the “ ” side of the
. Select the radio or AUX mode SEEK/SCAN button for 0.5 second or
. Press the “LOAD” button when longer to start scanning upward beginning
there is free space in the CD with the track/file (track) following the
magazine. currently selected one. Press the “ ”
. Turn off the power of the audio side of the button to start scanning down-
equipment. ward beginning with the track/file (track)
. Turn the ignition switch to the preceding the currently selected one.
“LOCK” position. After all tracks/files (tracks) in the disk/
folder have been scanned, normal play-
back will be resumed. To cancel the scan
mode, press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
button for 0.5 second or longer.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (222,1)
5-22 Audio
& Display selection ! Page (track/folder title) scroll & Folder selection
If you briefly press the “TEXT” button If, having pressed the “TEXT” button to Press the “ ” side of the SEEK/SCAN
during playback of an MP3/WMA file, the select FOLDER NAME or TRACK NAME button briefly to select the next folder.
indication will change to the next one in display, you press the “TEXT” button Press the “ ” side of the button briefly to
the following sequence. again, the title will be scrolled so you can go back to the previous folder. The folder
see all of it. title will be shown each time you press
one of the buttons.
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles NOTE
for up to three pages (64 characters in . Selecting folders in this way is
total). However, it may in some cases possible only within a single disc.
show titles for only up to two pages (32 . Only MP3/WMA folders are recog-
characters in total). nized when an attempt to select the
next or previous folder is made. If no
appropriate folder exists on the disc,
pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the
SEEK/SCAN button starts playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).

Black plate (223,1)
Audio 5-23
& How to eject a CD from the & How to eject CDs from the
player (type A) player (type B)
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The

selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When a disc is being played back or when
When you remove the ejected disc, the
a disc is in the player, press the eject
disc number indicator will go off.
button “ ”. The disc will be ejected.
To remove more discs in succession,
NOTE 1. Use the disc select button to select the repeat Steps 1 and 2.
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD disc to be ejected.
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If the disc is left ejected for more
than approximately 15 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position, a disc protection func-
tion will operate, automatically reload-
ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not
played.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (224,1)
5-24 Audio
! Ejecting all discs from the player the player is in all disc ejection mode, ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
(all disc ejection mode) the mode will be cancelled following Press the eject button to unload the discs.
ejection of the disc that is currently Check that the disc is not damaged or
being ejected. scratched, and also check that the disc is
. If you press the “CD” button or inserted correctly. This message may
“LOAD” button while the player is in appear when using some CD-RW discs.
all disc ejection mode, the player will Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
draw in the discs that have been CDs are not supported) and data format
ejected and play them. are correct. This player can only play MP3
and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot
& When the following mes- be unloaded or this message remains
sages are displayed displayed, please contact your SUBARU
If one of the following messages is dealer.
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
ing information. If you cannot clear those
1. If you continue to press the “ ”
messages, please contact your SUBARU
button, the player will produce beep sound
dealer.
and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At
this time, the disc number indicator and ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
“ALL EJECT” indicator will flash. Press the eject button to unload the disc.
2. Remove the disc that has been Check the disc for damage or deforma-
ejected. The other discs loaded will then tion, and also check that the correct disc is
be ejected one after another. If you do not inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
remove the disc that has been ejected, the forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled. are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message
NOTE will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD unloaded or this message remains dis-
sticking out, because vibration might played, please contact your SUBARU
make it fall out. dealer.
. If you press the “ ” button while

Black plate (225,1)
Audio 5-25
AUX unit operation & AUX inputs selection button low, the sound becomes bad when you
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
& AUX jack system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the audio system.
Try cleaning the stereo jack and audio
plug.
. If noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or malfunc- 5
tions of the portable player.
Press the “AUX” button when the auxiliary

audio input is off to turn on the auxiliary
By connecting a commercial audio pro- audio input.
duct to the vehicle, such as a portable
audio player, you can hear its sound via NOTE
the vehicle’s speaker. . The output sound of the portable
Connect the portable audio player and audio player is not loud, and the sound
push the “AUX” button. via the vehicle’s speakers that are
For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin connected to the vehicle audio set is
plug (3.5ø) can be connected. For detailed very low. If you turn up the volume of
information, see the Owner’s Manual of the audio set, the volume becomes
the portable audio player. louder. However, when you change
the player to the other portable audio
player, the sound may become a lot
louder. Turn down the volume when
you change between them.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is

Black plate (226,1)
5-26 Audio
Audio control buttons *1: The frequency last received in the selected (track) order.
(if equipped) waveband will be displayed. The track/file (track) number will be shown
*2: Only when a CD is in the player. on the audio display.
These buttons are located on the spokes *3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product is ! With SAT mode selected
of the steering wheel. They allow the connected.
driver to control audio functions without Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the
taking his/her hands off the steering ! “ ” and “ ” buttons channel order. Press the “ ” button to
wheel. skip backward in the channel order. The
channel will be shown on the audio
display.
& MODE button
! Volume control buttons
! With radio mode selected

Press the “ ” button or “ ” button. The
radio will seek the next receivable station
This button is used to select the desired and stop on it.
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the Press the “+” button to increase the
That station’s frequency will be shown on volume. Press the “−” button to reduce
mode changes to the next one in the the audio display.
following sequence: the volume.
! With CD mode selected A number indicating the volume will be
Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the shown on the audio display.
track/file (track) order. Press the “ ”
button to skip backward in the track/file

Black plate (227,1)
Audio 5-27
! MUTE button Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following illustration. Also, some compact
discs cannot be played.
Press this button if you wish to immedi-

ately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE”
goes off.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (228,1)
5-28 Audio
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a rough cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

Black plate (11,1)
Interior equipment
Interior light ......................................................... 6-2 Floor mat ............................................................ 6-13

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-14
Cargo area light (Station wagon).......................... 6-2 Using the cover ................................................. 6-14
Map light .............................................................. 6-3 To remove the cover housing ............................. 6-14
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 To remove the rear gate board ........................... 6-15
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-4 Stowage of the cargo area cover and rear gate
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5 board .............................................................. 6-15
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-16
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5 To install the rear gate board ............................. 6-16
Center console box ............................................. 6-6 Stowage boxes (Station wagon) ....................... 6-17
Center panel compartment (if equipped)............... 6-7 Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) ........ 6-17 6
Overhead console (if equipped) ........................... 6-7 Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-18
Pocket ................................................................ 6-8 HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Cup holder ........................................................... 6-8 (if equipped) .................................................... 6-19
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8 Garage door opener programming in the
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-9 U.S.A............................................................... 6-20
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-9 Programming rolling-code-protected garage door
openers in the U.S.A. ....................................... 6-21
Use with a cigarette lighter
(Canada only — if equipped)............................. 6-10 Programming for entrance gates and garage door
openers in Canada........................................... 6-22
Ashtray (Canada only — if equipped)............... 6-11 Programming other devices ............................... 6-22
Coat hook ........................................................... 6-12 Operating the HomeLink® Wireless Control
Rear passenger area .......................................... 6-12 System ............................................................ 6-22
Shopping bag hook............................................ 6-13 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button....... 6-22
For Sedan models .............................................. 6-13 Erasing HomeLink® button memory ................... 6-23
For Station wagon models .................................. 6-13 In case a problem occurs................................... 6-23

Black plate (232,1)
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior light the light turns off when the key is turned to & Cargo area light (Station wa-
the “Acc” or “ON” position. gon)
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the When the dome light switch is in the
light is turned off to avoid battery dis- DOOR position, the dome light also
charge. illuminates by use of the remote keyless
entry system.
& Dome light
The setting of the period for which the light
stays on can be changed as follows.
. Vehicles with genuine SUBARU na-
vigation system:
The setting can be changed using the
monitor. For details, please refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the moni-
tor system. Also, the setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact 1) DOOR
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. 2) OFF
. Vehicles without genuine SUBARU 3) ON
navigation system:
The cargo area light switch has three
The setting can be changed by a positions.
1) ON SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
2) DOOR
DOOR: The light illuminates only when
3) OFF the rear gate is opened.
OFF: The light stays off.
The dome light switch has three positions: ON: The light stays on continuously.
ON: The light stays on continuously.
OFF: The light stays off.
DOOR: The light illuminates when any of
the doors or the rear gate (Station wagon)
is opened. The light remains on for several
seconds and gradually turns off after all
doors and the rear gate are closed. Also,

Black plate (233,1)
Interior equipment 6-3
Map light The setting of the period for which the

lights stay on can be changed as follows.
. Vehicles with genuine SUBARU na-
vigation system:
The setting can be changed using the
monitor. For details, please refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the moni-
tor system. Also, the setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Please
contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
. Vehicles without genuine SUBARU 6
navigation system:
Vehicle without moonroof
The setting can be changed by a
To turn on the map light, push the switch. SUBARU dealer. Please contact the near-
Vehicle with moonroof (Sedan) To turn it off, push the switch again. est SUBARU dealer for details.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
light is turned off to avoid battery dis- NOTE
charge. Illumination of the map lights in con-
junction with the doors and rear gate
The map lights illuminate when any of the opening and remote keyless entry
doors or the rear gate (Station wagon) is system can be set as non-operational
opened. The lights remain on for several by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the
seconds and gradually turn off after all nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
doors and the rear gate are closed. Also,
the lights turn off when the key is turned to
the “Acc” or “ON” position.
When the map light switches are in the
OFF position, the map lights also illumi-
Vehicle with moonroof (Station wagon) nate by use of the remote keyless entry
system.

Black plate (234,1)
Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate
CAUTION
With the sun visor positioned over the side
To block out glare, swing down the visors. window, you can use the sun visor Do not pull out the extension plate
To use the sun visor at a side window, extension plate to prevent glare through with the sun visor positioned over
swing it down and move it sideways. the gap between the sun visor and center the windshield. The extension plate
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it would obstruct your view of the
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you rearview mirror.
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.

Black plate (235,1)
& Vanity mirror with light Storage compartment & Glove box
CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com-
dazzle. partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous 6
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is either in
the “Acc” or “ON” position and the mirror
cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (236,1)
& Center console box To use as storage space: CAUTION

Center console box (front)
If you hold the divider plate at the
top while turning it counterclock-
wise, it may break.
To use again as cup holders:
Slide the sliding lid (near the parking brake

If you remove the divider plate from the lever) toward the rear.
dual cup holders, you can use the center
console box as a storage space.
Insert the protrusion on the back of the

divider plate into the hole in the center of
the console box. Grasp the divider plate at
the base, and turn it clockwise to fit it.
CAUTION
If you hold the divider plate at the
top while turning it clockwise, it may
Grasp the dual cup holders’ divider plate break.
at the base. Turn it counterclockwise to
remove it.

Black plate (237,1)
Center console box (rear) & Overhead console

(if equipped)
6
To open the center panel compartment,
Pull up the lock release knob at the bottom pull up the edge of the bottom of the panel
of the front edge of the lid. lid.
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
& Center panel compartment
(if equipped) CAUTION
CAUTION When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
When your vehicle is parked in the the overhead console heats up.
sun or a warm day, the inside of the Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
center panel heats up. Avoid storing vulnerable or flammable articles
plastic or other heat-vulnerable or such as a lighter in the overhead
flammable articles such as a lighter console.
in the center panel.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (238,1)
& Pocket Cup holder & Front passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
. When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
The dual cup holder is built into the center
CAUTION . Take care to avoid spills. Bev- console near the parking brake lever.
erages, if hot, might burn you or
Do not use the pocket as an ashtray your passengers. Spilled bev-
or leave a lighted cigarette in the erages may also damage uphols-
pocket. This could cause a fire. tery or carpets.
To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.
To access the cup holder, pull the lid

toward the rear.

Black plate (239,1)
& Rear passenger’s cup holder Accessory power outlets
6
Power outlet in the cargo area (if equipped)
Accessory power outlets are provided
Power outlet next to the front pocket next to the front pocket, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected varies among
outlets as shown in the following list. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
The rear passenger’s cup holder is indicated wattage for each outlet.
located on the lower side of the back of . Outlet next to the front pocket: 80W or
the center console. To use the cup holder, Power outlet in the center console less
open the lid by pulling its upper edge. . Outlets in the center console and cargo
area: 120W or less
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (240,1)
When using appliances connected to two nected to two or more outlets

or more outlets simultaneously, the total simultaneously, the total power
power consumed by them must not consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
CAUTION cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette one electrical appliance.
lighter in the accessory power
outlet. . If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
. Do not place any foreign objects, tight for the accessory power
especially metal ones such as outlet, this can result in a poor
coins or aluminum foil, into the contact or cause the plug to get
accessory power outlet. That stuck. Only use plugs that fit NOTE
could cause a short circuit. Al- properly.
ways put the cap on the acces- When the lid of the center console is
sory power outlet when it is not . Use of an electric appliance in the closed, a gap remains between the
in use. accessory power outlet for a long center console and the lid to allow the
period of time while the engine is power outlet in the center console to be
. Use only electrical appliances not running can cause battery used. Pass the electrical appliance’s
which are designed for 12V DC. discharge. cord through this gap.
The maximum power rating of an . Before driving your vehicle, make
appliance that can be connected sure that the plug and the cord & Use with a cigarette lighter
varies among outlets as shown in on your electrical appliance will (Canada only — if equipped)
the following list. Do not use an not interfere with your shifting
appliance which exceeds the in- To use the accessory power outlet next to
gears and operating the accel- the front pocket as a cigarette lighter
dicated wattage for each outlet. erator and brake pedals. If they socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,
– Outlet next to the front pocket: do, do not use the electrical which is an optional accessory.
80W or less appliance while driving. A cigarette lighter plug is available from
– Outlets in the center console your SUBARU dealer.
and cargo area: 120W or less The cigarette lighter operates only when
When using appliances con- the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”

Black plate (241,1)
position. mechanism that causes a cigar- Ashtray (Canada only — if

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the ette lighter plug to “pop out” equipped)
knob and wait a few moments. It will after its lighter element is heated.
automatically spring up when ready for Therefore, do not place a cigar-
use. ette lighter plug in a socket that CAUTION
has been used, even once, to
WARNING power a plug-in accessory. Doing Do not use ashtrays as waste re-
so may cause the plug to stick ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
To avoid being burned, never grasp and overheat, creating a potential in an ashtray. This could cause a
the lighter by the end with the fire hazard. fire.
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element. 6
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The accessory power outlet lo-
cated next to the front pocket is
originally designed to use a gen-
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
A portable front ashtray is available from
et. Doing so may cause a short-
your SUBARU dealer. It fits into one of the
circuit and overheating, resulting
cup holders built into the center console.
in a fire.
When using the ashtray, open the ashtray
. If the socket is ever used for a lid. Fully close the lid after using it to help
plug-in accessory such as a cell reduce residual smoke.
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket’s internal
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (242,1)
NOTE Coat hook hooks without using hangers.

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash- & Rear passenger area
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a CAUTION
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement. Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being The coat hook is attached to each rear
thrown through the cabin or by passenger’s hand grip.
preventing correct airbag deploy-
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat

Black plate (243,1)
Shopping bag hook & For Station wagon models Floor mat
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& For Sedan models

6
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area. A retaining pin is located on the driver’s
To use the hook, push the upper portion side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler
and the shopping bag hook will appear. door release. Fit the grommet in the carpet
onto the pin to prevent the carpet from
moving.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (244,1)
Cargo area cover WARNING

(if equipped)
Do not place anything on the ex-
The cargo area cover is provided for tended cover. Putting excessive
covering the cargo area and to protect its weight on the extended cover can
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is break it and an object on the cover
detachable to make room for additional could tumble forward in the event of
cargo. a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover
& To remove the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
CAUTION
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is
placed back in its proper location
and correctly secured on its retain-
ing pin. Also, do not use more than
one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during
driving, it could cause an accident.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and 2. Hold down the button on the right-
it will rewind automatically. You should hand rear quarter panel and lift up the
hold on to the cover and guide it back into right-hand cover housing.
the cover housing while it is rewinding. 3. Remove the cover housing.

Black plate (245,1)
& To remove the rear gate the rear gate board, rotate the rear gate
board board toward you, and pull it out down-
ward.
& Stowage of the cargo area

cover and rear gate board
The cargo area cover and rear gate board
can be stowed in under the cargo floor.
6
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook
(provided on the back of the lid) on the
rear edge of the roof.
1. Remove the top of the rear gate board
3. Remove the left and right parts of the
from the groove in the rear gate panel.
cargo floor lid.
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
2. Hold both sides of the bottom edge of
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (246,1)
& To install the cover housing & To install the rear gate board
4. Stow the cover housing and rear gate

board in the cargo area end. To install the cover housing, insert both Insert (tipped at an angle) the hooks on
ends of the cover housing into the the rear gate board into the holes in the
retainers. rear gate panel.

Black plate (247,1)
Stowage boxes (Station wa- Convenient tie-down hooks

gon) (if equipped)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exceeds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
6
Rotate the rear gate board toward you
until its top touches the rear gate panel.
A stowage box is located on each side of

the cargo area. You can access each one
by pushing up and pulling the knob on the
lid.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured
Fit the top of the rear gate board into the with a luggage net or ropes.
groove in the rear gate panel.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (248,1)
storing recesses. Under-floor storage compart-

ment
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the sub-
floor storage in the trunk or cargo area.
Sedan
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Station wagon
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.

Black plate (249,1)
HomeLink® Wireless Control desired device. For details on the device garage door opener or other
types which can be operated by this device. Make sure that people
System (if equipped) system, consult the HomeLink website at and objects are out of the way
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- of the garage door opener or
3515. other device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
Note the following about this system:
If your vehicle is equipped with the . Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-
HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it less Control System with any
complies with Part 15 of the Federal garage door opener that lacks
Communication Commission Rules in the the safety stop and reverse fea-
U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada ture as required by applicable
in Canada. Its operation is subject to the safety standards. A garage door
opener which cannot detect an
6
following two conditions:
object, signaling the door to stop
(1) this device may not cause harmful
and reverse, does not meet these
interference, and (2) this device must
safety standards. Using a garage
accept any interference received, includ-
1) HomeLink® buttons door opener without these fea-
ing interference that may cause undesired
2) Indicator light tures increases risk of serious
operation.
3) Hand-held transmitter* injury or death. For more infor-
* Not part of your vehicle’s remote Changes and modifications to this system mation, consult the HomeLink
keyless entry system but of a website at www.homelink.com
HomeLink®-compatible device. by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to or call 1-800-355-3515.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System, use this equipment.
located on the driver’s sun visor, is a
handy way to operate, from inside of your HomeLink and the HomeLink house are CAUTION
vehicle, up to three remote-controlled registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
indoor and outdoor devices, such as trols, Inc. When programming the HomeLink®
garage door openers, entrance gates, Wireless Control System to operate
door locks, home lighting, and security WARNING a garage door opener or an entrance
systems. There are three HomeLink® gate, unplug the device’s motor
. When programming the from the outlet during programming
buttons on the sun visor, each of which HomeLink® Wireless Control
you can program for operation of one to prevent motor burnout.
System, you may be operating a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (250,1)
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
& Garage door opener pro-

gramming in the U.S.A. 2. Press and hold the two outside 4. Using both hands, simultaneously
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light push the hand-held transmitter button
NOTE begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Re- and the desired HomeLink® button. DO
When programming the HomeLink® lease both buttons. NOT release the buttons until step 5 has
Wireless Control System for a garage been completed.
door opener, it is suggested that you NOTE 5. Hold down both buttons until the
park the vehicle outside the garage. If any of the HomeLink® buttons are HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
already programmed for other devices, slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
skip step 2 because it clears the light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
opener from the outlet.
memory of all the three buttons. released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
3. Hold the end of the garage door cates successful programming of the new
opener’s hand-held transmitter between frequency signal.)
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from 6. Press and hold the programmed but-
the HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s ton and check the HomeLink® indicator
sun visor, keeping the indicator light in light. If the indicator light stays on con-
view. tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,

Black plate (251,1)
your garage door opener may be pro- NOTE

tected by a rolling code feature. In this The assistance of a second person
case you need to perform the additional may make the programming quicker
steps for “Programming rolling-code-pro- and easier.
tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”
described in the following.
NOTE
Rolling-code-protected garage door
openers are manufactured after 1996.
See the instruction manual of your
garage opener for confirmation.
7. Reconnect the motor of your garage
6
1) Training button
door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your garage door opener by 2. Press the training button on the
pressing the programmed HomeLink® garage door opener motor head unit
button. (which activates the “training light” on the
1. Locate the training button on the unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
& Programming rolling-code- garage door opener motor head unit. 3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and
protected garage door open- The exact location and color of the button release the HomeLink® button that was
ers in the U.S.A. may vary by brand of garage door opener. programmed in the section above. Press
If it is difficult to locate the training button, and release the button a second time to
If your garage door opener has a rolling
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc- complete the programming procedure.
code feature, program the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System for it by following tion manual.
NOTE
steps 1 through 5 in the "Programming
Some garage door openers may re-
garage door openers in the U.S.A." sec-
quire you to do the above procedure a
tion above and then continuing with the
third time to complete the program-
following steps.
ming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Con-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (252,1)
trol System and your garage door opener memory of all three buttons. opener by pressing the programmed
should activate when the HomeLink® HomeLink® button.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
button is pressed.
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 & Programming other devices
& Programming for entrance mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons To program other devices such as door
gates and garage door open- on the driver’s sun visor, keeping the locks, home lighting and security systems,
ers in Canada indicator light in view. contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate or call 1-800-355-3515.
or garage door opener from the outlet.
& Operating the HomeLink®
Wireless Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
& Reprogramming a single

4. P r e s s a n d h o l d t h e d e s i r e d HomeLink® button
HomeLink® button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand- 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
2. Press and hold the two outside buttons you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
until the HomeLink® indicator light begins held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete. the button until step 4 has been com-
to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both pleted.
buttons. 6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds, 2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
NOTE release both buttons. begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are position the hand-held transmitter of the
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
already programmed for other devices, device for which you wish to program the
garage door opener to the outlet.
skip step 2 because it clears the button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door from the HomeLink® button surface.

Black plate (253,1)
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans- & In case a problem occurs
mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator If you cannot activate a device using the
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. corresponding HomeLink® button after
4. When the indicator light begins to flash programming, contact HomeLink at
rapidly, release both buttons. www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
The programming for the previous device 3515 for assistance.
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pushing the HomeLink®
button.
& Erasing HomeLink® button
memory 6
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink® buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.

Black plate (13,1)
Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Automatic transmission – 4-speed................... 7-18

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 Selector lever .................................................... 7-19
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function............ 7-20
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7 Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-21
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8 Maximum speeds............................................... 7-22
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-9 Driving tips........................................................ 7-23
Manual transmission vehicle................................ 7-9 SPORT mode..................................................... 7-23
Automatic transmission vehicle .......................... 7-10 Shift lock release ............................................... 7-24
Stopping the engine........................................... 7-11 Automatic transmission – 5-speed................... 7-24
Remote engine start system Selector lever .................................................... 7-25
(dealer option) ................................................. 7-11 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function............ 7-26
Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-12 Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-27
Remote start safety features ............................... 7-12 Maximum speeds............................................... 7-29 7
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote Driving tips........................................................ 7-29
start................................................................. 7-12 Shift lock release ............................................... 7-30
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start SI-DRIVE (turbo and 3.0 L models) .................. 7-31
shutdown......................................................... 7-12 Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-31
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-32
vehicle ............................................................. 7-13 Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-32
Service mode ..................................................... 7-13 SI-DRIVE selector .............................................. 7-32
Remote transmitter programming and SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#) switch ...................... 7-33
programmable feature option............................ 7-13 Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)
System maintenance .......................................... 7-14 (if equipped) .................................................... 7-33
Manual transmission – 5 speeds ...................... 7-15 Power steering................................................... 7-34
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-15 Braking ............................................................... 7-34
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-16
Braking tips....................................................... 7-34
Manual transmission – 6 speeds (2.5GT Brake system .................................................... 7-34
spec.B) ............................................................. 7-17 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-35
Selecting reverse gear........................................ 7-17
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-35
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-17
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-35
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-18

Black plate (14,1)
Starting and operating
ABS warning light .............................................. 7-36 Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-44
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Parking brake .................................................... 7-45
system ............................................................. 7-37 Parking tips ....................................................... 7-45
Steps to take if EBD system fails ........................ 7-37 Cruise control .................................................... 7-46
Vehicle Dynamics Control system To set cruise control .......................................... 7-46
(if equipped) .................................................... 7-38 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-47
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-40 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-48
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-42 To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-48
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-49
(if equipped) .................................................... 7-43 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-50

Black plate (257,1)
Starting and operating 7-3
Fuel NOTE ! Fuel octane rating

Be sure to use premium unleaded This octane rating is the average of the
gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for a 2.5 Research Octane and Motor Octane
CAUTION L turbo engine model. If other gasoline numbers and is commonly referred to as
(lower than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Use of a fuel which is low in quality reduced output and poor accelerator
or use of an inappropriate fuel Using a gasoline with a lower octane
response will result. rating can cause persistent and heavy
additive may cause engine damage.
! 3.0 L models knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
The 3.0 L engine is designed to operate
& Fuel requirements using unleaded gasoline with an octane
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. See your
! 2.5 L non-turbo models rating of 91 AKI or higher. Regular dealer or a qualified service technician if
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating you use a fuel with the specified octane
The 2.5 L non-turbo engine is designed to of 87 AKI or higher may be used. However rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or
operate using unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
for optimum engine performance and persistently. 7
driveability, it is recommended that you
! 2.5 L turbo models use 91 AKI or higher grade unleaded ! Unleaded gasoline
The 2.5 L turbo engine is designed to gasoline. You may experience reduced The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
operate using premium unleaded gaso- output, poor accelerator response, and to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
line with an octane rating of 91 AKI or reduced fuel economy when using gaso- nozzle. Under no circumstances should
higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is line with an octane rating lower than 91 leaded gasoline be used because it will
not available, regular unleaded gasoline AKI, depending on your driving habits and damage the emission control system and
with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher conditions. If you experience any of these may impair driveability and fuel economy.
may be temporarily used. For optimum conditions while using a lower octane ! California fuel
engine performance and driveability, it is rated fuel, you may want to return to using
91 AKI octane rated fuel as soon as If your vehicle was certified to California
required that you use premium grade Emission Standards as indicated on the
unleaded gasoline. possible. Additionally, if your vehicle
knocks heavily or persistently, or if you underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
are driving with heavy loads such as when optimize engine and emission control
towing a trailer, the use of 91 AKI or higher system performance with gasoline that
grade unleaded gasoline is required. meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (258,1)
7-4 Starting and operating
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting ! Gasoline for cleaner air now producing reformulated gasolines,
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- which are designed to reduce vehicle
side California is permitted to have higher CAUTION emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- reformulated gasoline.
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con- If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try taining alcohol may cause paint you should ask your service station
a different brand of unleaded gasoline damage, which is not covered under operators if their gasolines contain deter-
having lower sulfur to determine if the the SUBARU Limited Warranty. gents and oxygenates and if they have
problem is fuel related before returning been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for Your use of gasoline with detergent sions.
service. The CHECK ENGINE warning additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels
light/malfunction indicator lamp may also forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the
turn on. If this occurs, return to your This helps keep your engine in tune and following.
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis. your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
If it is determined that the condition is properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
may not be covered by your warranty. high quality fuel with the proper detergent
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
! MMT and other additives, you should never
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
need to add any fuel system cleaning
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- Methanol can be used in your vehicle
agents to your fuel tank.
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If Many gasolines are now blended with mixture AND if it is accompanied by
you use such fuels, your emission control materials called oxygenates. Use of these sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
system performance may deteriorate and fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal- Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
happens, return to your authorized (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in under these conditions.
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
determined that the condition is caused than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
be covered by your warranty. line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (259,1)
. Fuel system damage or driveability similar object to discharge any

problems which result from the use of static electricity that may be present
improper fuel are not covered under the on your body. If your body is carry-
SUBARU Limited Warranty. ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
& Fuel filler lid and cap could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
! Refueling static electric charge, do not get
Only one person should be involved in back into the vehicle while refueling
refueling. Do not allow others to approach is in progress.
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
7
1) Open
2) Close
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid WARNING slowly counterclockwise.
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat. Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)
WARNING matic stop mechanism on the NOTE

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam- tinue to add fuel, temperature
mable. Before refueling, always changes or other conditions
first stop the engine and close all may cause fuel to overflow from
vehicle doors and windows. the tank and create a fire hazard.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
or electrical sparks in the adja- pump automatically turns off. Do not add
cent area. Refueling must be any more fuel.
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel. CAUTION
. When opening the cap, grasp it
Make sure that the cap is tightened
firmly and turn it slowly to the
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
left. Do not remove the cap
in the event of an accident.
quickly. Fuel may be under pres- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
sure and spray out of the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
filler neck, especially in hot 5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain door (lid) is located on the right side of
weather. If you hear a hissing the vehicle.
sound while you are removing not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening. . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
the cap, wait for the sound to until it clicks or if the tether is caught
stop and then slowly open the 6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. If
you spill any fuel on the painted surface, under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
cap to prevent fuel from spraying warning light/malfunction indicator
out and creating a fire hazard. rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged. lamp may illuminate. Refer to the
. When refueling, insert the fuel “Warning and indicator lights” section
nozzle securely into the fuel filler located in chapter 3.
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop- CAUTION
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the . Never add any cleaning agents to
tank and creating a fire hazard. the fuel tank. The addition of a
. Stop refueling when the auto- cleaning agent may cause da-

Black plate (261,1)
mage to the fuel system. State emission testing (U.S. in order to meet their obligation under
. federal law to implement stricter vehicle
After refueling, turn the cap to the only) emission standards to reduce air pollution
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread-
not securely tightened, fuel may WARNING mill or roller-like testing device that allows
leak out while the vehicle is being your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the
driven or fuel spillage could Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle vehicle remains in one place. Depending
occur in the event of an accident, must NEVER be performed on a on the severity of a state’s air pollution
creating a fire hazard. single two-wheel dynamometer. At- problems, the states must adopt either a
tempting to do so will result in “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior uncontrolled vehicle movement and inspection test. Normally, a portion of the
surfaces of the vehicle. Because may cause an accident or injuries to basic emission test consists of an emis-
fuel may damage the paint, be persons nearby. sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
for a short period of time. States with more 7
CAUTION severe air pollution problems are required
the SUBARU Limited Warranty. to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission
. Always use a genuine SUBARU Resultant vehicle damage due to test. This test simulates actual driving
fuel filler cap. If you use the improper testing is not covered conditions on a dynamometer and permits
wrong cap, it may not fit, and under the SUBARU Limited War- more accurate measurement of tailpipe
your fuel tank and emission con- ranty and is the responsibility of emitted pollution than the basic emission
trol system may be damaged. It the state inspection program or its test.
could also lead to fuel spillage contractors or licensees. The U.S. Environmental Protection
and a fire. Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
At state inspection time, remember to
. Immediately put fuel in the tank dynamometers in their emission testing
tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU
whenever the low fuel warning
advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the
light illuminates. Engine misfires
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel
as a result of an empty tank
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer.
could cause damage to the en-
sion damage will result.
gine.
There are some states that use four-wheel
Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs.
ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (262,1)
not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle. not properly operating or there is one or Preparing to drive
Under no circumstances should the rear more diagnostic trouble codes stored in
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK You should perform the following checks
should the driveshaft be disconnected for ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. and adjustments every day before you
state emission testing. . A state emission inspection may reject start driving.
The EPA has issued regulations for (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic OBD system readiness monitors “Not lights are clean and unobstructed.
(OBD) system as part of the state emis- Ready” is greater than one. Under this 2. Check the appearance and condition
sions inspection. The OBD system is condition, the vehicle operator should be of the tires. Also check tires for proper
designed to detect engine and transmis- instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few inflation.
sion problems that might cause vehicle days to set the monitors and return for an
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
emissions to exceed allowable limits. emission re-inspection.
leaks.
These inspections apply to all 1996 model . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Sedan)
year and newer passenger cars and light should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
and rear gate (Station wagon) are fully
trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of service.
closed.
Columbia have implemented the OBD 5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
system inspection. 6. Check the adjustment of the inside
. The inspection of the OBD system and outside mirrors.
consists of a visual operational check of 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
function indicator lamp (MIL) and an
examination of the OBD system with an 8. Check the operation of the warning
electronic scan tool while the engine is and indicator lights when the ignition
running. switch is turned to the “ON” position.
. A vehicle passes the OBD system 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
inspection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE” ing lights after starting the engine.
warning light/MIL illumination is observed,
there is no stored diagnostic trouble
codes, and the OBD system readiness
monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is

Black plate (263,1)

NOTE Starting the engine following procedure.
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
washer fluid and other fluid levels & Manual transmission vehicle “LOCK” position and wait for at least
should be checked daily, weekly or at 10 seconds. After checking that the
1. Apply the parking brake. parking brake is firmly set, turn the
fuel stops.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- ignition switch to the “START” position
cessories. while depressing the accelerator pedal
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor slightly (approximately a quarter of the
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold full stroke). Release the accelerator
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting pedal as soon as the engine starts.
the engine. The starter motor will only (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
operate when the clutch pedal is pressed the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
fully to the floor. position and wait for at least 10
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
position and check the operation of the erator pedal and turn the ignition 7
warning and indicator lights. Refer to the switch to the “START” position. If the
“Warning and indicator lights” section in engine starts, quickly release the
chapter 3. accelerator pedal.
(3) If this does not start the engine,
CAUTION turn the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK” position. After waiting for 10
Do not operate the starter motor
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
continuously for more than 10 sec-
switch to the “START” position without
onds. If the engine fails to start after
depressing the accelerator pedal.
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
more before trying again. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lever is at the “P” or “N” position. the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
lights have gone off after the engine has 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait for at least 10
started. The fuel injection system auto- position and check the operation of the seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
matically lowers the idle speed as the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the erator pedal and turn the ignition
engine warms up. “Warning and indicator lights” section in switch to the “START” position. If the
chapter 3. engine starts, quickly release the
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo models) accelerator pedal.
CAUTION (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
To protect the engine while the shift
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
lever is in the neutral position, the Do not operate the starter motor position. After waiting for 10 seconds
engine is controlled so that the engine continuously for more than 10 sec- or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
speed may not become too high even if onds. If the engine fails to start after “START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal is depressed operating the starter for 5 to 10 the accelerator pedal.
hard. seconds, wait for 10 seconds or (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
more before trying again.
& Automatic transmission ve- contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
hicle for assistance.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
position without depressing the accelera- lights have gone out after the engine has
CAUTION tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the selector If the engine does not start, perform the engine warms up.
lever into the “N” position. Do not following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
attempt to place the selector lever of sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or
a moving vehicle into the “P” posi- “LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
tion. applied.
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
1. Apply the parking brake.
while depressing the accelerator pedal
NOTE (2.5 L non-turbo and 3.0 L
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- slightly (approximately a quarter of the models)
cessories. full stroke). Release the accelerator To protect the engine while the selector
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” pedal as soon as the engine starts. lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
position (preferably “P” position). The (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn engine is controlled so that the engine
starter will only operate when the select

Black plate (265,1)
speed may not become too high even if Stopping the engine Remote engine start system
the accelerator pedal is depressed
hard.
(dealer option)
WARNING
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause . Do not remote start a vehicle in
loss of power to the power steering an enclosed environment (e.g.
and the brake booster, making steer- closed garage). Prolonged opera-
ing and braking more difficult. It tion of a motor vehicle in an
could also result in accidental acti- enclosed environment can cause
vation of the “LOCK” position on the a harmful build-up of Carbon
ignition switch, causing the steering Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
wheel to lock. harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox- 7
The ignition switch should be turned off ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
only when the vehicle is stopped and the ness or in extreme cases uncon-
engine is idling. sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (266,1)
an additional four times. If the vehicle fails & Entering the vehicle while it
to start after the additional attempts, the is running via remote start
remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non activated state. 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
& Remote start safety features cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
For safety and security reasons, the trigger and the remote engine start system
system will fail to start and beep the horn will turn off. Inserting the key into the
twice or shut down the engine during ignition switch and turning it to the “ON”
remote start operation if any of the position or pressing the unlock button “ ”
following occur: on the remote keyless entry transmitter
. The brake pedal is pressed before the will disarm the alarm system. Refer to the
vehicle ignition switch is turned “on” “Alarm system” section in chapter 2.
& Starting your vehicle . The key was already in the ignition 2. Enter the vehicle. Do not press the
switch brake pedal.
The remote control start system is acti- . The engine hood is opened
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
within 3 seconds on your remote control . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition
transmitter. The system will check certain reached a level over 3,000 RPM switch is accidentally turned to the
pre-conditions before starting, and if all . The alarm is triggered by opening a “START” position, the system’s “starter
safety parameters are correct, the engine door or the rear gate. anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter
will start within 5 seconds. While the from re-cranking.
vehicle is operating via remote engine
NOTE 4. Press the brake pedal. The remote
start, the vehicle’s power window features . The security indicator light on the starter disengages, the vehicle’s power
will be disabled. Also, the system has a dashboard will stop flashing while window features are re-enabled and the
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if under remote engine start operation, vehicle will operate normally.
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and but the vehicle is still protected.
hold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again to . If the vehicle is entered during & Entering the vehicle follow-
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter remote engine start operation, the ing remote engine start shut-
cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the down
stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history.
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
power off then attempt to start the vehicle opened by the remote keyless entry

Black plate (267,1)
transmitter within a few seconds immedi- ! To disengage the service mode 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
ately following remote engine start shut- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” door must remain opened throughout the
down. position, depress and hold the brake entire process).
pedal, then press and release the “ ” 2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling button on the remote control transmitter switch and turn to the “ON” position.
the interior of the vehicle three times. The system will pause for 1 3. Locate the small black programming
second and flash the parking lights 1 time button behind the fuse box cover, on the
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- indicating that the system has exited
perature controls to the desired setting driver’s side left under the dashboard
service mode. panel.
and operation. After the system starts the
vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will NOTE 4. Press and hold the black programming
activate and heat or cool the interior to When taking your vehicle in for service, button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will
your setting. it is recommended that you inform the honk and the parking lights will flash three
service personnel that your vehicle is times to indicate that the system has
& Service mode equipped with a remote control start entered programming mode. At this point
7
system. you can perform either action (Step 5 or
In service mode, the remote start function
Step 6).
is temporarily disabled to prevent the
5. To program a remote transmitter:
system from unexpectedly starting the & Remote transmitter program- press and release the “ ” button on each
engine while being serviced. ming and programmable fea- transmitter. The horn will honk and the
! To engage the service mode ture option parking lights will flash one time to indicate
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” New transmitters can be programmed to a successful transmitter learn each time
position, depress and hold the brake pedal the engine starter system in the event that the “ ” button is pressed. You can
then, press and release the “ ” button on remote transmitters are lost, stolen or program up to eight transmitters.
the remote control transmitter three times. damaged. The remote engine start system 6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
The system will pause for 1 second and also has one programmable feature that ON/OFF: press and release the brake to
then flash the parking lights and honk the can be adjusted for user preference. toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and
horn three times indicating that the system The remote engine starter system can be the parking lights will flash one time to
is in service mode. When attempting to programmed to either make an audible indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are
activate the remote start system while in horn chirp upon remote start activation or “OFF”. The horn will honk and the parking
service mode, the parking lights will flash not. Remote transmitter programming and lights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-
and the horn will honk two times and will feature programming can be adjusted firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Pressing
not start. using the following procedure. the brake pedal repeatedly will toggle the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (268,1)
feature ON or OFF each time.

7. To exit the remote transmitter and
feature programming mode, turn the igni-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position, remove
the key from the ignition switch and test
operation of the remote transmitter(s) and
horn confirmation feature.
& System maintenance

! Changing the remote control bat-
teries
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-1220) supplied in your remote control
should last approximately three years,
depending on usage. When the batteries
begin to weaken, you will notice a
decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote control batteries.
1. Carefully pry the remote control halves 2. Remove the circuit board from the
apart using a small flat-head screwdriver. bottom half of the case and slide the white
plastic battery holder out from under the
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign

Black plate (269,1)
on the old batteries before removing them Manual transmission – 5

to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
speeds
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries). WARNING
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote control. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
NOTE clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral position.
This device complies with Part 15 of Engine braking has no effect in
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of either of these conditions and the
Industry Canada. Operation is subject risk of an accident is consequently
to the following two conditions: (1) This increased. The shift pattern is shown on the shift
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to 7
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
accept any interference received, in- CAUTION the neutral position then shift into reverse
cluding interference that may cause gear.
undesired operation. Shift into reverse ONLY when the
Changes or modifications not ex- vehicle has completely stopped. It To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pressly approved by the party respon- may cause damage to the transmis- pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
sible for compliance could void the sion to try shifting into reverse when let up on the clutch pedal.
user’s authority to operate the equip- the vehicle is moving. If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
ment. transmission in neutral, release the clutch
The manual transmission is a fully syn- pedal momentarily, and then try again.
chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission. & Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (270,1)
each gear position except for brief accel- cause clutch damage.
Shift up mph (km/h)
eration in an emergency. The tach- Do not drive with your hand resting on the
1st to 2nd 15 (24) ometer’s needle will enter the red area if shift lever. This may cause wear on the
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) these speeds are exceeded. Failure to transmission components.
observe this precaution can lead to
3rd to 4th 35 (56) excessive engine wear and poor fuel When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
4th to 5th 45 (73) economy. speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
Non-turbo models or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
! Maximum allowable speeds mph (km/h) lower gear before the engine starts to
Except labor.
Gear OUTBACK
WARNING OUTBACK . On steep downgrades, downshift the
1st 30 (48) 30 (48) transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
When shifting down a gear, ensure necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
2nd 50 (81) 52 (82) speed and to extend brake pad life.
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- 3rd 71 (116) 71 (116) In this way, the engine provides a braking
lowable Speed for the gear which is effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
Turbo models
about to be selected. Failure to mph (km/h) the brakes while descending a hill, they
observe this precaution can lead to may overheat and not work properly.
Except
engine over-revving and this in turn Gear OUTBACK OUTBACK . The engine may, on rare occasions,
can result in engine damage. knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
1st 32 (52) 32 (52)
In addition, sudden application of ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
engine brakes when the vehicle is 2nd 54 (88) 54 (88) This phenomenon does not indicate a
travelling on a slippery surface can 3rd 80 (129) 78 (127) malfunction.
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- . A slight reduction in output torque may
quence, control of the vehicle may NOTE occur in the models with a 2.5 L turbo
be lost and the risk of an accident Never exceed posted speed limits. engine before the engine warms up.
increased.
& Driving tips
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ- Do not drive with your foot resting on the
ent gear. clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
Never exceed the speed limit below for upgrade. Either of those actions may

Black plate (271,1)
Manual transmission – 6 lever knob. let up on the clutch pedal.

speeds (2.5GT spec.B) If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
& Selecting reverse gear transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
WARNING CAUTION
& Shifting speeds
Do not drive the vehicle with the Shift into reverse ONLY when the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the vehicle has completely stopped. It ! Recommended shifting speeds
clutch pedal is depressed) or with may cause damage to the transmis- The best compromise between fuel econ-
the shift lever in the neutral position. sion to try shifting into reverse when omy and vehicle performance during
Engine braking has no effect in the vehicle is moving. normal driving is ensured by shifting up
either of these conditions and the at the speeds listed in the following table.
risk of an accident is consequently
increased. Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24) 7
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th 50 (80)
! Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
1) Slider
When shifting down a gear, ensure
You must raise the slider and hold it in that that the vehicle is not travelling at a
position before you can move the shift speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
The manual transmission is a fully syn- lever to the “R” position. lowable Speed for the gear which is
chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re- about to be selected. Failure to
verse-speed transmission. To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually observe this precaution can lead to
The shift pattern is shown on the shift engine over-revving and this in turn
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (272,1)
can result in engine damage. NOTE Automatic transmission – 4-

In addition, sudden application of Never exceed posted speed limits. speed
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can & Driving tips The automatic transmission is electroni-
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- cally controlled and provides 4 forward
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
quence, control of the vehicle may speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
be lost and the risk of an accident manual mode and a SPORT mode.
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
increased.
upgrade. Either of those actions may WARNING
cause clutch damage.
The following tables show the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ- Do not drive with your hand resting on the Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will shift lever. This may cause wear on the position into the “D” or “R” position
enter the red area if these speeds are transmission components. while depressing the accelerator
exceeded. pedal. This may cause the vehicle
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
With the exception of cases where sudden to jump forward or backward.
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
acceleration is required, the vehicle or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
should not be driven with the tachometer’s lower gear before the engine starts to CAUTION
needle inside the red area. Failure to labor.
observe this precaution can lead to . Shift into the “P” or “R” position
excessive engine wear and poor fuel On steep downgrades, downshift the
only after the vehicle is comple-
economy. transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
tely stopped. Shifting while the
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
vehicle is moving may cause
Gear mph (km/h) speed and to extend brake pad life.
damage to the transmission.
1st 36 (59) In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) . Do not race the engine for more
2nd 59 (96) the brakes while descending a hill, they than 5 seconds in any position
3rd 88 (142) may overheat and not work properly. except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is set or when
4th 117 (189) The engine may, on rare occasions, knock chocks are used in the wheels.
5th 150 (242) when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or This may cause the automatic
6th Top speed
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This transmission fluid to overheat.
phenomenon does not indicate a problem. . Avoid shifting from one of the

Black plate (273,1)
forward driving positions into the collected and stored in memory to In this position, the transmission is me-
“R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current from rolling freely.
stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle When you park the vehicle, first set the
cause damage to the transmis-
continues to be driven for a while. parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
sion.
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
. When parking the vehicle, first the transmission.
securely apply the parking brake & Selector lever
and then place the selector lever To shift the selector lever from the “P” to
in the “P” position. Avoid parking any other position, you should depress the
for a long time with the selector brake pedal fully then move the selector
lever in any other position as lever. This prevents the vehicle from
doing so could result in a dead lurching when it is started.
battery. ! R (Reverse)
7
This position is for backing the vehicle.
NOTE To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
. When the engine coolant tempera- the vehicle completely then move the
ture is still low, the automatic transmis- lever to the “R” position.
sion will upshift to higher engine ! N (Neutral)
speeds than when the coolant tempera-
ture is sufficiently high in order to This position is for restarting a stalled
: Shift possible with brake pedal de- engine.
shorten the warm-up time and improve pressed
driveability. The gearshift timing will : Shift possible with brake pedal not In this position the wheels and transmis-
automatically shift to the normal timing depressed sion are not locked. In this position, the
after the engine has warmed up. transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
The selector lever has four positions, “P”,
. Immediately after ATF (automatic freely, even on the slightest incline unless
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for the parking brake or foot brake is on.
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.
may feel that the automatic transmis- Avoid coasting with the transmission
sion operation is somewhat unusual. ! P (Park) neutral.
This results from invalidation of data This position is for parking the vehicle and During coasting, there is no engine brak-
which the on-board computer has starting the engine. ing effect.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (274,1)
NOTE the original gear position. NOTE

If the selector lever is in the “N” To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever . A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift
position when you stop the engine for from this position into the manual gate. To will not occur at speeds above 50
parking, you may not subsequently be use the manual mode, move the lever mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-
able to move it to the “R” and “P” from this position into the manual gate matic downshift will not occur at
positions. If this happens, turn the then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends. speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
ignition switch to the “ON” position. . Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd
You will then be able to move the ! While climbing a grade may occur even when driving on a level
selector lever to the “P” position. When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to road depending on conditions, such as
4th gear is prevented from taking place how hard you depress the brake pedal.
WARNING when the accelerator is released. This
minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accel- & Selector lever reverse inhi-
Do not drive the vehicle with the
selector lever in the “N” (neutral) erating again. This prevents repeated biting function
position. Engine braking has no upshifting and downshifting resulting in a This function prevents accidental move-
effect in this condition and the risk smoother operation of the vehicle. ment of the selector lever to the “R”
of an accident is consequently in- position while the vehicle is moving.
creased. NOTE The function becomes operational when
The transmission may downshift to 2nd the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-
or 1st gear, depending on the way the mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-
! D (Drive) accelerator pedal is pressed to accel- tional, it prevents the selector lever from
This position is for normal driving. erate the vehicle again. being moved from the “N” position to the
The transmission automatically shifts into “R” position. When the vehicle speed
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to ! While going down a hill drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function
the vehicle speed and the acceleration When you are descending a hill or any is canceled. The selector lever can then
you require. other slope while braking with the be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
“SPORT” mode selected, the transmission
When more acceleration is required in this When the ignition switch has been turned
may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend-
position, press the accelerator pedal fully to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
ing on how hard you depress the brake
to the floor and hold that position. The selector lever from the “N” position to the
pedal, causing engine braking to work.
transmission will automatically downshift “R” position is possible for a limited time
Reacceleration for a short time will cause
to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release period by depressing the brake pedal and
the transmission to upshift normally.
the pedal, the transmission will return to then becomes impossible. Also, the se-

Black plate (275,1)
lector lever cannot be moved to the “R” release” section in this chapter, remove
position after it has been placed in the “P” the shift lock release cover. Then, with the
position and then placed again in the “N” screwdriver inserted into the hole, move
position. the selector lever to the “P” position. If the
When the movement of the selector lever selector lever reverse inhibiting function
from the “N” position to the “R” position fails, have the vehicle inspected by the
has become impossible, turn the ignition nearest SUBARU dealer.
switch back to the “ON” position then
move the selector lever to the “P” position. & Selection of manual mode
Pressing the selector lever release button
also makes it possible to move the
selector lever to the “P” position at this
time.
1) Upshift indicator
! Selector lever release button 2) Downshift indicator 7
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator in the
tachometer illuminate. The gear position
indicator shows the currently selected
gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. The
With the vehicle either moving or station- upshift and downshift indicators show
ary, move the selector lever from the “D” when a gearshift is possible. When the
position to the manual gate then move it to upshift indicator “ ” is on, upshifting is
the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate possible. When the downshift indicator
to select manual mode. “ ” is on, downshifting is possible. When
both indicators are on, upshifting and
If you inadvertently have turned the igni- downshifting are both possible. When the
tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
selector lever in the “N” position, proceed signals), the downshift indicator goes off.
as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock Gearshifts can be performed using the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (276,1)
selector lever. . If you attempt to shift up when the & Maximum speeds
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond. WARNING
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating When down shifting, ensure that the
the selector lever twice in rapid suc- vehicle is not travelling at a speed
cession. exceeding the Maximum Allowable
. The transmission automatically se- Speed for the gear which is about to
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops be selected. Failure to observe this
moving. precaution can lead to engine over-
. If the temperature of the automatic revving and this in turn can result in
transmission fluid becomes too high, engine damage.
the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will In addition, sudden application of
illuminate and upshifts to 4th gear will engine braking caused by down
Using the selector lever not be possible. Immediately stop the shifting when the vehicle is travel-
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly vehicle in a safe place and let the ling on a slippery surface can lead
pushing the selector lever toward the “+” engine idle until the warning light goes to wheel locking; as a consequence,
end of the manual gate. off. control of the vehicle may be lost
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly and the risk of an accident in-
pulling the selector lever toward the “−” creased.
end of the manual gate.
The following tables show the maximum
NOTE speeds that are possible with each differ-
Please read the following points care- ent gear.
fully and bear them in mind when using When down shifting, it is important to
the manual mode. confirm that the current vehicle speed is
. If you attempt to shift down when not in excess of the Maximum Allowable
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when Speed of the gear which is about to be
a downshift would push the tachometer selected.
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.

Black plate (277,1)

mph (km/h)
Position 2.5 L non-turbo models “D” position. Use the brake instead.
1 30 (48)
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
2 63 (101) ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
3 99 (160) This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE & SPORT mode

In order to prevent over-revving during
deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-
mission will remain in the current gear
if the speed of the vehicle is in excess
of the Maximum Allowable Speed for When selected, the SPORT mode indica-
the gear to which the selector lever has tor light on the instrument panel will turn 7
been moved. on.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the
& Driving tips selector lever to the “D” position or select
. On a road surface where there is a risk manual mode.
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,
gravel-covered road), you can pull away move the selector lever to the “D” position
from a standstill (safely and easily) by first SPORT mode is used when power is and from there to the manual gate.
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill In this mode, the transmission shifts up at
mode. driving. To select this mode, move the higher vehicle speeds and shifts down
. Always apply the foot or parking brake selector lever from the “D” position to the more responsively than in normal mode.
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or manual gate.
“R” position.
. Always set the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (278,1)
& Shift lock release Automatic transmission – 5-

If the selector lever does not move from speed
the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed and the ignition switch in the The automatic transmission is electroni-
“ON” position, perform the following steps: cally controlled and provides 5 forward
To override the shift lock: speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
1. Set the parking brake and stop the manual mode and SI-DRIVE mode.
engine.
WARNING
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bucket. Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. pedal. This may cause the vehicle
5. Push down on the screwdriver and to jump forward or backward.
move the selector lever from the “P” to the
“N” position.
CAUTION
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
Depress the brake pedal and start the . Shift into the “P” or “R” position
engine. only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
vehicle is moving may cause
dealer immediately to have the system
damage to the transmission.
repaired.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the . Do not race the engine for more
edge with a flat-head screwdriver. than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the

Black plate (279,1)
forward driving positions into the collected and stored in memory to In this position, the transmission is me-
“R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current from rolling freely.
stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle When you park the vehicle, first set the
cause damage to the transmis-
continues to be driven for a while. parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
sion.
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
. When parking the vehicle, first the transmission.
securely apply the parking brake & Selector lever
and then place the selector lever To shift the selector lever from the “P” to
in the “P” position. Avoid parking any other position, you should depress the
for a long time with the selector brake pedal fully then move the selector
lever in any other position as lever. This prevents the vehicle from
doing so could result in a dead lurching when it is started.
battery.
NOTE (3.0 L models only) 7
To protect the engine while the “P”
NOTE position is selected, the engine is
. When the engine coolant tempera- controlled such that the engine speed
ture is still low, the automatic transmis- may not become too high even if the
sion will upshift to higher engine accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
speeds than when the coolant tempera-
! R (Reverse)
ture is sufficiently high in order to : Shift possible with brake pedal de-
shorten the warm-up time and improve pressed
This position is for backing the vehicle.
driveability. The gearshift timing will : Shift possible with brake pedal not To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
automatically shift to the normal timing depressed the vehicle completely then move the
after the engine has warmed up. lever to the “R” position.
The selector lever has four positions, “P”,
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
“R”, “N, “D” and also has a manual gate for ! N (Neutral)
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
using the manual mode.
may feel that the automatic transmis- This position is for restarting a stalled
sion operation is somewhat unusual. ! P (Park) engine.
This results from invalidation of data This position is for parking the vehicle and In this position the wheels and transmis-
which the on-board computer has starting the engine. sion are not locked. In this position, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (280,1)
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll creased. accelerator pedal is pressed to accel-
freely, even on the slightest incline unless erate the vehicle again.
the parking brake or foot brake is on. ! D (Drive)
Avoid coasting with the transmission ! While going down a hill
neutral. This position is for normal driving. The When you are descending a hill or any
transmission automatically shifts into a other slope while braking with the Sport
During coasting, there is no engine brak- suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to
ing effect. Sharp (S#) mode selected, the transmis-
the vehicle speed and the acceleration sion may downshift to 4th or 3rd gear
NOTE (3.0 L models only) you require. depending on how hard you depress the
To protect the engine while the “N” When more acceleration is required in this brake pedal, causing engine braking to
position is selected, the engine is position, press the accelerator pedal fully work. Reacceleration for a short time will
controlled such that the engine speed to the floor and hold that position. The cause the transmission to upshift normally.
may not become too high even if the transmission will automatically downshift
accelerator pedal is pressed hard. to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you
NOTE
release the pedal, the transmission will . A 5th-to-4th automatic downshift will
NOTE return to the original gear position. not occur at speeds above 78 mph (126
km/h) and a 4th-to-3rd automatic down-
If the selector lever is in the “N” To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate. shift will not occur at speeds above 53
position when you stop the engine for
mph (86 km/h).
parking, you may not subsequently be
! While climbing a grade . Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd
able to move it to the “R” and “P”
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to may occur even when driving on a level
positions. If this happens, turn the
4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking road depending on conditions, such as
ignition switch to the “ON” position.
place when the accelerator is released. how hard you depress the brake pedal.
You will then be able to move the
selector lever to the “P” position. This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accel- & Selector lever reverse inhi-
erating again. This prevents repeated biting function
WARNING
upshifting and downshifting resulting in a
smoother operation of the vehicle. This function prevents accidental move-
Do not drive the vehicle with the ment of the selector lever to the “R”
selector lever in the “N” (neutral) position while the vehicle is moving.
position. Engine braking has no
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd The function becomes operational when
effect in this condition and the risk
or 1st gear, depending on the way the the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-
of an accident is consequently in-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-

Black plate (281,1)
tional, it prevents the selector lever from ! Selector lever release button & Selection of manual mode
being moved from the “N” position to the
“R” position. When the vehicle speed
drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function
is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
selector lever from the “N” position to the
“R” position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal and
then becomes impossible. Also, the se-
lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”
position after it has been placed in the “P”
position and then placed again in the “N” If you inadvertently have turned the igni- With the vehicle either moving or station-
7
position. tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the ary, move the selector lever from the “D”
When the movement of the selector lever selector lever in the “N” position, proceed position to the manual gate to select the
from the “N” position to the “R” position as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock manual mode.
has become impossible, turn the ignition release” section in this chapter, remove
switch back to the “ON” position then the shift lock release cover. Then, with the
move the selector lever to the “P” position. screwdriver inserted into the hole, move
Pressing the selector lever release button the selector lever to the “P” position. If the
also makes it possible to move the selector lever reverse inhibiting function
selector lever to the “P” position at this fails, have the vehicle inspected by the
time. nearest SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (282,1)
selector lever or the paddle shift switch ! Using the paddle shift (if equipped)
behind the steering wheel (if equipped).
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator Pull the “+” of the paddle shift to upshift
! Using the selector lever one level. Also pull the “−” of the paddle
When the manual mode is selected, the Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly shift to downshift one level.
gear position indicator and upshift indica- pushing the selector lever toward the “+”
tor and/or downshift indicator in the To deselect the manual mode, return the
end of the manual gate. selector lever to the “D” position from the
tachometer illuminate. The gear position
indicator shows the currently selected Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly manual gate.
gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The pulling the selector lever toward the “−” While driving, if you change gears by
upshift and downshift indicators show end of the manual gate. paddle shifting, the gear position indicator
when a gearshift is possible. When the light illuminates and shows the current
upshift indicator “ ” is on, upshifting is gear condition. At this time, the normal
possible. When the downshift indicator mode temporarily changes to the manual
“ ” is on, downshifting is possible. When mode, and after driving for a short period
both indicators are on, upshifting and of time, the transmission mode returns to
downshifting are both possible. When the the normal mode. (The timing of the gear
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic change and return is different, depending
signals), the downshift indicator goes off. on driving conditions existing when paddle
Gearshifts can be performed using the shifting.)

Black plate (283,1)
Also, if you subsequently ease off the moving. When down shifting, it is important to
accelerator pedal and then accelerate . If the temperature of the automatic confirm that the current vehicle speed is
again, the transmission will automatically transmission fluid becomes too high, not in excess of the Maximum Allowable
switch back from manual mode to normal the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will Speed of the gear which is about to be
mode. illuminate. Immediately stop the vehicle selected.
in a safe place and let the engine idle Legacy
CAUTION until the warning light goes off. mph (km/h)
Position 2.5 L turbo 3.0 L models
Do not place or hang anything on models
the paddle shift levers. Doing so & Maximum speeds
1 25 (40) 27 (43)
may result in accidential gear shift-
ing. WARNING 2 53 (85) 51 (82)
3 85 (137) 84 (135)
When down shifting, ensure that the
NOTE vehicle is not travelling at a speed OUTBACK
Please read the following points care- exceeding the Maximum Allowable mph (km/h) 7
fully and bear them in mind when using Speed for the gear which is about to 2.5 L turbo
Position models 3.0 L models
the manual mode. be selected. Failure to observe this
. If you attempt to shift down when precaution can lead to engine over- 1 25 (40) 28 (44)
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when revving and this in turn can result in
engine damage. 2 53 (85) 52 (84)
a downshift would push the tachometer
In addition, sudden application of 3 86 (138) 87 (139)
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down- engine braking caused by down Never exceed posted speed limits.
shift is not possible. shifting when the vehicle is travel-
. If you attempt to shift up when the ling on a slippery surface can lead
& Driving tips
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- to wheel locking; as a consequence,
sion will not respond. control of the vehicle may be lost . On a road surface where there is a risk
. You can perform a skip-shift (for and the risk of an accident in- of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating creased. gravel-covered road), you can pull away
the selector lever or a paddle switch from a standstill safely and easily by first
twice in rapid succession. The following tables show the maximum selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
. The transmission automatically se- speeds that are possible with each differ- mode.
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops ent gear. . Always apply the foot or parking brake
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (284,1)
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
“R” position. Depress the brake pedal and start the
. Always set the parking brake when engine.
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
vehicle with only the transmission.
dealer immediately to have the system
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary repaired.
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
fault.
. A slight reduction in output torque may 3. Remove the cover by prying on the
occur in the models with a 2.5 L turbo or edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
3.0 L engine before the engine warms up.
& Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from
the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed and the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bucket.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and
move the selector lever from the “P” to the
“N” position.

Black plate (285,1)
SI-DRIVE (turbo and 3.0 L & Intelligent (I) mode

models) For smooth, efficient performance driv-
ing
SI-DRIVE (Subaru Intelligent Drive) works
to maximize engine performance, control
and efficiency.
This system consists of three modes:
Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
(S#). By adjusting the SI-DRIVE selector,
the character of the power unit changes.
The multi-information display located in
the tachometer provides the driver with
the ability to monitor both vehicle perfor-
When Intelligent (I) mode is selected in
mance and the current SI-DRIVE mode.
vehicles equipped with a manual trans- 7
To change the multi-information display, mission, a shift-up indicator “ ” in the
refer to the “Multi-information display tachometer will blink to signal the best
(vehicle with SI-DRIVE)” in chapter 3. The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
time to shift gears for maximum fuel
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency.
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (286,1)
& Sport (S) mode & Sport Sharp (S#) mode & SI-DRIVE selector
For all-around performance driving For maximum performance driving When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to
the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode
changes to Sport (S) mode. When you
rotate it to the right, the mode changes to
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, and when you
push it, the mode changes to Intelligent (I)
mode. After performing this operation, the
switch returns to its original location.
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
power desired by those who want to make Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
the driving experience their own personal level of engine performance and control.
adventure. The throttle becomes more responsive
The linear acceleration characteristic of regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
this versatile mode is ideal for normal maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
driving use. ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on NOTE
the freeway with confidence. . While the engine is cool, the S#
PREP indicator light of the temperature
gauge illuminates. In this case, you
cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#)
mode.
. The next time you turn on the
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)

Black plate (287,1)
mode. & SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#) Rear viscous limited slip dif-
. The next time you turn on the switch
engine, after you turned off the engine
ferential (LSD) (if equipped)
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I) While driving in the Sport (S) mode or
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in Intelligent (I) mode, when you push the
steering wheel switch, it changes to the CAUTION
the same mode as when the engine
Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
was turned off. . Never start the engine while a tire
. While the engine is running, if the on one side is jacked up, as the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- vehicle may move.
tion indicator lamp illuminates, the SI- . If one rear tire is spinning in mud,
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) avoid continued spinning at high
mode. In this case, it is not possible to speed as this could adversely
change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or affect the LSD.
Intelligent (I) mode.
. If a different size rear tire is
. If there is a possibility that the
temporarily used (as in an emer-
7
engine could overheat because of a
temperature increase of the engine gency), it will adversely affect the
coolant, it is not possible to change to LSD. Always replace it with a
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the regular size tire as soon as
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, possible.
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when NOTE
the engine coolant temperature in- The LSD provides optimum distribution of
While driving in Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
creases. For 3.0 L models, it also power according to the difference in
when you push the switch, it changes
changes to the Sport (S) mode when revolutions between the right and left rear
to the former mode before Sport Sharp
the engine oil temperature increases. wheels that may be caused by certain
(S#) mode.
driving conditions, thereby improving driv-
ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or
other slippery roads.

Black plate (288,1)
Power steering Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually
& Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
CAUTION road to a safe place.
WARNING
Do not hold the steering wheel at the & Brake system
fully locked position left or right for Never rest your foot on the brake
more than 5 seconds. This may pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
damage the power steering pump. dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
brakes and needless wear on the system. Each circuit works diagonally
The power steering system operates only brake pads and linings. across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
when the engine is running. brake system should fail, the other half of
If you lose power steering assist because the system still works. If one circuit fails,
! When the brakes get wet
the engine stops or the system fails to the brake pedal will go down much closer
function, you can steer but it will take When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to
much more effort. vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the
NOTE longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle.
Right after the engine has been started at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja- ! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses engine manifold
cent to the power steering pump which vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because
is located at the right-front area of the in addition to foot braking. When descend-
engine compartment. This noise is that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power.
normal. It does not indicate power the brakes may start working improperly
steering system trouble. The brakes will continue to work even
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops
caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to push the pedal much harder
get stronger engine braking. than normal and the braking distance will
! Braking when a tire is punctured increase.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause

Black plate (289,1)
& Disc brake pad wear warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- constant brake pedal pressure.
indicators tem) Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
WARNING
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
Always use the utmost care in wheels which may occur during sudden
driving – overconfidence because braking or braking on slippery road sur-
you are driving with an ABS faces. This helps prevent the loss of
equipped vehicle could easily lead steering control and directional stability
to a serious accident. caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
CAUTION may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
7
. The ABS system does not always when the ABS operates.
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- decrease stopping distance. You
The ABS system will not operate when the
tors on the disc brakes give a warning should always maintain a safe
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
noise when the brake pads are worn. following distance from other
mph (10 km/h).
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard vehicles.
from the disc brakes while braking, im- . When driving on badly surfaced & ABS system self-check
mediately have your vehicle inspected by roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
the nearest SUBARU dealer. over deep newly fallen snow, You may feel a slight shock in the brake
stopping distances may be long- pedal and hear the operating sound of
er for a vehicle with the ABS ABS from the engine compartment just
system than one without. When after the vehicle is started. This is caused
driving under these conditions, by an automatic functional test of the ABS
therefore, reduce your speed and system being carried out and does not
leave ample distance from other indicate any abnormal condition.
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (290,1)
& ABS warning light position and goes out after approximately NOTE
2 seconds. If the warning light behavior is as
This is an indication that the ABS system described in the following, the ABS
is working properly. system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
CAUTION after the engine is started but goes out
immediately, remaining off.
If the warning light behaves as . The warning light remains on after
follows, the ABS system may not the engine has been started, but it goes
be working properly. out when the vehicle speed reaches
When the warning light is on, the approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
ABS function shuts down; however, . The warning light illuminates during
the conventional brake system con- driving, but it goes out immediately and
tinues to operate normally. remains off.
Vehicle with SI-DRIVE . The warning light does not illu- When driving with an insufficient battery
minates when the ignition switch voltage such as when the engine is jump
is turned to the “ON” position. started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
. The warning light illuminates nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
when the ignition switch is and does not indicate a malfunction.
turned to the “ON” position, but When the battery becomes fully charged,
it does not go out even when the the light will go out.
vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light illuminates dur-
ing driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system
repaired at the first available oppor-
tunity by your SUBARU dealer.
The ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

Black plate (291,1)
Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system the system stops working and the brake
fails system warning light and ABS warning
tribution (EBD) system light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system maximizes the effective- The EBD system may be faulty if the
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brake system warning light and ABS
brakes to supply a greater proportion of warning light illuminate simultaneously
the braking force. It functions by adjusting during driving.
the distribution of braking force to the rear Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s tional braking system will still function.
loading condition and speed. However, the rear wheels will be more
The EBD system is an integral part of the prone to locking when the brakes are
ABS system and uses some of the ABS applied harder than usual and the vehi-
system’s components to perform its func- cle’s motion may therefore become some-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
what harder to control. 7
If the brake system warning light and ABS
used by the EBD function fails, the EBD Vehicle with SI-DRIVE warning light illuminate simultaneously,
system also stops working. take the following steps:
When the EBD system is operating, you 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight flat place.
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal 2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.
and does not indicate a malfunction. 3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights go out, the EBD system
may be faulty.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (292,1)
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be
faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest maintained at all times and under
SUBARU dealer and have the system
system (if equipped)
all conditions, its activation
inspected. should be seen as a sign that
6. If the brake fluid level is below the WARNING the speed of the vehicle should
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. be reduced considerably.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. driving – overconfidence because nents, steering components, or
you are driving with a Vehicle Dy- an axle are removed from a
namics Control system equipped vehicle equipped with Vehicle
WARNING vehicle could easily lead to a ser- Dynamics Control, have an
. Driving with the brake system ious accident. authorized SUBARU dealer per-
warning light on is dangerous. form an inspection of that sys-
This indicates your brake system tem.
CAUTION
may not be working properly. If . The following precautions should
the light remains on, have the . Even if your vehicle is equipped be observed in order to ensure
brakes inspected by a SUBARU with Vehicle Dynamics Control, that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
dealer immediately. winter tires or snow chains trol system is operating properly:
. If at all in doubt about whether should be used when driving on – All four wheels should be
the brakes are operating prop- snow-covered or icy roads; in fitted with tires of the same
erly, do not drive the vehicle. addition, vehicle speed should size, type, and brand. Further-
Have your vehicle towed to the be reduced considerably. Simply more, the amount of wear
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- having a Vehicle Dynamics Con- should be the same for all
pair. trol system does not guarantee four tires.
that the vehicle will be able to
– Keep the tire pressure at the
avoid accidents in any situation.
proper level as shown on the
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- vehicle placard attached to
namics Control system is an the driver’s side door pillar.
indication that the road being
– Use only the specified tem-
travelled on has a slippery sur-
porary spare tire to replace a
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
flat tire. With a temporary
namics Control is no guarantee

Black plate (293,1)
spare tire, the effectiveness of NOTE trailer

the Vehicle Dynamics Control . Slight twitching of the brake pedal – when the vehicle is fitted with
system is reduced and this may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics snow tires or winter tires
should be taken into account Control system operates; a small de- . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
when driving the vehicle in gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- Control system will cause operation of
such a condition. ing may also be noticed in this situa- the steering wheel to feel slightly
tion. These are normal characteristics different compared to that for normal
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation conditions.
on a slippery road surface and/or during and are no cause for alarm. . Even if the vehicle is equipped with
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, . When driving off immediately after a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system starting the engine, a short-lived opera- is important that winter tires be used
adjusts the engine’s output and the tion noise may be noticed coming from when driving on snow-covered or icy
wheels’ respective braking forces to help the engine compartment. This noise is roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
maintain traction and directional control. generated as a result of a check being with tires of the same size and brand.)
. Traction Control Function performed on the Vehicle Dynamics Furthermore, if snow chains are to be 7
The traction control function is designed to Control system and is normal. used, they should be fitted on the front
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on . Depending on the timing of activa- wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may snow chains, however, the effective-
maintain traction and directional control. seem to jolt when you drive off after ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Activation of this function is shown by starting the engine. This is a conse- system is reduced and this should be
steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy- quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- taken into account when driving the
namics Control operation indicator light. trol operational check and is normal. vehicle in such a condition.
. In the circumstances shown in the . It is always important to reduce
. Skid Suppression Function following list, the vehicle may be more speed when approaching a corner,
The skid suppression function is designed unstable than it feels to the driver. The even if the vehicle is equipped with
to help maintain directional stability by Vehicle Dynamics Control System may Vehicle Dynamics Control.
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide therefore operate. Such operation does . All four wheels should be fitted with
sideways during steering operations. Acti- not indicate a system fault. tires of the same size, type, and brand;
vation of this function is shown by flashing – on gravel-covered or rutted furthermore, the amount of wear
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation roads should be the same for all four tires. If
indicator light. – on unfinished roads these precautions are not observed
– when the vehicle is towing a and non-matching tires are used, it is
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (294,1)
quite possible that the Vehicle Dy- switch has been turned to the ON position.
namics Control system will be unable ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
to operate correctly as intended. light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
. Always turn off the engine before indicator light
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
The indicator light turns on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position;
it turns off approximately 2 seconds later.
This indicator light flashes during activa- Vehicle with SI-DRIVE
tion of the skid suppression function and is
illuminated steadily during activation of the
traction control function.
The following two situations could indicate
a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system; if either should occur,
have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
out an inspection of that system at the first
Vehicle with SI-DRIVE available opportunity.
. The indicator light does not turn on
ON position.
. The indicator light does not turn off
approximately 2 seconds after the ignition Vehicle without SI-DRIVE

Black plate (295,1)
This single light has the function of . The warning light will also turn on when has been started, the warning light
indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle quickly turns off and stays off.
Dynamics Control system and the function Dynamics Control electronic control sys- . The warning light turns on when the
of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics tems. vehicle is being driven; it then turns off
Control system is not operating. It illumi- and stays off.
nates in the event of a malfunction in the Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system and is illuminated whenever the system controls each brake through the ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
system is not operating. ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating dicator light
due to a malfunction in that electrical This light illuminates to indicate that the
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in
The warning light illuminates when the also become unable to control all four non-operation mode. This does not con-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics
position and goes off several seconds system operation halts and the warning Control system.
after engine startup. This lighting pattern light turns on. Although both the Vehicle
indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Dynamics Control system and the ABS
will be inoperable in this situation, it will
NOTE 7
trol system is operating normally. . The indicator light may stay on for a
still be possible to stop the vehicle using while after the engine has been started,
The following situations could indicate a normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics especially in cold weather. This occurs
Control system and the ABS do not because the engine has not yet
Control system; if any should occur, have adversely affect operation of the vehicle
an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out warmed up and is completely normal.
in any way when they are inoperable; The light will turn off when the engine
an inspection of the system at the first however should such a situation occur,
available opportunity. has reached a suitable operating tem-
drive with care and have an authorized perature.
. The warning light does not turn on SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of . When an engine problem occurs
when the ignition switch is turned to the those systems at the first available oppor- and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
ON position. tunity. malfunction indicator lamp turns on,
. The warning light turns on while the the indicator light will also illuminate.
vehicle is being driven. NOTE
The following two situations could indicate
. When a malfunction has occurred in When the warning light turns on and off
in the following way, it indicates that malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system Control system; if either should occur,
system, only the warning light will turn on.
is operating normally. have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
In such an event, the ABS will still be
. Although turning on after the engine out an inspection of that system at the first
operating normally.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (296,1)
available opportunity. wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow switch. To make the switch usable
. The indicator light does not turn on again, turn the ignition switch to the
when the ignition switch is turned to the When the switch is pressed during engine “LOCK” position and restart the en-
ON position. operation, the “ ” indicator light in the gine.
combination meter illuminates. The Vehi- . When the switch is pressed to
. The indicator light fails to turn off after cle Dynamics Control system will be
the engine is started, even when several deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
deactivated and the vehicle will behave trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
minutes have passed to allow the engine like a model not equipped with the Vehicle
to heat up sufficiently. formance is comparable with that of a
Dynamics Control system. When the vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
switch is pressed again to reactivate the
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the “ ”
Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch indicator light goes off. system except when absolutely neces-
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system sary.
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
Pressing the switch to deactivate the vates itself the next time the ignition
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
facilitate the following operations: and the engine is restarted.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping . If the switch is held down for 10
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or seconds or longer, the indicator light
otherwise slippery surface goes off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
. extrication of the vehicle when its
ignores any further pressing of the

Black plate (297,1)
Tire pressure monitoring The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting
system (TPMS) (if equipped) by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard
installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard.
is severely low. Refer to the “Tires and wheels”
The tire pressure monitoring system will section in chapter 11. The tire pres-
activate only when the vehicle is driven at sure monitoring system does not
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, function when the vehicle is station-
this system may not react immediately to a ary. After adjusting the tire pres-
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, sures, increase the vehicle speed to
a blow-out caused by running over a at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
sharp object). TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
WARNING are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire 7
If the low tire pressure warning light pressure warning light should turn
illuminates while driving, never off a few minutes later.
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu- If this light still illuminates while
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the driving after adjusting the tire pres-
road to a safe place. Otherwise an sure, a tire may have significant
accident involving serious vehicle damage and a fast leak that causes
damage and serious personal injury the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
could occur. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD When a spare tire is mounted or a
tire pressure shown on the tire wheel rim is replaced without the
placard on the door pillar on the original pressure sensor/transmitter
driver’s side. being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
Even when the vehicle is driven a steadily after blinking for approxi-
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE very short distance, the tires get mately one minute. This indicates
warm and their pressures increase the TPMS is unable to monitor all
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (298,1)
four road wheels. Contact your cluding interference that may cause Parking your vehicle
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible undesired operation.
for tire and sensor replacement and/ Changes or modifications not ex-
or system resetting. pressly approved by the party respon- WARNING
Do not inject any tire liquid or sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip- . Never leave unattended children
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
ment. or pets in the vehicle. They could
as this may cause a malfunction of
accidentally injure themselves or
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
others through inadvertent op-
illuminates steadily after blinking for
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
approximately one minute, promptly
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
ture in a closed vehicle could
the system inspected.
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
CAUTION injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
Do not place metal film or any metal flammable materials such as dry
parts under the driver’s seat. This grass, waste paper or rags, as
may cause poor reception of the they may burn easily if they come
signals from the tire pressure sen- near hot engine or exhaust sys-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor- tem parts.
ing system will not function prop- . Be sure to stop the engine if you
erly. take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
NOTE passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
This device complies with Part 15 of
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
tained in the exhaust gas.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-

Black plate (299,1)
& Parking brake engine is running, the parking brake the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
warning light illuminates. After starting wheels should be turned away from the
CAUTION the vehicle, be sure that the warning light curb.
has gone out before the vehicle is driven.
Never drive while the parking brake Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights”
is set because this will cause un- section in chapter 3.
necessary wear on the brake lin-
ings. Before starting to drive, always & Parking tips
make sure that the parking brake When parking your vehicle, always set the
has been fully released. parking brake firmly and put the shift lever
in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R”
To set the parking brake, press the brake (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual
pedal firmly and hold it down while fully transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park)
pulling up the parking brake lever. position for automatic transmission vehi-
cles. Always set the parking brake firmly 7
when parking your vehicle. Never rely on
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle. When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed. When parking on a hill, always turn the
When the parking brake is set while the steering wheel as described here. When

Black plate (300,1)
Cruise control & To set cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned “OFF” when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you press the main switch button
while turning the ignition switch “ON”, Vehicle without SI-DRIVE
the cruise control function is deacti- The “ ” indicator light on the combi-
vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light 1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but- nation meter will illuminate.
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control ton.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
function, turn the ignition switch back vehicle reaches the desired speed.
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control:
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic Vehicle with SI-DRIVE
3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and

Black plate (301,1)
release it. Then release the accelerator The vehicle will maintain the desired . Shift the selector lever into the “N”
pedal. speed. position (automatic transmission vehicles
only).
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
. Shift the shift lever into neutral position
creased while driving with the cruise
(manual transmission vehicles only).
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- The “ ” indicator light in the combination
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- meter goes off when the cruise control is
leased, the vehicle will return to and canceled.
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways: 7
To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
km/h) or more, push the “RES/ACC”
button to return to the original cruising
speed automatically.
. Push the “CANCEL” button. The “ ” indicator light in the combination
. Depress the brake pedal. meter will automatically illuminate at this
Vehicle without SI-DRIVE time.
At this time, the “ ” indicator light is . Depress the clutch pedal (manual
illuminated in the combination meter. transmission vehicles only).
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (302,1)
& To turn off the cruise control When the difference between the actual ! To decrease the speed (by button)
There are two ways to turn off the cruise vehicle speed and the set speed is less
control: than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
. Push the “CRUISE” main switch button by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly.
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or ! To increase the speed (by accel-
“LOCK” position (but only when the erator pedal)
vehicle is completely stopped). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
& To change the cruising speed speed.
2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.
! To increase the speed (by button) Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it
until the vehicle reaches the desired
NOTE speed. Then, release the button. The
If the difference between the actual vehicle speed at that moment will be
vehicle speed when the button is memorized and treated as the new set
pushed and the speed last time you speed.
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph When the difference between the actual
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the vehicle speed and the set speed is less
cruise control system unit regards this than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
operation as that intended to decrease be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
the vehicle speed. pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.
Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it
until the vehicle reaches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.

Black plate (303,1)
! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light the “ON” position and goes out after
pedal) approximately 3 seconds.
1. Depress the brake pedal to release The light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
cruise control temporarily. main switch is pressed.
2. When the speed decreases to the NOTE
desired speed, press the “SET/COAST” . If you press the “CRUISE” main
button once. Now the desired speed is set switch button while turning the ignition
and the vehicle will keep running at that switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
speed without depressing the accelerator tion is deactivated and the cruise
pedal. control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
Vehicle with SI-DRIVE turn it again to the “ON” position. 7
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)
& Cruise control set indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is
light turned to the “ON” position and goes out
after approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.

The cruise control set indicator light

Black plate (15,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Tire chains ........................................................ 8-13
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-13
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-13
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-3 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-14
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-15
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ................... 8-15
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-5
Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-19
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-20
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-21
All AWD models except OUTBACK ...................... 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-21
OUTBACK........................................................... 8-6 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-21
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-22
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-25
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-26
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-27
8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-11

Black plate (306,1)
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints details.

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
The following suggestions will help to save
km) your fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you
1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to
. Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
. Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine.
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the
emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when
applied to a newly installed or overhauled necessary.
engine or when brake pads or brake . Keep the front and rear wheels in
linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. For the turbo and 3.0 L models, the
indication of the ECO gauge shows a
reference for saving fuel. Refer to “ECO
gauge” in the meter and gauges (vehicle
with SI-DRIVE) section in chapter 3 for

Black plate (307,1)
Driving tips 8-3
Engine exhaust gas (carbon exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter
monoxide) vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive WARNING
WARNING under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the trunk lid (Sedan) or rear
or park the vehicle anywhere
Engine exhaust gas contains near flammable materials (e.g.
gate (Station wagon) closed
carbon monoxide, a colorless grass, paper, rags or leaves),
while driving to prevent exhaust
and odorless gas which is dan- because the catalytic converter
gas from entering the vehicle.
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent NOTE . Keep everyone and flammable
engine exhaust gas from enter- Due to the expansion and contraction materials away from the exhaust
ing the vehicle. of the metals used in the manufacture pipe while the engine is running.
of the exhaust system, you may hear a The exhaust gas is very hot.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except crackling sound coming from the ex- 8
for the brief time needed to drive haust system for a short time after the
the vehicle in or out of it. engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. 2.5 L non-turbo models
. If at any time you suspect that
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (308,1)
8-4 Driving tips
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- Periodic inspections

ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a To keep your vehicle in the best condition
small amount of leaded gasoline will at all times, always have the recom-
damage the catalytic converter. mended maintenance services listed in
. Never start the engine by pushing or the maintenance schedule in the “War-
pulling the vehicle. ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
. Avoid racing the engine. formed at the specified time or mileage
. Never turn off the ignition switch while intervals.
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
2.5 L turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
3.0 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

Black plate (309,1)
Driving tips 8-5
Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD vehicles power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
When planning to use your vehicle in slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
another country: WARNING when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
. Confirm the availability of the correct By shifting power between the front and
. Always maintain a safe driving rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
fuel. Refer to the “Fuel requirements”
speed according to the road and provide added traction during accelera-
section in chapter 7.
weather conditions in order to tion, and added engine braking force
. Comply with all regulations and re- avoid having an accident on a during deceleration.
quirements of each country. sharp turn, during sudden brak- Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
ing or under other similar condi- may handle differently than an ordinary
tions. two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
. Always use the utmost care in some features unique to AWD. For safety
driving – overconfidence be- purposes as well as to avoid damaging
cause you are driving an All- the AWD system, you should keep the
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily following tips in mind:
lead to a serious accident. . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb 8
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
use only the same size, circumference,
construction, brand, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard.
Using other sizes, circumferences or
construction may result in severe mechan-
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine ical damage to the drive train of your
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (310,1)
8-6 Driving tips
vehicle and may affect ride, handling, Off road driving damage not eligible for repair under
braking, speedometer/odometer calibra- warranty. If you do take your SUBARU
tion, and clearance between the body off road, you should review the common
and tires. It also may be dangerous and WARNING sense precautions in the next section
lead to loss of vehicle control. (applicable to the OUTBACK) for general
. If you use a temporary spare tire to . Always maintain a safe driving guidance. But please keep in mind that
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the speed according to the road and your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are
original temporary spare tire stored in the weather conditions in order to more limited than those of the OUTBACK.
vehicle. Using other sizes may result in avoid having an accident on a Never attempt to drive through pools and
severe mechanical damage to the drive sharp turn, during sudden brak- puddles, or roads flooded with water.
train of your vehicle. ing or under other similar condi- Water entering the engine air intake or
. Always check the cold tire pressure tions. the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
before starting to drive. The recom- . Always use the utmost care in electrical parts may damage your vehicle
mended tire pressure is provided on the driving – overconfidence be- and may cause it to stall.
tire placard, which is located under the cause you are driving an All-
door latch on the driver’s side. Wheel Drive vehicle could easily & OUTBACK
. Tire chains should always be placed on lead to a serious accident. Because of the AWD feature and higher
the front wheels only. ground clearance, your SUBARU can be
. There are some precautions that you driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But
must observe when towing your vehicle.
& All AWD models except please keep in mind that an AWD
For detail information, refer to the “Towing” OUTBACK SUBARU is a passenger car and is
section in chapter 9. Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- neither a conventional off-road vehicle
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed your SUBARU off-road, certain common
primarily for on-road use. The AWD sense precautions such as those in the
feature gives it some limited off-road following list should be taken:
capabilities in situations in which driving . Make certain that you and all of your
surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free passengers are wearing seatbelts.
and otherwise similar to on-road driving . Carry some emergency equipment,
conditions. Operating it under other than such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
those conditions could subject the vehicle wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
to excessive stress which might result in citizens band radio.

Black plate (311,1)
Driving tips 8-7
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or attempt to drive through rushing water; the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
over rough terrain. regardless of its depth, it can wash away center of gravity and make it more prone
. Slow down and employ extra caution at the ground from under your tires, resulting to tip over.
all times. When driving off-road, you will in possible loss of traction and even . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
not have the benefit of marked traffic vehicle rollover. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and . Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the selector lever
the like. tiveness immediately after driving in sand, back and forth between “D” and “R”
. Do not drive across steep slopes. mud or water. Do this by driving slowly repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
Instead, drive either straight up or straight and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat the best possible traction, avoid spinning
down the slopes. A vehicle can much that process several times to dry out the the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
more easily tip over sideways than it can brake discs and brake pads. . When the road surface is extremely
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or . Do not drive or park over or near slippery, you can obtain better traction by
down slopes that are too steep. flammable materials such as dry grass or starting the vehicle with the transmission
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
cially at higher speeds. exhaust system is very hot while the . Never equip your vehicle with tires
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the engine is running and right after engine larger than those specified in this manual. 8
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the stops. This could create a fire hazard. . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive . After driving through tall grass, mud, road driving. Suspension components are
with your fingers and thumbs on the rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
outside of the rim. is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, need to be washed thoroughly.
. If driving through water, such as when sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. Clear off any such matter from under hard-driving conditions such as
depth of the water and the bottom of the the underbody. If the vehicle is used with rough roads or off roads will necessitate
stream bed for firmness and ensure that these materials trapped or adhering to the more frequent replacement of engine oil,
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly underbody, a mechanical breakdown or brake fluid and transmission oil than that
and completely through the stream. The fire could occur. specified in the maintenance schedule
water should be shallow enough that it . Secure all cargo carried inside the described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- vehicle and make certain that it is not nance Booklet”.
riage. Water entering the engine air intake piled higher than the seatbacks. During
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo Remember that damage done to your
onto electrical parts may damage your could be thrown around in the vehicle and SUBARU while operating it off-road and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)
8-8 Driving tips
not using common sense precautions Winter driving squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage. Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
& Operation during cold perature varies according to how much it
weather is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of Washer Fluid Con-
sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper centration Freezing Temperature
cables.
30% 10.48F (−128C)
Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F (−208C)
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to 100% −498F (−458C)
provide enough power for cold winter
starts. In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature.
oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
Keep the door locks from freezing by a different concentration from the one

Black plate (313,1)
Driving tips 8-9
used previously, purge the old fluid from winter driving, stop when and where it is brake system, which could cause poor
the piping between the reservoir tank and safe to do so and check under the fenders braking action. Check for snow or ice
washer nozzles by operating the washer periodically. buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if ! Parking in cold weather and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
the concentration of the fluid remaining in If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
the piping is too low for the outside being careful not to damage the disc
WARNING
temperature, it may freeze and block the brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
nozzles. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust ness.
gases under your vehicle. Keep ! Refueling in cold weather
CAUTION snow clear of the exhaust pipe and To help prevent moisture from forming in
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- from around your vehicle if you park the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
tion appropriately for the outside the vehicle in snow with the engine use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
temperature. If the concentration is running. tank is recommended during cold weather.
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid Use only additives that are specifically
Do not use the parking brake when
may freeze on the windshield and designed for this purpose. When an
obstruct your view, and the fluid parking for long periods in cold weather
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
may freeze in the reservoir tank. since it could freeze in that position.
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the 8
Instead, you should observe the following
fuel level reaches half empty.
tips.
! Before driving your vehicle 1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for If your SUBARU is not going to be used
Before entering the vehicle, remove any manual transmission vehicles, and in “P” for an extended period, it is best to have
snow or ice from your shoes because that for automatic transmission vehicles. the fuel tank filled to capacity.
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to & Driving on snowy and icy
prevent the vehicle from moving.
roads
While warming up the vehicle before When the vehicle is parked in snow or
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, when it snows, raise the wiper blades off WARNING
brake pedal, and all other controls operate the glass to prevent damage to them.
smoothly. Do not use the cruise control on
When the vehicle has been left parked slippery roads such as snowy or icy
Clear away ice and snow that has after use on roads heavily covered with roads. This may cause loss of
accumulated under the fenders to avoid snow, or has been left parked during a vehicle control.
making steering difficult. During severe snowstorm, icing may develop on the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (314,1)
8-10 Driving tips
CAUTION ! Wiper operation when snowing wiper blades (winter blades) during the
Before driving in cold weather, make sure seasons you could have snow and sub-
Avoid prolonged continuous driving the wiper blades are not frozen to the zero temperatures. Blades of this type
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the windshield or rear window. If the wiper give superior wiping performance in
engine’s intake system and may blades are frozen to the windshield or rear snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades
hinder the air flow, which could window, use the defroster with the airflow that are suitable for your vehicle.
result in engine shutdown or even control button/dial in the “ ” position and
breakdown. the temperature control dial set for max-
CAUTION
imum warmth until the wiper blades are During high-speed driving, non-
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid completely thawed out. If your vehicle is freezing type wiper blades may not
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful perform as well as standard wiper
speed driving, and sharp turning when to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To blades. If this happens, reduce the
driving on snowy or icy roads. thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear vehicle speed.
Always maintain ample distance between window defogger.
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking. When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts NOTE
to stick on the surface of the windshield
To supplement the foot brake, use the When the season requiring non-freez-
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
engine brake effectively to control the ing type wiper blades is over, replace
with the airflow control button/dial in “ ”
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear them with standard wiper blades.
and the temperature control dial set for
when necessary.)
maximum warmth. After the windshield
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
gets warmed enough to melt the frozen & Corrosion protection
snow on it, wash it away using the Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section
leading to loss of vehicle control. windshield washer. in chapter 10.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- wiper from working effectively. If snow is
mance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” and a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” sec- the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
tion in chapter 7 for information on braking warning flasher to alert other drivers.
on slippery surfaces.
We recommend use of non-freezing type

Black plate (315,1)
Driving tips 8-11
& Snow tires . Do not use a combination of ! OUTBACK models

radial, belted bias or bias tires
! All models except OUTBACK or since it may cause dangerous WARNING
2.5GT spec.B handling characteristics and lead
to an accident. . When replacing original tires with
WARNING winter (snow) tires, make sure
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season you use only the same size and
. When replacing original tires with tires” which are designed to provide an construction as recommended.
winter (snow) tires, make sure adequate measure of traction, handling Using other sizes or construction
you use only the same size, and braking performance in year-round may affect speedometer/od-
construction and load range as driving. In winter, it may be possible to ometer calibration and clearance
the original tires listed on the tire enhance performance through use of tires between the body and tires. It
placard. Using other sizes and designed specifically for winter driving also may be dangerous and lead
construction may affect speed- conditions. to loss of vehicle control.
ometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and
If you choose to install winter tires on your . You must install four winter tires
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size that are of the same size, circum-
tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
and type. You must install four winter tires ferences, construction, brand, 8
that are of the same size, construction, and load range. Mixing other
trol.
brand and load range and you should sizes, circumferences or con-
. You must install four winter tires never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires structions may result in severe
that are of the same size, circum- since this may result in dangerous hand- mechanical damage to the drive
ferences, construction, brand, ling characteristics. When you choose a train of your vehicle and may
and load range. Mixing other tire, make sure that there is enough affect ride, handling, braking and
sizes, circumferences or con- clearance between the tire and vehicle speedometer/odometer calibra-
structions may result in severe body. tion. It also may be dangerous
mechanical damage to the drive and lead to loss of vehicle con-
train of your vehicle and may Remember to drive with care at all times
trol.
affect ride, handling, braking and regardless of the type of tires on your
speedometer/odometer calibra- vehicle.
tion. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)
8-12 Driving tips
. Do not use a combination of should be aware that some winter tires that are of the same size, con-
radial, belted bias or bias tires with that same size designation may struction, brand, and load range.
since it may cause dangerous actually be too large for the vehicle and Mixing other sizes or construc-
handling characteristics and lead may cause rubbing on sharp turns. tions may result in severe me-
to an accident. Listed below is the winter tire size that chanical damage to the drive
we recommend. train of your vehicle and may
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season affect ride, handling, braking and
tires” which are designed to provide an Recommended winter (snow) tire size speedometer/odometer calibra-
adequate measure of traction, handling Original equipped tires = P225/60 R16: tion. It also may be dangerous
and braking performance in year-round Winter (snow) tires = P225/60 R16 or and lead to loss of vehicle con-
driving. In winter, it may be possible to P215/60 R16 Studless trol.
enhance performance through use of tires Original equipped tires = P225/55 R17: . Do not use a combination of
designed specifically for winter driving Winter (snow) tires = P215/55 R17,
P225/60 R16 or P215/60 R16 Studless
radial, belted bias or bias tires
conditions. since it may cause dangerous
If you choose to install winter tires on your handling characteristics and lead
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size ! 2.5GT spec.B to an accident.
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction, WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with “summer
brand and load range and you should tires” as original equipment, which are
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires . When replacing original tires with inadequate for driving on slippery roads
since this may result in dangerous hand- winter (snow) tires, make sure such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
ling characteristics. When you choose a you use only the same size, Compared with winter and all-season
tire, make sure that there is enough construction and load range as tires, summer tires give significantly less
clearance between the tire and vehicle the original tires listed on the tire grip on snowy and icy road surfaces.
body. placard. Using other sizes and Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly
Remember to drive with care at all times construction may affect speed- recommended when driving with such
regardless of the type of tires on your ometer/odometer calibration and road conditions.
vehicle. clearance between the body and When you choose to install winter tires on
tires. It also may be dangerous your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
Yo u r O U T B A C K c o m e s w i t h and lead to loss of vehicle con- size and type. You must install four winter
P225/60R16 or P225/55R17 “all season trol. tires that are of the same size, construc-
tires” as original equipment. You . You must install four winter tires tion, brand and load range and you should

Black plate (317,1)
Driving tips 8-13
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires Always use the utmost care when driving Loading your vehicle
since this may result in dangerous hand- with tire chains – overconfidence because
ling characteristics. When you choose a you are driving with tire chains could
tire, make sure that there is enough easily lead to a serious accident. WARNING
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body. & Rocking the vehicle Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
Remember to drive with care at all times If you must rock the vehicle to free it from in the cargo area. Doing so may
regardless of the type of tires on your snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- result in serious injury.
vehicle. erator pedal slightly and move the selector
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
& Tire chains repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
CAUTION the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
Tire chains cannot be used on any slippery, you can obtain better traction by
tires for your Legacy and Outback
because of lack of clearance be-
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
8
tween the tires and vehicle body.
Refer to the “Automatic transmission – 4-
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may speed” and “Automatic transmission – 5-
require the use of tire chains, in which speed” section in chapter 7 for information
case put the chains on the front wheels on holding the transmission in 2nd posi-
only. Use only SAE class S type chains tion.
that are of the correct size for your tires so WARNING
as not to damage the vehicle body or
suspension. . Never stack luggage or other
When driving with tire chains, drive at cargo higher than the top of the
speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a seatback because it could tumble
temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, forward and injure passengers in
replace the temporary spare tire with the the event of a sudden stop or
rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, accident. Keep luggage or cargo
and then fit chains on the front tires. low, as close to the floor as
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (318,1)
8-14 Driving tips
possible. . Do not place anything on the rear & Vehicle capacity weight
. When you carry something inside shelf behind the rear seatback
the vehicle, secure it whenever (for Sedan) or the extended lug-
you can to prevent it from being gage cover (for Station wagon).
thrown around inside the vehicle Such items could tumble forward
during sudden stops, sharp turns in the event of a sudden stop or a
or in an accident. collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it CAUTION
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to Do not carry spray cans, containers
prevent them from shooting for- with flammable or corrosive liquids
ward and causing serious injury or any other dangerous items inside
during a sudden stop. the vehicle.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on NOTE
your vehicle can break, or it can For better fuel economy, do not carry
change the way your vehicle unneeded cargo.
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

Black plate (319,1)
Driving tips 8-15
side door pillar. It includes the total weight optional equipment and trailer tongue & Roof rail and crossbar (if
of the driver and all passengers and their load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- equipped)
belongings, any optional equipment such pending on the situation.
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
Vehicle Weight Rating and vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
1) Crossbar kit
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
8
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and CAUTION
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial . For cargo carrying purposes, the
weighing station. roof rail must be used together
with a roof crossbar kit and the
Certification label Do not use replacement tires with a lower appropriate carrying attachment.
The certification label attached to the load range than the originals because they The roof rail must never be used
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross tions. Replacement tires with a higher load damage to the roof or paint or a
Axle Weight Rating). range than the originals do not increase dangerous road hazard due to
the GVWR and GAWR limitations. loss of cargo could result.
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the . When using the roof crossbar kit,
combined total of weight of the vehicle, make sure that the total weight of
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any the crossbars, carrying attach-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)
8-16 Driving tips
ment and cargo does not exceed ! Installing carrying attachments on ! To remove the crossbar
the maximum load limit. Over- the crossbars
loading may cause damage to When installing any carrying attachment
the vehicle and create a safety such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
hazard. carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo tions and make sure that the attachment is
by itself. Cargo can be carried after securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof attachments designed specifically for the
rail and installing the appropriate carrying crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
attachment. When installing the roof designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer’s ment) of not more than 100 lbs (45 kg).
instructions. Before operating the vehicle, make sure
When you carry cargo on the roof using that the cargo is properly secured on the
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attachment.
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®
attachment, never exceed the maximum head screw from the top of each crossbar
load limit explained in the following. You
NOTE
end support.
should also be careful that your vehicle Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the Loosen the lower clamps.
does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross load on the roof, thus affecting the
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the driving characteristics.
“Loading your vehicle” section in this Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
chapter for information on loading cargo cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
into or onto your vehicle. The maximum effects will be increased.
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and
! Removal and installation of the
carrying attachment must not exceed 100
crossbars
lbs (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the
bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly The crossbars can be removed when you
distribute the cargo. Always properly do not use the roof to carry cargo.
secure all cargo.

Black plate (321,1)
Driving tips 8-17
2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails.
! To install the front crossbar

Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 100 LBS Load Label
on left-hand side.
3. The crossbar with the 100 LBS Load 1) 10 in (250 mm)

Label attached onto it is the front crossbar. 4. Install the front crossbar so that the
An arrow is marked on the back of the crossbar end supports are located ap-
front crossbar for correct installation. proximately 10 in (250 mm) rearward from 8
Install the front crossbar so that the arrow the joints between the roof rails and the
faces the front of the vehicle. front roof rail supports.
1) T-25 torx® head screw
1. Make sure that the T-25 torx® head

screw on the back of each crossbar end
support is tightened correctly.
2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof
rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head
screw is removed from the top of each
crossbar end support.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (322,1)
8-18 Driving tips
Rear crossbar:
1) Lower clamp 6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar

2) T-30 torx® head screw on the roof rails, and if available, use a T- 1) Zero gap
5. Tighten the lower clamps onto the 30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten Install the rear cross bar so that the rear
crossbar. Using a torque wrench, loosely the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35 edges of both crossbar end supports are
tighten the T-30 torx® head screws. lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of aligned (zero gap) with the front edges of
torque (or tighten securely with the torx® both rear roof rail supports.
NOTE wrench provided).
It may be necessary to squeeze the Install the rear crossbar in the same
lower clamp and the end support manner as the front crossbar.
together to compress the pads and
gain a better alignment of the pieces CAUTION
while trying to start the screw. Use care Do not carry cargo on the roof when
not to crossthread the screw in the the crossbars are removed. Lug-
insert. gage on the roof will be thrown
forward or backward in sudden
stops or rapid accelerations, result-
ing in a dangerous road hazard.

Black plate (323,1)
Driving tips 8-19

NOTE Trailer hitch (if equipped) traffic safety hazard.
Before each use of the roof crossbar, . Use only the ball mount supplied
make sure the four T-30 crossbar with this hitch. Use the hitch only
clamp screws have been checked, WARNING as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in use with any type of weight
(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in . Never exceed the maximum
distributing hitch.
Step #5 above. weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class
weight could cause an accident
1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer
resulting in serious personal in-
weight and maximum gross tongue weight
juries. Permissible trailer weight
are indicated in the following table.
changes depending on the situa-
tion. Refer to the next section Maximum Maximum
“Trailer towing” for possible re- gross trailer gross tongue
commendations and limitations. weight weight
. Trailer brakes are required when 3.0 L models 3,000 lbs
(1,360 kg)
the towing load exceeds 1,000 200 lbs 8
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer All models 2,700 lbs (90 kg)
has safety chains and that each other than 3.0 (1,224 kg)
L models
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai- When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer
lers without safety chains could towing” later in this section.
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (324,1)
8-20 Driving tips
& Connecting a trailer 5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The
1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch ball must be securely installed on the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball ball mount.
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight-turn situations into
3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin account; however, be careful not to let
securely. them drag on the ground.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

Black plate (325,1)
Driving tips 8-21
watercraft. Trailer towing

WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
& When you do not tow a trailer Your vehicle is designed and intended to
of the vehicle other than the safety . Remove the ball mount from the hitch be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
onto the hitch receiver tube. loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin brakes, tires and suspension and has an
connector of the hitch wire harness to adverse effect on fuel economy.
protect against possible damage. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the and satisfaction depend upon proper use
four-pin connector using the terminal of correct equipment and cautious opera-
grease. tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use 8
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
Hitch harness connector SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black injuries or vehicle damage that result from
four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer towing equipment, or from any
trailer’s wire harness. errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
failure to follow the proper instructions.
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,
stop, and parking lights on the trailer. & Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
NOTE by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
Always disconnect the trailer wire har- tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
ness before launching or retrieving a will be required due to the additional load.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)
8-22 Driving tips
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under . Before towing a trailer, check the

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and Maintenance Booklet”.) and tongue load. Make sure the
Under no circumstances should a trailer load and its distribution in your
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle vehicle and trailer are accepta-
with any new powertrain component (en- ble.
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles ! Total trailer weight
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits

WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
Total trailer weight
. Adequate size trailer brakes are The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
required when the trailer and its its cargo load) must never exceed the
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) maximum weight indicated in the following
total weight. table.

Black plate (327,1)
Driving tips 8-23

3.0 L models ! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg) (GVWR)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
All models other than 3.0 L models

Model Conditions Maximum total trailer
weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill 1,350 lbs (612 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight 8
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8 The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
km) with an outside temperature of never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
1048F (408C) or above. Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door of your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (328,1)
8-24 Driving tips
The total weight applied to each axle ! Tongue load

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Tongue load

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
Certification label than in the front, the load is taken off
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
confirm that the total weight and weight This may cause the rear wheels to
distribution are within safe driving limits, skid, especially during braking or
you should have your vehicle and trailer when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
weighed at a commercial weighing station. ing cornering, resulting in over-
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving. Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
Gross Axle Weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).

Black plate (329,1)
Driving tips 8-25

NOTE & Trailer hitches
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90 WARNING
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight. Never drill the frame or under-body
Even in this case, the maximum value of your vehicle to install a commer-
is 200 lbs (90 kg). cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
F: Front Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
The tongue load can be adjusted by
deterioration of strength of your
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
8
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in CAUTION
1) Jack the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
2) Bathroom scale as possible on both the left and right . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
sides. haust system, brake system, or
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to other systems when installing a
illustration. When weighing the tongue prevent a change in weight distribution hitch or other trailer towing
load, be sure to position the towing while driving. equipment.
coupler at the height at which it would be . Do not use axle-mounted hitches
during actual towing, using a jack as as they can cause damage to the
shown. axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (330,1)
8-26 Driving tips
trailer. Regularly check that the hitch mounting dealer and professional trailer supplier for
bolts and nuts are tight. more information about the trailer’s brake
! OUTBACK wagon
system.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer & Connecting a trailer ! Trailer safety chains
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your ! Trailer brakes
SUBARU dealer. WARNING
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- WARNING Always use safety chains between
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its trailer without safety chains could
sional hitch supplier to assist you in create a traffic safety hazard if the
choosing an appropriate hitch for your cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight. trailer separates from the hitch due
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch to coupling damage or hitch ball
manufacturer’s instructions for installation . Do not directly connect your damage.
and use. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the to the hydraulic brake system in In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed your vehicle. Direct connection ball should break or become discon-
to handle that type of load. would cause the vehicle’s brake nected, the trailer could get loose and
For all types of hitches, regularly check performance to deteriorate and create a traffic safety hazard.
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are could lead to an accident. For safety, always connect the towing
tight. vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
! All vehicles except OUTBACK wa- plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
gon other under the trailer tongue to prevent
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be the trailer from dropping onto the ground
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer equipped with its own brake system. in case the trailer tongue should discon-
hitches. Consult with a professional hitch Electric brakes or surge brakes are nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
supplier to assist you in choosing an recommended, and must be installed slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa-
appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes tions into account; however, be careful not
to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s conform with Federal, state/province and/ to let them drag on the ground.
instructions for installation and use. or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed For more information about the safety
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic chain connection, refer to the instructions
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU for your hitch and trailer.
to handle that type of load.

Black plate (331,1)
Driving tips 8-27

! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi- Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
cle’s electrical system requires modifica- proper inflation pressure should be in
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
increase its capacity and accommodate specifications.
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
operation of the turn signals, the brake road service to repair the flat tire.
lights and parking lights each time you If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
hitch up. vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
! Tires getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
WARNING
& Trailer towing tips
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tem-
check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is used. The tem- CAUTION
provide a good rearward field of view porary spare tire is not designed to 8
without significant blind spots. If significant sustain the towing load. Use of the . Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- temporary spare tire when towing when towing a trailer in hilly
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that can result in failure of the spare tire country on hot days.
conform with Federal, state/province and/ and/or less stability of the vehicle. . When towing a trailer, steering,
or other applicable regulations. stability, stopping distance and
! Trailer lights Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle braking performance will be dif-
are properly inflated. ferent from normal operation. For
CAUTION The recommended cold tire pressure safety’s sake, you should employ
under trailer towing conditions is shown extra caution when towing a
Direct splicing or other improper in chapter 12, “Specifications” and in trailer and you should never
connection of trailer lights may “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at the speed. You should also keep the
damage your vehicle’s electrical end of this manual. Adjust the rear tire following tips in mind:
system and cause a malfunction of pressure to the recommended pressure
your vehicle’s lighting system. when the tires are cold. Normal pressure
should be maintained in the front tires.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (332,1)
8-28 Driving tips
! Before starting out on a trip nificant blind spot. immediately but gradually.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- . Sufficient time should be taken to learn . When passing other vehicles, consid-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination erable distance is required because of the
any problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free added weight and length caused by
trailer. of traffic, practice turning, stopping and attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
backing up.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is ! Driving with a trailer
tipped sharply up at the front and down at . You should allow for considerably more
the rear, check the total trailer weight, stopping distance when towing a trailer.
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then Avoid sudden braking because it may
confirm that the load and its distribution result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
are acceptable. control.
. Check that the tire pressures are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
correct. erations. If your vehicle has a manual
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are transmission, always start out in first gear
connected properly. Confirm that and release the clutch at moderate engine
– the trailer tongue is connected revolution.
properly to the hitch ball. . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and 1) Left turn
– the trailer lights connector is con- rapid lane changes. 2) Right turn
nected properly and trailer’s brake . Slow down before turning. Make a
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s longer than normal turning radius because . Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
brake pedal is pressed, and that the the trailer wheels will be closer than the takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- a tight turn, the trailer could hit your When turning back, grip the bottom of the
ated. vehicle. steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
– the safety chains are connected the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
properly. for a right turn.
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– all cargo in the trailer is secured ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to . If the ABS warning light illuminates
safety in position. weather conditions or the passing of large while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
– the side mirrors provide a good trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly the trailer and have repairs performed
rearward field of view without a sig- grip the steering wheel and slow down immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.

Black plate (333,1)
Driving tips 8-29

! Driving on grades mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
. Before going down a steep hill, slow to stay stationary on an uphill slope
down and shift into lower gear (if neces- instead of using the parking brake or foot
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the brake. That may cause the transmission
engine braking effect and prevent over- fluid to overheat.
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
! Parking on a grade
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the Always block the wheels under both
air conditioner may turn off automatically vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
to protect the engine from overheating. the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
attention to the water temperature gauge
should take the following steps:
pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP
warning light (for AT models) since the 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
engine and transmission are relatively down.
prone to overheating under these condi- 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
tions. If the water temperature gauge
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
8
pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone
or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi- release the regular brakes slowly until the
nates, immediately switch off the air blocks absorb the load.
conditioner and stop the vehicle at the 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine apply the parking brake; slowly release
overheating” section in chapter 9, and the regular brakes.
“Warning and indicator lights” section in 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual
chapter 3. transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis-
sion) and shut off the engine.
NOTE
With AT models, the temperature of
engine coolant is less likely to rise to
the OVERHEAT zone in the “D” posi-
tion than in the manual mode position.
. If your vehicle has an automatic trans-

Black plate (17,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2 If no steam is coming from the engine
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-13
Precautions for AWD vehicles with automatic Towing ................................................................ 9-13
transmission ..................................................... 9-3 Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-14
Flat tires............................................................... 9-4 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Rear gate (Station wagon) – if the rear gate
(if equipped)...................................................... 9-9 cannot be unlocked ........................................ 9-18
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10 Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-18
How to jump start............................................... 9-11 Jack .................................................................. 9-18
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13 Jack handle ....................................................... 9-19
If steam is coming from the engine Other maintenance tools .................................... 9-19
compartment.................................................... 9-13

Black plate (336,1)
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an NOTE Temporary spare tire

emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
The hazard warning flasher should be
mitter being transferred, the low
used in day or night to warn other drivers
tire pressure warning light will
when you have to park your vehicle under
illuminate steadily after blinking
emergency conditions.
for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- able to monitor all four road
vated regardless of the ignition switch wheels. Contact your SUBARU
position. dealer as soon as possible for
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing tire and sensor replacement and/
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it or system resetting.
off by pushing the switch again.

Black plate (337,1)
In case of emergency 9-3
CAUTION deactivate the AWD capability of the

vehicle as follows:
Never use any temporary spare tire 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
other than the original. Using other position.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
signed only for temporary use. 2) Indicator location mark
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire.
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used 2. Pull any one spare fuse out of the
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire spare fuse holder. Spare fuses are at- 9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a tached on the back side of the fuse holder
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare cover in the engine compartment. You
the following precautions. tire in place of the removed rear wheel. may pick up any one fuse in the spare
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). fuse holder.
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, & Precautions for AWD vehi-
a tire chain will not fit properly. cles with automatic trans-
. Do not use two or more temporary mission
spare tires at the same time. Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire (All-Wheel Drive) system. In addition, if
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance your vehicle is an AT model with non-
is reduced. turbo 2.5 L engine, before driving your
vehicle with the temporary spare tire,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (338,1)
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt
place. and this can result in a severe
accident.
& Changing a flat tire
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift a manual transmission vehicle in
3. Put a spare fuse inside the FWD incline or a loose road surface. reverse or an automatic transmission
socket located in the fuse panel and The jack can come out of the vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.
confirm that the “ ” warning light on jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
the combination meter illuminates. The ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
All-Wheel-Drive capability of the vehicle severe accident.
has now been deactivated. . Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
NOTE with the vehicle is designed only
After reinstalling the conventional tire, for changing a tire. Never get
remove the spare fuse from the FWD under the vehicle while support-
socket in order to reactivate All-Wheel ing the vehicle with this jack.
Drive. Make sure to restore the re-
moved spare fuse in the spare fuse
holder located in the engine compart-
ment.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

Black plate (339,1)
Sedan:
Sedan Station wagon

1) Jack handle 1) Jack handle
1. Lift the handle of the floor cover and
2) Spare tire 2) Jack and tool bucket
3) Jack and tool bucket 3) Spare tire
hook the handle onto the trunk edge.
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and jack

handle. 9
The spare tire and jack are stored under
the floor of the trunk or cargo area.
To remove the spare tire and jack,
proceed as follows:
2. Remove the jack handle from the back

of the floor cover.
3. Take out the storage tray.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (340,1)
the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid

open.
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket. 6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock-
wise, then take the spare tire out.
2. Remove the left-hand part of the lid
Station wagon: and take out the jack handle.
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Jack
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack 1. Open the lid and hang the hook
out of the tool bucket. 3. Take out the storage tray.
provided on the under side of the lid on

Black plate (341,1)
4. Take out the jack and tool bucket. 6. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock- 7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
wise, then take spare tire out. nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is
a temporary spare tire, carefully read the
section “Temporary spare tire” in this
chapter and strictly follow the instructions. 9
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Jack 8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
5. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
out of the tool bucket. tire.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (342,1)
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
tire.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean illustration.
screw, and turn the handle until the tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle with a cloth. 89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12 kgf·m).
higher than necessary. 12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the This torque is equivalent to applying

Black plate (343,1)
approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) WARNING

at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never
use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a Never place a tire or tire changing
pipe extension on the wrench because tools in the passenger compartment
you may exceed the specified torque. after changing wheels. In a sudden
Have the wheel nut torque checked at stop or collisions, loose equipment
the nearest automotive service facility. could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped) Vehicle without SI-DRIVE
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
9
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire activate only when the vehicle is driven.
compartment. Also, this system may not react immedi-
Put the spacer and tighten the attaching ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
bolt firmly. example, a blow-out caused running over
Also store the jack and jack handle in their a sharp object).
storage locations.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (344,1)
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the the tire pressure sensors. Jump starting
road to a safe place. Otherwise an If the light illuminates steadily after
accident involving serious vehicle blinking for approximately one min-
damage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU WARNING
could occur. dealer to have the system inspected.
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Check the pressure for all four tires
Do not let it come in contact with
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
vehicle.
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi- If battery fluid gets on you,
nates while driving after adjusting thoroughly flush the exposed
the tire pressure, a tire may have area with water immediately. Get
significant damage and a fast leak medical help if the fluid has
that causes the tire to lose air entered your eyes.
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace If battery fluid is accidentally
it with a spare tire as soon as swallowed, immediately drink a
possible. large amount of milk or water,
When a spare tire is mounted or a and obtain immediate medical
wheel rim is replaced without the help.
original pressure sensor/transmitter Keep everyone including chil-
being transferred, the low tire pres- dren away from the battery.
sure warning light will illuminate . The gas generated by a battery
steadily after blinking for approxi- explodes if a flame or spark is
mately one minute. This indicates brought near it. Do not smoke or
the TPMS is unable to monitor all light a match while jump starting.
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible . Never attempt jump starting if the
for tire and sensor replacement and/ discharged battery is frozen. It
or system resetting. could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, . Whenever working on or around
as this may cause a malfunction of a battery, always wear suitable

Black plate (345,1)
eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start

objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
. Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
. A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure 9
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (346,1)
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive

(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Black plate (347,1)
Engine overheating the engine and contact your authorized Towing

dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
WARNING has dropped, turn off the engine. WARNING
If the temperature gauge stays at the
Never attempt to remove the radia- overheated zone, turn off the engine. Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT
tor cap until the engine has been and MT) with the front wheels raised
shut off and has fully cooled down. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, off the ground while the rear wheels
When the engine is hot, the coolant check the coolant level in the reserve are on the ground, or with the rear
is under pressure. Removing the tank. wheels raised off the ground while
cap while the engine is still hot If the coolant level is below the “MIN” the front wheels are on the ground.
could release a spray of boiling hot mark, add coolant up to the “MAX” mark. This will cause the vehicle to spin
coolant, which could burn you very 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve away due to the operation or dete-
seriously. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. rioration of the center differential.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
If the engine overheats, pull off the road radiator with coolant.
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
9
Turn off the engine and get everyone until it stops. Release the pressure from
away from the vehicle until it cools down. the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
& If no steam is coming from down and turning it.
the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine If towing is necessary, it is best done by
compartment. your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If towing service. Observe the following
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off procedures for safety.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (348,1)
& Towing and tie-down hooks 4. Screw the towing hook into the thread
The towing hooks should be used only in hole until the threads can no longer be
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle seen.
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hook
closest to the muffler under the 2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in a vinyl
vehicle for towing purposes. tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between
. To prevent deformation to the the cover and the front bumper, and use it
bumper and the towing hook, do to lever the cover open. 5. Tighten the towing hook securely
not apply excessive lateral load 3. Pull the entire front fog light cover using a wheel nut wrench.
to the towing hooks. toward you.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.
Front towing hook (OUTBACK models):
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver
and wheel nut wrench from the on board Front towing hook (except OUTBACK
tool bucket. models):
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver
and wheel nut wrench from the on board
tool bag.

Black plate (349,1)
4. Likewise, insert the screwdriver still

wrapped with cloth or vinyl into the cutout
between the towing hook cover and the
bumper. Pry out the cover.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with cloth 6. Tighten the towing hook securely
or vinyl. Then, insert the screwdriver into using a wheel nut wrench.
the gap between the front fog light cover
and the bumper, and pry out the cover. After towing, remove the towing hook from
5. Screw the towing hook into the thread the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.
3. Pull the entire front fog light cover
Fit the fog light cover and towing hook
toward you. hole until the threads can no longer be
seen. cover on the bumper. 9
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (350,1)
Rear towing hook: Front tie-down hooks: The rear tie-down hooks are located near
The rear towing hook is located below the each of the jack-up reinforcements.
center of the rear bumper.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip off
the hooks, possibly causing a dan-
gerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck

The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
CAUTION
Rear tie-down hooks:
Never use the rear towing hook to
tie the vehicle down.
This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”
position for automatic transmission vehi-
cles or “1st” for manual transmission

Black plate (351,1)
vehicles. and power steering do not func- 3. The ignition switch should be in the
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. tion when the engine is not “Acc” position while the vehicle is being
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier running. Because the engine is towed.
properly with safety chains. Each safety turned off, it will take greater 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
chain should be equally tightened and effort to operate the brake pedal prevent damage to the vehicle.
care must be taken not to pull the chains and steering wheel.
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the CAUTION

ground . If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, the traveling speed
9
must be limited to less than 20
mph (30 km/h) and the traveling
distance to less than 31 miles (50
km). For greater speeds and
distances, transport your vehicle
WARNING on a flat-bed truck.
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the 1. Check the transmission and differen-
vehicle is being towed because tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the
the steering wheel and the direc- upper level if necessary.
tion of the wheels will be locked. 2. Release the parking brake and put the
. Remember that the brake booster transmission in neutral.

Black plate (352,1)
Rear gate (Station wagon) – if Maintenance tools

the rear gate cannot be un-
locked & Jack
A jack and other maintenance tools are
In the event that you cannot unlock the stored in the tool bucket in the center of
rear gate by operating the power door the spare tire located in the trunk or in the
locking switches or the remote keyless cargo area.
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the

lever inside the trim downward.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Sedan: To take out the jack and main-

tenance tools, open the floor cover and
1. Remove the access cover at the remove the bucket from the center of the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the
flat-head screwdriver. bucket.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.

Black plate (353,1)
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat

tires”.
& Other maintenance tools

In addition to a jack and a jack handle, the
tool bucket on your vehicle contains the
following maintenance tools.
Station wagon: To take out the jack and Sedan: Open the floor cover and remove
maintenance tools, open the center lid and the jack handle from the back of the floor
remove the bucket from the center of the cover.
spare tire. Then, take the jack out of the
bucket.
& Jack handle 9
The jack handle is stowed on the back of Screwdriver
the floor cover of the trunk or on the back Towing hook
of the center lid of the cargo area. Wheel nut wrench
Station wagon: Open the center lid,

remove the left-hand part of the lid, and
take out the jack handle.

Black plate (19,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 panel, console panel, switches, combination
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5
Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................ 10-6
10

Black plate (356,1)
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care . Since your vehicle is equipped that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
with a rear wiper, automatic car- strong soap or chemical detergents. All
& Washing wash brushes could become cleaning agents should be promptly
tangled around it, damaging the flushed from the surface and not allowed
CAUTION wiper arm and other compo- to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
nents. Ask the automatic car- with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
. When washing the vehicle, the wash operator not to let the remaining water off with a chamois or soft
brakes may get wet. As a result, brushes touch the wiper arm or cloth.
the brake stopping distance will to fix the wiper arm on the rear ! Washing the underbody
be longer. To dry the brakes, window glass with adhesive tape
drive the vehicle at a safe speed before operating the machine. Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
while lightly pressing the brake (Station wagon models only) deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
pedal to heat up the brakes. rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
. Do not wash the engine compart- NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
ment and areas adjacent to it. If cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
water enters the engine air in- When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
take, electrical parts or the power
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
steering fluid reservoir, it will
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
cause engine trouble or faulty
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
power steering respectively.
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or muddy or sandy
the vehicle with hot water and in direct roads, wash the mud and sand off the
sunlight. underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree parts, as they are particularly prone to
sap, and bird droppings should be washed mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
off by using a light detergent, as required. sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
If you use a light detergent, make certain

Black plate (357,1)
Appearance care 10-3

NOTE mended that a coat of wax be applied at & Cleaning aluminum wheels
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, least once a month, or whenever the . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
sensor harnesses, and other parts surface no longer repels water. clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
when washing suspension compo- If the appearance of the paint has dimin- is left on too long, it may be difficult to
nents. ished to the point where the luster or tone clean off.
! Using a warm water washer cannot be restored, lightly polish the . Do not use soap containing grit to
surface with a fine-grained compound. clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
Never polish just the affected area, but cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
or more between the washer nozzle and
include the surrounding area as well. with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
the vehicle.
Always polish in only one direction. A stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
. Do not wash the same area continu- No. 2000 grain compound is recom- washing device.
ously. mended. Never use a coarse-grained . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash compound. Coarser grained compounds num wheels) with water as soon as
by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and possible when it has been splashed with
of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore driven on roads treated with salt or other
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with agents.
water to leak into the vehicle. a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
10
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and list.
apply them according to the manufac- NOTE
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool. Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle.
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

Black plate (358,1)
Corrosion protection though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.

dry.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
Your SUBARU has been designed and 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
built to resist corrosion. Special materials sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
and protective finishes have been used on dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
fine appearance, strength, and reliable because that could cause corrosion.
operation. & To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
& Most common causes of corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
The most common causes of corrosion promptly after driving on any of the garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
are: following surfaces: be caused by dampness. If you wash the
1. The accumulation of moisture retain- . roads that have been salted to prevent vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
cavities, and other areas. . mud, sand, or gravel snow, that can cause dampness.
2. Damage to paint and other protective . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
coatings caused by gravel and stone and/or in areas where road salts and other
chips or minor accidents. After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a corrosive materials are used, the door
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle very thorough washing. hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
when: latch should be inspected and lubricated
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, be given an appropriate rust prevention
especially when temperatures range just treatment or should be replaced. Contact
above freezing. your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
3. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need
vehicle remains for a long time, even

Black plate (359,1)
Appearance care 10-5
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
The leather used by SUBARU is a high ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use leather materials may be used when
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary.
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular NOTE
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water or gasoline must never be used on
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. leather or synthetic interior materials.
cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry & Climate control panel, audio
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If panel, instrument panel,
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long console panel, switches,
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended combination meter, and other
If the stain does not come out, try a
that the seats and headrests be covered, plastic surface
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
or shrinkage. control panel, audio equipment, instru- 10
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches ment panel, center console, combination
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather meter panel, and switches.
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds NOTE
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Do not use organic solvents such as
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar cleaning agents that contain those
materials. & Synthetic leather upholstery solvents.
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (360,1)
& Navigation monitor (if

equipped)
To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it
with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If
the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
NOTE
. Do not spray neutral detergent di-
rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could
damage the monitor’s components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard
cloth. Doing so could scratch the
monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-
tains thinner, gasoline, or any other
volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid
could erase the lettering on the
switches at the bottom of the monitor.

Black plate (21,1)
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Automatic transmission fluid.......................... 11-22

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-22
Before checking or servicing in the engine Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-23
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Front differential gear oil (AT models) ........... 11-24
When you do checking or servicing in the engine Checking the oil level ...................................... 11-24
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-25
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4 Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-25
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6 Checking the gear oil level............................... 11-25
2.5 L non-turbo models ...................................... 11-6 Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-27
2.5 L turbo models ............................................. 11-7 Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-27
3.0 L models ...................................................... 11-8 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-27
Engine oil............................................................ 11-9 Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-28
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-9 Brake fluid........................................................ 11-28
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-10 Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-28
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-12 Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-29
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-29
driving conditions .......................................... 11-13
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-29
Cooling system ................................................ 11-14 Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-30
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-14
Brake booster .................................................. 11-30
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-14
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-31
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-17
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-31 11
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-18
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-31
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-20
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-31
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-20
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-31
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-20 Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-32
2.5 L models .................................................... 11-20
Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-32
3.0 L models .................................................... 11-21
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-32
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-21
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-33
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-21
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-22 Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-33
Types of tires................................................... 11-33

Black plate (22,1)
Maintenance and service
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Fuses ................................................................ 11-47

(if equipped)................................................... 11-34 Main fuse.......................................................... 11-49
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-35
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-49
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-36
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-38
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-50
Headlight......................................................... 11-51
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-38
Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-38 light .............................................................. 11-53
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-39 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-53
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-39 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-53
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-40 Back-up light (Station wagon) .......................... 11-56
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-40 License plate light ........................................... 11-56
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-41 Dome light....................................................... 11-57
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-42 Map light ......................................................... 11-57
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-42 Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-58
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-43 Door step light................................................. 11-58
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-44 Cargo area light (Station wagon) ...................... 11-59
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-45 Trunk light (Sedan) .......................................... 11-59
Battery............................................................... 11-46 High mount stop light (Sedan).......................... 11-59

Black plate (363,1)
Maintenance and service 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions . Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- cle. Remember that some of the
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be materials in the vehicle may be
are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. hazardous if improperly used or
tenance Booklet”. handled, for example, battery
If you perform maintenance and service acid.
For details of your maintenance schedule, by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
read the separate “Warranty and Main- with the information provided in this . Your vehicle should only be ser-
tenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and viced by persons fully competent
service for your SUBARU. to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
Incorrect or incomplete service could enced in servicing vehicles.
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- . Always use the proper tools and
tion. Any problems caused by improper make certain that they are well
maintenance and service performed by maintained.
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
WARNING ported only by a jack. Always use
a safety stands to support the
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle.
vehicle must NEVER be per- . Never keep the engine running in
formed on a single two-wheel a poorly ventilated area, such as
dynamometer or similar appara- a garage or other closed areas.
tus. Attempting to do so will
. Do not smoke or allow open 11
result in transmission damage
flames around the fuel or battery.
and in uncontrolled vehicle
This will cause a fire.
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons . Because the fuel system is under
nearby. pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when
by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your
vehicle. . Wear adequate eye protection to
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (364,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids fluid on hot engine components. Engine hood
in your eyes. If something does This may cause a fire.
get in your eyes, thoroughly . Always remove the key from the To open the hood:
wash them out with clean water. ignition switch. When the ignition 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
. Do not tamper with the wiring of switch is in the “ON” position, windshield, return them to their original
the SRS airbag system or seat- the cooling fan may operate positions.
belt pretensioner system, or at- suddenly even when the engine
tempt to take its connectors is stopped.
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit & When you do checking or
tester for these wiring. If your servicing in the engine com-
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- partment while the engine is
sioner needs service, consult running
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
& Before checking or servicing A running engine can be dangerous.
in the engine compartment Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
WARNING fan, belts and any other moving instrument panel.
engine parts. Removing rings,
. Always stop the engine and set watches and ties is advisable.
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other

Black plate (365,1)
To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. In the case of OUTBACK models,
lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
In the case of the models except OUT-
BACK, lower the hood to a height of
approximately 12 in (30 cm) above its
closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
3. Release the secondary hood release hood is securely locked.
located under the front grille by moving the
lever toward the left. If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
11
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Black plate (366,1)
1) Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine compartment overview (page 11-27)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
& 2.5 L non-turbo models (page 11-21) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-24)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-22)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-28)
7) Battery (page 11-46)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-41)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
11) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)
13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)

Black plate (367,1)
& 2.5 L turbo models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-27)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-21) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-24)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-29)
(page 11-22)
11
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (368,1)
& 3.0 L models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-27)
2) Differential gear oil level gauge (AT)
(page 11-24)
(page 11-22)

Black plate (369,1)
Engine oil & Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
NOTE
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
. The engine oil consumption rate is
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
determined until the vehicle has tra-
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
veled at least several thousand miles
pan before checking the level.
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un- 2.5 L models
der normal driving conditions. If you 1) Notch
drive your vehicle under these severe 2) Upper level
conditions, you should check the oil 3) Lower level
level at least at every second fuel fill-up
time, and change the oil more fre-
quently. Please refer to the Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet for more de-
tails.
. If the oil consumption rate seems 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
abnormally high after the break-in and insert it again. 11
period, for example more than 1 quart 3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000 inserted until it stops with the graphic
kilometers, we recommend that you symbol “ ” on its top appearing as
contact your SUBARU dealer. shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (370,1)
. Be careful not to spill engine oil & Changing the oil and oil filter
when adding it. If oil touches the Change the oil and oil filter according to
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad the maintenance schedule in the “War-
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
engine oil gets on the exhaust
The engine oil and oil filter must be
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
NOTE on dusty roads, when short trips are
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, frequently made, or when driving in
do not add any additional oil above the extremely cold weather.
upper level when the engine is cold. 1. Warm up the engine by letting the
. In 2.5 L engine models, the level engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
3.0 L models gauge has a notch above the upper to ease draining the engine oil.
1) Upper level level. Just after driving or while the 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
2) Lower level engine is warm, the engine oil level stop the engine.
reading may be in a range between the 3. Remove the oil filler cap.
4. Pull out the level gauge again and
upper level and the notch mark. This is
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
caused by thermal expansion of the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
engine oil.
the upper level.
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
2.5 L models

Black plate (371,1)
3.0 L models 2.5 L models 2.5 L models

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil. 11
5. Wipe the seating surface and around
the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing 3.0 L models 3.0 L models
washer after the oil has completely
6. Open the access cover by removing 7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
drained out.
the clips and turning the access cover wrench.
counterclockwise. The oil filter will be 8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a
exposed. thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (372,1)
9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of CAUTION seal and drain plug.
the bottom of engine and install the oil 14. Keep the engine idling until the engine
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to . Never over tighten the oil filter reaches the normal operating temperature
twist or damage the seal. because that can result in an oil range, as indicated by the temperature
10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount leak. gauge on the combination meter. After
indicated in the following table after the . Thoroughly wipe off any engine that, check the engine oil level again. For
seal makes contact with the bottom of oil that has spilled over the further details about the check procedure,
engine. exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. refer to “Checking the oil level” in this
If left unremoved, the oil could section.
Model Oil filter Part Amount of
color number rotation catch fire.
& Recommended grade and
Black 15208AA100 1 rotation viscosity
2.5 L 11. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
models Blue 15208AA12A 7/8 12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
rotation CAUTION
3.0 L 3/4 Oil capacity (guideline):
Black 15208AA031 rotation
models
2.5 L models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp
Use only engine oil with the recom-
qt) mended grade and viscosity.
3.0 L models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp
qt)
Oil grade:
– ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified
The oil quantity indicated above is only a with the ILSAC certification mark (Star-
guideline. The necessary quantity of oil burst mark)
depends on the quantity of oil that has – or API classification SM with the words
been drained. The quantity of drained oil “ENERGY CONSERVING”
differs slightly depending on the tempera-
ture of the oil and the time the oil is left These recommended oil grades can be
flowing out. After refilling the engine with identified by looking for either or both of
oil, therefore, you must use the level the following marks displayed on the oil
gauge to confirm that the level is correct. container.
13. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

Black plate (373,1)
In choosing an oil, you want the proper & Recommended grade and
quality and viscosity, as well as one that viscosity under severe driv-
will add to fuel economy. The following ing conditions
table lists the recommended viscosities
and applicable temperatures. If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or
When adding oil, different brands may be
used for heavy-duty applications such as
used together as long as they are the
towing a trailer, use of oil with the following
same API classification and SAE viscosity
grade and viscosities is recommended.
as those recommended by SUBARU.
API classification SM:
SAE viscosity No.:
30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)
SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature 11
*: 5W-30 is preferred.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel
economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide
API Service label better fuel economy. However, in hot
1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa- weather, oil of higher viscosity is required
tions
to properly lubricate the engine.
2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving
capabilities

Black plate (374,1)
Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing & Engine coolant

coolant.
! Checking the coolant level
. Do not splash the engine coolant
WARNING over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia-
may damage the paint surface.
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
serious burns from a spray of boil- nections
ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
CAUTION If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera- Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
. Vehicles are filled at the factory ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
with SUBARU Super Coolant that range, the cooling fan circuit may be 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
does not require the first change defective. Check the fuse and replace it of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
years/220,000 km). This coolant the cooling system checked by your “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
should not be mixed with any SUBARU dealer. “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
other brand or type of coolant empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
during this period. Mixing with a If frequent addition of coolant is neces- as required.
different coolant will reduce the sary, there may be a leak in the engine
life of the coolant. Should it be cooling system. It is recommended that
necessary to top off the coolant the cooling system and connections be
for any reason, use only checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is

Black plate (375,1)

! Changing the coolant 1. Remove the under cover.
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
Always add genuine SUBARU cooling

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the system conditioner whenever the coolant
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that 2.5 L models
is replaced.
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap 1) Drain plug
Change the engine coolant and add
are in the proper position. genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner using the following procedures
CAUTION according to the maintenance schedule
. Be careful not to spill engine in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
coolant when adding it. If coolant let”.
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
11
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant 3.0 L models
may damage the paint surface. 1) Drain plug
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (376,1)
2. Place a proper container under the room to add genuine SUBARU cooling
drain plug and loosen the drain plug. system conditioner in the radiator. Add
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
coolant from the radiator. Then drain the tioner until the coolant level reaches the
coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too
drain plug securely. quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air
bleeding and trapped air in the system.
NOTE (turbo model only)
The cap (without tabs) on top of the Coolant capacity (guideline):
radiator does not need to be removed. 2.5 L non-turbo models:
To add coolant, remove the cap (with MT. 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the AT. 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
engine. 2.5 L turbo models:
Non-turbo models
4. Install the under cover. 1) Fill up to here MT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
AT. 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
3.0 L models:
7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
Turbo models
it off.
1) Fill up to here . Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to contained in the engine coolant
just below the filler neck, allowing enough

Black plate (377,1)
may damage the paint surface. the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is Air cleaner element
correctly in place.
8. Start and race the engine at 2,000 to
3,000 rpm for 5 to 6 times within 40 WARNING
seconds.
9. Stop the engine and wait until the Do not operate the engine with the
coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to air cleaner element removed. The air
608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add cleaner element not only filters
coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to intake air but also stops flames if
the reserve tank’s “FULL” level. the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap when the engine backfires, you
back on and tighten firmly. could be burned.
CAUTION
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-
voir tank’s “FULL” level mark. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a

filter screen. When the element is perfo- 11
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-
ment.
7. Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (378,1)
& Replacing the air cleaner 3. Undo the screw and pull the air duct
element out of the air cleaner case.
Replace the air cleaner element according 4. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air
to the maintenance schedule in the cleaner case cover.
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! Non-turbo models
7. To install the air cleaner case cover,

insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case and then snap the two
5. Open the air cleaner case cover and clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
remove the air cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1) Connector
2) Duct
3) Clamp
1. Unplug the connector that is attached

to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Remove the hose that is located at the
bottom of the side surface of the air
cleaner case.

Black plate (379,1)
! Turbo models to the top of the air cleaner case. remove the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
cover and case with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
6. Snap the two clamps on the air cleaner
case cover.
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on 3. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air
the air intake duct, then remove the air cleaner case cover.
intake duct. At the same time, pull the hose from the
clamp that runs next to the case cover.
11
2. Unplug the connector that is attached

4. Open the air cleaner case cover and

Black plate (380,1)
Spark plugs & Recommended spark plugs Drive belts

2.5 L non-turbo models: The power steering oil pump, alternator
CAUTION FR5AP-11 (NGK) and air conditioner compressor depend on
drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-
. When disconnecting the spark 2.5 L turbo models:
quires that belt tension be correct.
plug cables, always grasp the SILFR6A (NGK)
spark plug cap, not the cables. 3.0 L models: & 2.5 L models
. Make sure the cables are re- ILFR6B (NGK)
placed in the correct order.
1) Power steering oil pump pulley

2) Alternator pulley
3) Air conditioner compressor pulley
It may be difficult to replace the spark 4) Crank pulley
plugs. It is recommended that you have A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
the spark plugs replaced by your B) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.

Black plate (381,1)

in (mm)
Deflection Manual transmission oil
New belt Used belt
& Checking the oil level
0.28 – 0.35 0.35 – 0.43
A (7.0 – 9.0) (9.0 – 11.0)
0.30 – 0.33 0.35 – 0.40
B (7.5 – 8.5) (9.0 – 10.0)
To check the belt tension, place a straight-

edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys
and apply a force of 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
midway between the pulleys by using a
spring scale. Belt deflection should be the
amount specified. If a belt is loose, 5-speed transmission (turbo models)
cracked or worn, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& 3.0 L models 5-speed transmission (non-turbo models)

1) Yellow handle
It is unnecessary to check the belt tension
periodically because your engine is
equipped with an automatic belt tension
adjuster. However, replacement of the belt
should be done according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and 11
Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If a belt is loose, cracked or worn, contact
your SUBARU dealer. 6-speed transmission
Check the oil level monthly.
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (382,1)
and insert it again. & Recommended grade and Automatic transmission fluid
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base & Checking the fluid level
oils and additives. Never use different The automatic transmission fluid expands
brands together. largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Oil grade: Therefore, there are two different scales
API classification GL-5 for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
1) Upper level temperature.
2) Lower level
! Checking the fluid level when the
3. Pull out the level gauge again and fluid is hot
check the oil level on it. If it is below the Check the fluid level monthly.
lower level, add oil through the level 1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
gauge hole to bring the level up to the the temperature of the transmission fluid
upper level. up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
CAUTION SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera- 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
ture set the parking brake.
Be careful not to spill manual trans- 3. First shift the selector lever in each
mission oil when adding it. If oil position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
touches the exhaust pipe, it may and run the engine at idling speed.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.

Black plate (383,1)
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
& Recommended fluid

4-speed automatic transmission 1) HOT range
1) Yellow handle 2) COLD range Use one of the following types of auto-
3) Upper level matic transmission fluid.
4) Lower level – SUBARU ATF Type-HP
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the – IDEMITSU ATF HP
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the NOTE
recommended automatic transmission . For 5-speed automatic transmis-
fluid up to the upper level. sion:
! Checking the fluid level when the
Using any non-specified type of auto-
matic transmission fluid could result in
11
fluid is cold
damage inside the transmission. When
When the fluid level has to be checked replacing the automatic transmission
without time to warm up the automatic fluid, be sure to use the specified type
transmission, check to see that the fluid above.
5-speed automatic transmission
1) Yellow handle
level is between the lower level and upper . For 4-speed automatic transmis-
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below sion:
that range, add fluid up to the upper level. For optimum transmission perfor-
Be careful not to overfill.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (384,1)
mance, only use the automatic trans- Front differential gear oil
mission fluid that is recommended and
provided by SUBARU.
(AT models)
If the recommended automatic trans- & Checking the oil level
mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III
may be temporarily used. If the Dexron
III is used continuously there will be a
noticeable increase in the vibration and
noise from the automatic transmission.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and

check the oil level on it. If it is below the
1) Yellow handle lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
CAUTION
and insert it again. Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.

Black plate (385,1)
& Recommended grade and Rear differential gear oil

viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base & Checking the gear oil level
oils and additives. Never use different Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear
brands together. differential protector. The differential pro-
tector provides protection to the rear
Oil grade: differential assembly during off-road use.
API classification GL-5 Removal of the rear differential protector is
not required when checking the oil level.
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-

ture
11
2.5 L non-turbo models (AT) (without
Vehicle Dynamics Control system)
1) Filler plug
2) Drain plug
3) Oil level
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (386,1)
2.5 L turbo and 3.0 L models (AT) 2.5 L turbo 6MT models Others
1) Filler plug 1) Filler plug 1) Filler plug
2) Drain plug 2) Drain plug 2) Drain plug
3) Oil level 3) Oil level 3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and
check the oil level. The oil level should be
kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

Black plate (387,1)
If the oil level is below the bottom edge of Power steering fluid
the hole, add oil through the filler hole to
raise the level. & Checking the fluid level
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill rear differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If
rear differential gear oil touches
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
it off. SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-
. If the vehicle requires frequent ture
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer. WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base CAUTION 11
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. . When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
Oil grade: and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
API classification GL-5
different brands together.
. Avoid spilling fluid when adding
it in the tank.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (388,1)
. Be careful not to spill power mended fluid as necessary to bring the Brake fluid
steering fluid when adding it. If level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
power steering fluid touches the If the fluid level is extreme low, it may & Checking the fluid level
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad indicate possible leakage. Consult your
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If SUBARU dealer for inspection. WARNING
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it & Recommended fluid . Never let brake fluid contact your
off. eyes because brake fluid can be
Use one of the following types of auto- harmful to your eyes. If brake
The power steering fluid expands greatly matic transmission fluid. fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
as its temperature rises; the fluid level ately flush them thoroughly with
– SUBARU ATF Type-HP
differs according to fluid temperature. clean water. For safety, when
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two – IDEMITSU ATF HP performing this work, wearing
different checking ranges for hot and cold eye protection is advisable.
fluids. . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
Check the power steering fluid level from the air. Any absorbed moist-
monthly. ure can cause a dangerous loss
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, of braking performance.
and stop the engine. . If the vehicle requires frequent
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir refilling, there may be a leak. If
tank. you suspect a problem, have the
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has vehicle checked at your SUBARU
been run: Check that the oil level is dealer.
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
CAUTION
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between . Never use different brands of
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the brake fluid together. Also, avoid
surface of the reservoir tank. mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake
3. If the fluid level is lower than the fluids even if they are of the same
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom- brand.

Black plate (389,1)
. When adding brake fluid, be care- Use only brake fluid from a sealed Clutch fluid (MT models)
ful not to allow any dirt into the container.
reservoir. & Checking the fluid level
. Never splash the brake fluid over & Recommended brake fluid
painted surfaces or rubber parts. WARNING
Alcohol contained in the brake FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake
fluid may damage them. fluid Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
CAUTION gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
Never use different brands of brake For safety, when performing this
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing work, wearing eye protection is
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if advisable.
off.
they are of the same brand.
Check the fluid level monthly. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If 11
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the . When clutch fluid is added, be
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add careful not to allow any dirt into
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. the tank.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (390,1)
. Never splash the clutch fluid over & Recommended clutch fluid Brake booster
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake If the brake booster does not operate as
fluid may damage them. fluid described in the following procedure, have
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
when adding it. If clutch fluid 1. With the engine off, depress the brake
touches the exhaust pipe, it may CAUTION pedal several times, applying the same
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or pedal force each time. The distance the
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 pedal travels should not vary.
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it brake fluids even if they are of the 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
off. same brand. the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid
to “MAX” level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.

Black plate (391,1)
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
not operate smoothly, contact with your 11
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (392,1)
& Checking the clutch pedal Replacement of brake pad you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
free play pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
and lining soon as possible.
CAUTION & Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings
If you continue to drive despite the When replacing the brake pad or lining,
scraping noise from the audible use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
brake pad wear indicator, it will replacement, the new parts must be
result in the need for costly brake broken in as follows:
rotor repair or replacement.
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) times.
! Parking brake lining
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play. WARNING
If the free play is not within proper A safe location and situation should
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- be selected for break-in driving.
er.
CAUTION
The right front disc brake and the right rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators Pulling the parking brake lever too
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear forcefully may cause the rear
close to their service limit, the wear wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
indicator makes a very audible scraping certain to pull the lever up slowly
noise when the brake pedal is applied. and gently.
If you hear this scraping noise each time

Black plate (393,1)
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of Parking brake stroke Tires and wheels
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button & Types of tires
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever You should be familiar with type of tires
SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a present on your vehicle.
force of approximately 33 lbf [147 N, 15
kgf].) ! All season tires
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately The factory-installed tires on your new
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. vehicle except 2.5GT spec.B are all
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking season tires.
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- All season tires are designed to provide
dure. an adequate measure of traction, handling
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the and braking performance in year-round
parking brake stroke is out of the specified driving including snowy and icy road
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut conditions. However all season tires do
located on the parking brake lever. Check the parking brake stroke according not offer as much traction performance as
to the maintenance schedule in the winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. or on icy roads.
Parking brake stroke: When the parking brake is properly All season tires are identified by “ALL
5 – 6 notches / 44 lbf (196 N, 20 kgf) adjusted, braking power is fully applied SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
by pulling the lever up five to six notches the tire sidewall.
gently but firmly (approximately 44 lbf, 196
! Summer tires
N, 20 kgf). If the parking brake lever stroke
is not within the specified range, have the The factory-installed tires on your new 11
brake system checked and adjusted at 2.5GT spec.B vehicle are summer tires.
your SUBARU dealer. Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (394,1)
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
use of winter (snow) tires. extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
When installing winter tires, be sure to every difference of 108F (5.68C) between Adjusted pressure
Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
replace all four tires. the temperature in the garage and the temperature
temperature outside. By way of example, front rear
! Winter (snow) tires
the following table shows the required tire 308F (−18C) 38 (265, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)
Winter tires are best suited for driving on pressures that correspond to various out-
snow-covered and icy roads. However 40 38
side temperatures when the temperature 108F (−128C) (280, 2.8) (265, 2.65)
winter tires do not perform as well as in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
summer tires and all season tires on roads −108F
Example: (−238C) 42 (295, 2.95) 40 (280, 2.8)
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
Tire size: P225/55R17 95V, P225/60R16
97H Example:
& Tire pressure monitoring
Standard tire pressures: Tire size: 215/45R18 89Y, P215/45R18
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 89W, P205/50R17 88V
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) Standard tire pressures:
vides the driver with a warning message Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
installed in each wheel when tire pressure Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Adjusted pressure Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the temperature
front rear Adjusted pressure
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 35 (240, 2.4) 33 (230, 2.3) temperature
front rear
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out 37 35
108F (−128C) (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
caused by running over a sharp object). 308F (−18C)
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F 39 (270, 2.7) 37 (255, 2.55)
38 37
(−238C) 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire −108F
Example: (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
pressures may cause the low tire pressure Tire size: 215/45R17 91W
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this If the low tire pressure warning light
problem when adjusting the tire pressures Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures higher than those shown on the Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Black plate (395,1)
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur.
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS If this light still illuminates while
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS driving after adjusting the tire pres-
see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light sure, a tire may have significant
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire in the instrument panel will illuminate damage and a fast leak that causes
pressure warning light does not go off, the steadily after blinking for approximately the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
tire pressure monitoring system may not one minute. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
be functioning normally. In this event, go as soon as possible.
to a SUBARU dealer to have the system When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
inspected as soon as possible. necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
the low tire pressure warning light, any steadily after blinking for approxi-
increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
an increase in the outside air temperature the TPMS is unable to monitor all
or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light four road wheels. Contact your
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
warning light to go off. ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light
System resetting is necessary when the ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking
wheels are changed (for example, a you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute,
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer 11
valves are installed on the newly fitted SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected.
wheels. Have this work performed by a ble.
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- If this light illuminates while driving,
ment. never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu-
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly
free from serious damage, nails, and
market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place.
stones. At the same time, check the tires
wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (396,1)
for abnormal wear. mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- the pressure of each tire (including the release air from a warm tire to reduce its
ately if you find any problem. spare) at least once a month (for example, pressure.
during a fuel stop) and before any long
NOTE journey. NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike . The air pressure in a tire increases
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat- by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
rough surface, they can suffer damage . The tires are considered cold when
that cannot be seen with the naked eye. the vehicle has been parked for at least
This type of damage does not become 3 hours or has been driven less than 1
evident until time has passed. Try not mile (1.6 km).
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is WARNING
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and Do not let air out of warm tires to
approach the curbs as squarely as adjust pressure. Doing so will result
possible. Also, make sure the tires are in low tire pressure.
not pressed against the curb when you Check the tire pressures when the tires
park the vehicle. are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
. If you feel unusual vibration while the tire pressures to the values shown on trollability and ride comfort, and they
driving or find it difficult to steer the the tire placard. The tire placard is located cause the tires to wear abnormally.
vehicle in a straight line, one of the on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized Driving even a short distance warms up
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle the tires and increases the tire pressures.
inspected. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
& Tire pressures and wear vehicle.
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
and is essential for good running perfor- it expands, causing the tire pressure to

Black plate (397,1)
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
evenly) worn at shoulders) worn in center)
Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher. magnifies the effects of road-surface
fuel consumption is also lower. bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
11
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (398,1)
& Wheel balance & Wear indicators cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
Each wheel was correctly balanced when The resulting loss of vehicle control
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will can lead to an accident.
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes NOTE
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can ularly and replace the tires before their
also cause steering and suspension sys- tread wear indicators become visible.
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not & Tire rotation direction mark
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation. 1) New tread
2) Worn tread
NOTE 3) Tread wear indicator
Loss of correct wheel alignment*
causes the tires to wear on one side Each tire incorporates a tread wear
and reduces the vehicle’s running indicator, which becomes visible when
stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer the depth of the tread grooves decreases
if you notice abnormal tire wear. to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
*: The suspension system is designed to hold appears as a solid band across the tread.
each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to
the other wheels and to the road) for optimum WARNING Example of tire rotation direction mark
straight-line stability and cornering perfor- 1) Front
mance. When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn If the tire has a rotation direction specifica-
beyond the acceptable limit and tion, the tire rotation direction mark is
must be replaced immediately. With placed on its sidewall.
a tire in this condition, driving at When you install a tire that has the tire
high speeds in wet weather can rotation direction mark, install the tire with

Black plate (399,1)
the direction mark facing forward. & Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and
& Tire rotation integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
those shown on the tire placard.
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec- maximize the life of each tire and ensure from controllability, ride comfort, braking
tional tires that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to performance, speedometer accuracy and
1) Front rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
km). Move the tires to the positions shown rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
in the applicable illustration each time they priately changes the vehicle’s ground
are rotated. clearance.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn All four tires must be the same in terms of
tire at the time of rotation. After tire manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- 11
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and struction, and size. You are advised to
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly replace the tires with new ones that are
tightened. identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
and retighten any nut that has become recommends replacing all four tires at
loose. the same time.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (400,1)
WARNING & Wheel replacement Aluminum wheels

When replacing wheels due, for example,
. All four tires must be the same in to damage, make sure the replacement Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
terms of manufacturer, brand wheels match the specifications of the damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
(tread pattern), construction, de- wheels that are fitted as standard equip- maintain their appearance, performance,
gree of wear, speed symbol, load ment. Replacement wheels are available and safety.
index and size. Mixing tires of from SUBARU dealers. . When any of the wheels is removed
different types, sizes or degrees and replaced for tire rotation or to change
of wear can result in damage to WARNING a flat, always check the tightness of the
the vehicle’s power train. Use of wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
different types or sizes of tires Use only those wheels that are miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
can also dangerously reduce specified for your vehicle. Wheels tighten it to the specified torque.
controllability and braking per- not meeting specifications could . Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
formance and can lead to an interfere with brake caliper opera- wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
accident. tion and may cause the tires to rub wheel.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use against the wheel well housing dur-
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
radial tires together with belted ing turns. The resulting loss of
protrusions or curbs.
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. vehicle control could lead to an
accident. . Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly
Doing so can dangerously re- and completely around the tire, otherwise
duce controllability, resulting in the chains may scratch the wheel.
an accident. . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.

Black plate (401,1)
Windshield washer fluid level gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
CAUTION water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
Never use engine coolant as washer use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid because it could cause paint fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
damage. contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer fluid level gauge Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer

fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield the table above when adjusting the fluid
but the supply of washer fluid appears to concentration to the outside temperature. 11
diminish, check the level of washer fluid in If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
the tank. a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then the piping between the reservoir tank and
check the fluid level indicated by the level washer nozzles by operating the washer
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add the concentration of the fluid remaining in
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the the piping is too low for the outside
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (402,1)
temperature, it may freeze and block the Replacement of wiper blades . Return the passenger-side wiper
nozzles. arm to its original position before
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials returning the driver-side wiper
CAUTION on the windshield or the wiper blade arm to its original position.
results in jerky wiper operation and streak- Otherwise, the passenger-side
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- wiper assembly and driver-side
ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the
tion appropriately for the outside wiper assembly will touch each
streaks after operating the windshield
temperature. If the concentration is other, possibly resulting in
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid scratches.
clean the outer surface of the windshield
may freeze on the windshield and
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
obstruct your view, and the fluid If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
may freeze in the reservoir tank. after following this method, replace the
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper wiper blades using the following proce-
blades with clean water. The windshield is dures:
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water. & Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
CAUTION
1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the
. Do not clean the wiper blades driver’s side.
with gasoline or a solvent, such 2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm
as paint thinner or benzine. This on the passenger’s side.
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.

Black plate (403,1)
& Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber
1) Stopper 1) Metal spines
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by 2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the 1) Metal support with two metal spines, remove the metal
direction shown by the arrow while de- spines from the old blade rubber and
pressing the wiper blade stopper. 1. Grasp the locked end of the blade install them in the new blade rubber.
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
metal support.
5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the
passenger’s side slowly while supporting
it by hand.
11
6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm
on the driver’s side slowly while support-
ing it by hand.
3. Align the claws of the metal support

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (404,1)
with the grooves in the rubber and slide & Rear window wiper blade
the blade rubber assembly into the metal assembly
support until it locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
end of the metal support between the terclockwise.
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.

Black plate (405,1)
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly into place.
assembly to unlock it from the plastic 3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
support. with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
11
Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (406,1)
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly . Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
lower it in position. any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
. Keep everyone including children
Batteries give off a gas which is
away from the battery.
highly flammable and explosive.
. Charge the battery in a well-
. For safety, in case an explosion
ventilated area.
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals, and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
. Do not let battery fluid contact
to cause cancer and reproductive
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
harm. Batteries also contain
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
other chemicals known to the
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
State of California to cause can-
skin or in your eyes, immediately
cer. Wash hands after handling.
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the CAUTION
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally Never use more than 10 amperes
swallowed, immediately drink a when charging the battery because
large amount of milk or water, it will shorten battery life.
and seek medical attention im-
mediately. It is unnecessary to periodically check the
. To lessen the risk of sparks, battery fluid level or periodically refill with

Black plate (407,1)
distilled water. Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
Open the lid that is located above the

hood release knob and pull it toward you
to remove it.
The fuses are designed to melt during an 11

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One
is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. The other one is housed in the engine
compartment.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (408,1)
The spare fuses are stored in the main 1) Good 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
fuse box cover in the engine compart- 2) Blown
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
ment. If any lights, accessories or other electrical replace it with a spare fuse of the same
controls do not operate, inspect the rating.
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, 6. If the same fuse blows again, this
replace it. indicates that its system has a problem.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
position and turn off all electrical acces-
sories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
The back side of each fuse box cover and
the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter
12 in this manual show the circuit for each
fuse.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.

Black plate (409,1)
Main fuse Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt
during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equip-
ment. Check the main fuses if any
electrical component fails to operate (ex-
cept the starter motor) and other fuses are
good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the 11
same specified rating as the melted main
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
replaced, have the electrical system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (410,1)
Replacing bulbs

Black plate (411,1)
Wattage Bulb No. CAUTION

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3) Replace any bulb only with a new
2) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7 bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
3) Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker light 12V-27/8W 3457A result in a fire.
4) Map light 12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) Door step light 12V-3W –
& Headlight
7) Vanity mirror light 12V-3W – CAUTION
8) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
9) Halogen headlight bulbs become
Trunk light (Sedan) 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
very hot while in use. If you touch
10) High mount stop light (Sedan) 12V-21W (W21W) the bulb surface with bare hands or
11) Rear turn signal light (Sedan) 12V-21W (WY21W) greasy gloves, fingerprints or
12) Back-up light (Sedan) 12V-16W 921 grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
13) Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Sedan) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W) bulb to break. If there are finger-
14) Cargo area light (Station wagon) 12V-13W – prints or grease on the bulb surface,
15) Brake/Tail light (Station wagon) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W) wipe them away with a soft cloth
16) Rear side marker light (Station wagon) 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
moistened with alcohol.
17) Rear turn signal light (Station wagon) 12V-21W (WY21W)
18) NOTE 11
Back-up light (Station wagon) 12V-16W 921
19) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W) . If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (412,1)
! Low beam light bulbs 2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction.
(left-hand side)
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

Right-hand side 5. Remove the retainer spring.
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on 6. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
the air intake duct, then remove the air spring securely.
intake duct. (right-hand side) 7. Reconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
8. Install the bulb cover.
counterclockwise.
9. Install the air intake duct with clips.
(right-hand side)
10. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)
Left-hand side

Black plate (413,1)
! High beam light bulbs 2. Use a screwdriver to remove the place and secure it by clip. (left-hand side)
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the & Front turn signal/Parking and
washer tank to the horizontal direction. front side marker light
(left-hand side)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

Right-hand side & Rear combination lights

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on ! Sedan
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct. (right-hand side)
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb 11
surface.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
8. Install the air intake duct with clips.
(right-hand side) 1. Push the knobs of the cover to open
9. Set the washer tank to the original the cover.
Left-hand side
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (414,1)
! Station wagon
1) Rear turn signal light 2. Wrap tape around a flat-head screw-

2) Back-up light driver, then insert the screwdriver into the
3) Brake/tail and rear side marker light 1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
gap between the side cover and rear
the upper and lower screws.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light and use it as a lever to
combination light assembly by turning it undo clip 1 in the illustration shown. Undo
counterclockwise. clips 2 and 3 in the same way, then
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and remove the side cover.
replace it with a new one.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Securely lock the cover against the
trunk trim.

Black plate (415,1)
3. Remove the upper and lower screws. 1) Brake/tail light 7. Insert the harness into the holder.
Then, straightly slide the rear combination 2) Rear turn signal light
light assembly rearward and remove it 3) Rear side marker light
from the vehicle. 4. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks. 11
8. Reinstall the rear combination light

assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (416,1)
corner of the light cover as shown in the replace it with a new one.
illustration, and pry the light cover off from 4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
the rear gate trim. clockwise. Install the light cover on the
rear gate.
& License plate light

! Sedan
! Station wagon
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
& Back-up light (Station wagon) 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

Black plate (417,1)
& Dome light straight downward to remove it. Install a

new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
& Map light
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
4. Reinstall the lens. the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
11
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (418,1)
& Vanity mirror light 3. Reinstall the lens.
& Door step light
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
3. Install a new bulb. 1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
4. Reinstall the lens. the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

new bulb.

Black plate (419,1)
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a & Trunk light (Sedan)
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
& Cargo area light (Station wa-

gon)

new bulb.
1. Push both sides of the light cover, and
3. Reinstall the lens. then remove the cover by pulling it out.
new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. & High mount stop light
(Sedan)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. 11

Black plate (23,1)
Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-6

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 compartment ................................................... 12-6
Electrical system................................................ 12-3 Fuse panel located in the engine
Capacities .......................................................... 12-4 compartment ................................................... 12-8
Tires .................................................................. 12-5 Bulb chart........................................................... 12-9
Wheel alignment ................................................ 12-5 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-11
12

Black plate (422,1)
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item Legacy OUTBACK
Sedan Station wagon Sedan Station wagon
Non-
turbo Turbo
2.5-liter 2.5-liter 3.0-liter 2.5-liter 3.0-liter

Except 2.5GT Non-
2.5GT spec.B turbo Turbo
spec.B
Overall length 185.0 (4,700) 188.4 (4,785) 185.0 (4,700) 189.0 (4,800)
Overall width 68.1 (1,730) 68.1 (1,730) 69.7 (1,770) 69.7 (1,770)
Overall height 56.1 56.5
(1,425) (1,435) 58.1 (1,475) 56.5 (1,435) 63.2 (1,605)
Wheel base 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670) 105.1 (2,670)
Tread Front 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495) 58.9 (1,495)
Rear 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.5 (1,485) 58.7 (1,490)
Ground clearance 5.9 (150) 6.3 (160) 5.9 (150) 6.1 (155) 6.3 (160) 8.5 (215) 8.7 (220) 8.5 (215)

Black plate (423,1)
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EZ30D
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo) (3.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 183 (3,000)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.51 6 3.15 (89.2 6 80.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 10.7 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–6–3–2–5–4
& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity 2.5 L models MT 55D23L (12V-48AH)
(5HR)
AT 75D23L (12V-52AH)
3.0 L models 75D23L (12V-52AH)
Alternator 12V-110A
2.5 L non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)
Spark plugs 2.5 L turbo models SILFR6A (NGK)
3.0 L models ILFR6B (NGK)
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (424,1)
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 2.5 L models 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0 L models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 5-speeds 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
6-speeds 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 2.5 L non-turbo models 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo and 3.0 L models 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 2.5 L non-turbo models 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo and 3.0 L models 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil Turbo 6-speeds MT models 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Other models 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 2.5 L non-turbo models MT 6.8 US qt (6.4 liters, 5.6 Imp qt)
AT 6.7 US qt (6.3 liters, 5.5 Imp qt)
2.5 L turbo models MT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)
AT 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)
3.0 L models 7.6 US qt (7.2 liters, 6.3 Imp qt)

Black plate (425,1)
Specifications 12-5
& Tires
Tire size P205/55R16 P225/60R16 P205/50R17 215/45R17 P225/55R17 215/45R18 P215/45R18
89H 97H 88V 91W 95V 89Y 89W
Wheel size 16 6 6.5JJ 17 6 7 JJ 18 6 7 JJ
Pressure Front 32 psi 32 psi 33 psi 35 psi 32 psi 33 psi
(220 kPa, (220 kPa, (230 kPa, (240 kPa, (220 kPa, (230 kPa,
2.2 kgf/cm2) 2.2 kgf/cm2) 2.3 kgf/cm2) 2.4 kgf/cm2) 2.2 kgf/cm2) 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear 30 psi 30 psi 32 psi 33 psi 30 psi 32 psi
Rear at 32 psi 32 psi
trailer tow- – (220 kPa, – (220 kPa, –
ing 2.2 kgf/cm2) 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Temporary *1
Size T135/80R16 T155/70D17 T135/80R16 T135/70D17 T155/70D17 T155/70D17
spare tire *2
T135/80R16
2
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm )
*1: 2.5 GT Limited model

*2: 3.0 R model
& Wheel alignment
Item Legacy OUTBACK
Sedan Station wagon Station wagon
Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)
12
Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Camber Front −0815’ 0840’
Rear −0840’ −0830’ −0810’

Black plate (426,1)
12-6 Specifications
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
1 20A . Cargo fan
. Trailer hitch connector
2 Empty
3 15A . Door locking
4 15A . Front wiper deicer relay
. Moonroof
5 15A . Combination meter
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
. Vanity mirror light
7 15A . Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 20A . Stop light
9 20A . Mirror heater
. Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
. Clock
12 15A . Automatic transmission
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit

Black plate (427,1)
Specifications 12-7
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
13 20A . Cargo socket 28 15A . Blower fan
14 15A . Position light 29 15A . Fog light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light 30 30A . Front wiper
. Front wiper washer
15 Empty
31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit
16 10A . Illumination . Integrated unit
17 15A . Seat heaters

32 7.5A . Headlight left side relay
33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle dynamics
18 10A . Back-up light control unit
19 7.5A . Headlight right side re-
lay
20 10A . Cigarette lighter socket
21 7.5A . Starter relay
22 15A . Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 15A . Rear wiper
. Rear window washer
24 15A . Audio unit
. Clock
25 15A . SRS airbag system 12
26 7.5A . Power window relay
27 15A . Blower fan
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (428,1)
12-8 Specifications
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
1 30A . ABS unit
. Vehicle dynamics control
unit
2 25A . Main fan (3.0 L models)
3 10A . Secondary air combina-
tion valve (turbo models)
4 25A . Sub fan (except 3.0 L
models)
5 25A . Main fan
6 20A . Audio
7 15A . Headlight (right side)
8 15A . Headlight (left side)
9 20A . Back-up light
10 15A . Horn
11 25A . Rear window defogger
12 15A . Fuel pump
13 15A . Automatic transmission
control unit
14 7.5A . Engine control unit
15 15A . Turn and hazard warning
A) FWD socket (AT models with non-turbo 2.5 L engine) flasher
B) Main fuse 16 20A . Parking switch
17 7.5A . Alternator

Black plate (429,1)
Specifications 12-9
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No.

Headlight
Low beam 12V-55W H7
High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Front turn signal/Parking and 12V-27/8W 3457A
front side marker light
Rear combination light
Rear turn signal light (Se- 12V-21W (WY21W)
dan)
Brake/Tail and rear side 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
marker (Sedan)
Brake/Tail (Station wagon) 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)
Rear side marker (Station 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
wagon)
Rear turn signal light (Station 12V-21W (WY21W)
wagon)
Back-up light 12V-16W 921
High mount stop light (Sedan) 12V-21W (W21W)
License plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (430,1)
12-10 Specifications
Description Wattage Bulb No.

Trunk room light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
Cargo area light 12V-13W –
Dome light 12V-8W –
Map light 12V-8W –
Vanity mirror light 12V-3W –
Door step light 12V-3W –

Black plate (431,1)
Specifications 12-11
1) Emission control label
Vehicle identification 2) Vehicle identification number
3) Certification and bar code label
4) Tire inflation pressure label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
12

Black plate (25,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

Tire information .................................................. 13-2 handling and stopping and on tires ................ 13-11
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-11
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-5 Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-12
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-6 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-12
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-7 Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-12
Vehicle load limit – how to determine.................. 13-8 Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-13
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................... 13-13
capacities ...................................................... 13-11
13

Black plate (434,1)
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:
The following information has been & Tire labeling

compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful infor- (1) P = Certain tire type used on
mation on the tire. light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
! Tire size
(2) Section Width in millimeters
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
understand the sizing system in 7 section width).
selecting the proper tire for your (4) R = Radial Construction
vehicles. Here is a brief review of (5) Rim diameter in inches
the tire sizing system with a break- (6) ZR = Speed category above
down of its individual elements. 149 mph (240 km/h)
! P Metric ! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
With the P-Metric system, Section tions
Width is measured in millimeters. The load and speed rating descrip-
To convert millimeters into inches, tions will appear following the size
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio designation.
(Section Height divided by Section They provide two important facts
Width) helps provide more dimen- about the tire. First, the number
sional information about the tire designation is its load index. Sec-
size. ond, the letter designation indicates

Black plate (435,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
the tire’s speed rating. (240 km/h) individual elements.

Example:
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed. (4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if The first two figures identify the
For example, “88” means 1,234 lbs the tires are worn out, da- week, starting with “01” to represent
(560 kg), “87” means 1,201 lbs (545 maged, repaired, retreaded, the first full week of the calendar
kg), “86” means 1,168 lbs (530 kg) or otherwise altered from year; the second two figures repre-
WARNING their original condition. If sent the year. For example, 0101
tires are repaired, re- means the 1st week of 2001.
Load indices apply only to the treaded, or otherwise al-
! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting tered, they may not be sui-
a load rated tire on any vehicle table for original equipment The following makings are also
does not mean the vehicle can tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated speeds. ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN) The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kpa 13
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (436,1)
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1

The load rating at the maximum NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
permissible weight load for this tire. STER”
For example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(1609 LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) (UTQG)
MAX. PRESS.” For details, refer to “Uniform tire
WARNING quality grading standards” in this
chapter.
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

Black plate (437,1)
& Recommended tire inflation pressure

! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,
Tire size P205/ P225/ P205/ 215/ P225/ 215/ P215/
55R16 89H 60R16 97H 50R17 88V 45R17 91W 55R17 95V 45R18 89Y 45R18 89W
Pres- Front 32 psi 32 psi 33 psi 35 psi 32 psi 33 psi
sure (220 kPa, (220 kPa, (230 kPa, (240 kPa, (220 kPa, (230 kPa,
Rear 30 psi 30 psi 32 psi 33 psi 30 psi 32 psi
Rear at 32 psi 32 psi
trailer – (220 kPa, – (220 kPa, –
towing 2.2 kgf/cm2) 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Tem- T135/
porary T135/ T155/ T135/ 70D17 *1 T155/
spare Size 80R16 70D17 80R16 T135/ 70D17 T155/70D17
tire 80R16 *2
Pres- 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
sure
*1: 2.5 GT Limited model 13
*2: 3.0 R model
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (438,1)
! Vehicle placard The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a
tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires
inflation pressure on each tire at and increases the tire pressures.
maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected
seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is
mation. best to check tire pressure out-
! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle.
of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air
Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire
sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not
the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure.
The vehicle placard is affixed to the crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology
driver’s side B-pillar. tread separation, and failure of the
. Cold tire pressure
Example: tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an The pressure in a tire that has been
accident. driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
! Measuring and adjusting air . Maximum inflation pressure
pressure to achieve proper in-
The maximum cold inflation pres-
flation
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the . Recommended inflation pres-
pressure of each tire (including the sure
spare) at least once a month and The cold inflation pressure recom-
before any long journey. Check the mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
tire pressures when the tires are . Intended outboard sidewall
cold. Use a pressure gauge to (1) The sidewall that contains a
adjust the tire pressures to the

Black plate (439,1)
whitewall, bears white lettering production options weight. determined by distributing to each
or bears manufacturer, brand, . Normal occupant weight axle its share of the curb weight,
and/or model name molding that 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of accessory weight, and normal oc-
is higher or deeper than the occupants (3 occupants). cupant weight and dividing by two.
same molding on the other side- . Occupant distribution
wall of the tire, or Distribution of occupants in a vehi- & Tire care – maintenance and
(2) The outward facing sidewall cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat. safety practices
of an asymmetrical tire that has . Production options weight . Check on a daily basis that the
a particular side that must al- The combined weight of those tires are free from serious damage,
ways face outward when mount- installed regular production options nails, and stones. At the same time,
ing on a vehicle. weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Accessory weight . Inspect the tire tread regularly
excess of those standards items
The combined weight (in excess of which they replace, not previously and replace the tires before their
those standard items which may be considered in curb weight or acces- tread wear indicators become visi-
replaced) of floor mats, leather sory weight. ble. When a tire’s tread wear
seats and cross bars to the extent . Vehicle capacity weight
indicator becomes visible, the tire
that these items are available as is worn beyond the acceptable limit
The total weight of cargo, luggage
factory-installed equipment and must be replaced immediately.
and occupants that can be added to
(whether installed or not). With a tire in this condition, driving
the vehicle.
. Curb weight at even low speeds in wet weather
. Vehicle maximum load on a tire
The weight of a motor vehicle with can cause the vehicle to hydro-
Load on an individual tire that is plane. Possible resulting loss of
standard equipment including the determined by distributing to each
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and vehicle control can lead to an
axle its share of the maximum accident.
coolant and air conditioning. loaded vehicle weight and dividing . To maximize the life of each tire
13
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight by two.
The sum of curb weight, accessory and ensure that the tires wear
. Vehicle normal load on a tire
weight, vehicle capacity weight and uniformly, it is best to rotate the
Load on an individual tire that is
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (440,1)
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). of occupants and cargo should examples:
Rotating the tires involves switch- never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
Example 1A
ing the front and rear tires on the on your vehicle’s placard.
right-hand side of the vehicle and The vehicle placard also shows
similarly switching the front and seating capacity of your vehicle.
rear tires on the left-hand side of The total load capacity includes the
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept total weight of driver and all pas-
on its original side of the vehicle.) sengers and their belongings, any
Replace any damaged or unevenly cargo, any optional equipment such
worn tire at the time of rotation. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
After tire rotation, adjust the tire carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
pressures and make sure the wheel a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
nuts are correctly tightened. A can be calculated by the following
tightening torque specification and method.
a tightening sequence specification Vehicle capacity weight of the
for the wheel nuts can be found Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
“Flat tires” section in chapter 9. weight of occupants + total weight is indicated on the vehicle placard
of optional equipment + tongue with the statement “The combined
& Vehicle load limit – how to load of a trailer (if applicable)) weight of occupants and cargo
determine should never exceed 363 kg or
For towing capacity information and 800 lbs”.
The load capacity of your vehicle is weight limits, refer to the “Trailer
determined by weight, not by avail- towing” section in chapter 8. For example, if the vehicle has one
able cargo space. The load limit of occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
your vehicle is shown on the ! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
vehicle placard attached to the kg).
figurations
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the 1. Calculate the total weight.
statement “The combined weight Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following

Black plate (441,1)
Example 1B 2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg). 3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the Example 2A
same vehicle (bringing the number
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
of occupants to two), the calcula-
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can tions are as follows:
be carried. 1. Calculate the total weight.
13
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (442,1)
is indicated on the vehicle placard 2. Calculate the available load ca- vehicle (bringing the number of
with the statement “The combined pacity. occupants to three), and a child
weight of occupants and cargo restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
should never exceed 363 kg or kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
800 lbs”. child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
For example, the vehicle has one
1. Calculate the total weight.
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). Example 2B
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

Black plate (443,1)
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Heavy and/or high-mounted
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each loads could increase the risk of
axle’s GAWR are shown on the rollover.
vehicle certification label affixed to . Stopping distance will increase.
the driver’s door. . Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
3. The total weight now exceeds The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only other parts of the body could break
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10 or experience accelerated wear
kg), so the cargo weight must be the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi- that will shorten vehicle life.
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more. . Tires could fail.
cle’s suspension, axles and other
. Tread separation could occur.
& Determining compatibility of parts of the body.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the
ties vehicle cannot necessarily be & Steps for Determining Cor-
The sum of four tires’ maximum loaded up to the tire’s maximum rect Load Limit
load ratings must exceed the max- load rating on the tire sidewall. 1. Locate the statement “The com-
imum loaded vehicle weight bined weight of occupants and
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the & Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on cargo should never exceed XXX
maximum load ratings of two front pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
tires and of two rear tires must handling and stopping and
on tires 2. Determine the combined weight
exceed each axle’s maximum of the driver and passengers that
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle will be riding in your vehicle.
equipment tires are designed to
3. Subtract the combined weight of
fulfill those conditions. and tire as shown in the following.
the driver and passengers from 13
The maximum loaded vehicle This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (444,1)
available amount of cargo and Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require-
luggage load capacity. For exam- standards ments in addition to these grades.
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
your vehicle, the amount of avail- tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of
able cargo and luggage load capa- traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con-
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6 tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified
150) = 650 lbs). in making an informed choice in the government test course.
5. Determine the combined weight purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150
of luggage and cargo being loaded Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1-
on the vehicle. That weight may not applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern-
safely exceed the available cargo tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100.
and luggage load capacity calcu- mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
lated in Step 4. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- depends upon the actual conditions
6. If your vehicle will be towing a perature A of their use, however, and may
trailer, load from your trailer will be depart significantly from the norm
transferred to your vehicle. Consult The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits,
this manual to determine how this pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in
reduces the available cargo and ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate.
luggage load capacity of your ve- apply to deep tread, winter type
hicle. snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
or less, or to some limited produc- grades represent the tire’s ability to
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe-

Black plate (445,1)
cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger (USA)
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a
WARNING represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
ahead braking traction tests, Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
WARNING addition to notifying Subaru of
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
teristics. that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
& Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure. in individual problems between
heat and its ability to dissipate heat you, your dealer, or Subaru of
when tested under controlled con- America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
ditions on a specified indoor labora- you may call the Vehicle Safety
tory test wheel. Sustained high Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
temperature can cause the material (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to 13
of the tire to degenerate and reduce http://www.safercar.gov; or write
tire life, and excessive temperature
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (446,1)
DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

Black plate (27,1)
Index
14

Black plate (2,1)
14-2 Index
A Shift lock release............................................ 7-24, 7-30

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-35 SPORT mode ........................................................ 7-23
Warning light ................................................. 3-34, 7-36 Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-33
Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-49 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-15
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-9 AUX unit operation ..................................................... 5-25
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-7
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-17 B
Air conditioner ............................................................. 4-7 Battery .................................................................... 11-46
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-13 Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Air flow selection.......................................................... 4-2 Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-11
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-16 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-34
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-36 Brake
Aluminum wheel cleaning............................................ 10-3 Booster ....................................................... 7-34, 11-30
Aluminum wheels...................................................... 11-40 Fluid ................................................................... 11-28
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2 Pad and lining...................................................... 11-32
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-35 Parking ....................................................... 7-45, 11-33
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-17 Pedal .................................................................. 11-31
Armrest..................................................................... 1-12 System.................................................................. 7-34
Ashtray ..................................................................... 6-11 Brake pedal
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-33 Free play............................................................. 11-31
Audio control button ................................................... 5-26 Reserve distance.................................................. 11-31
Audio set .................................................................... 5-5 Brake system............................................................. 7-34
Auto-dimming mirror/compass...................................... 3-56 Warning light.......................................................... 3-35
Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-7 Braking ..................................................................... 7-34
Automatic transmission Tips ...................................................................... 7-34
4-speed ................................................................ 7-18 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings................... 11-32
5-speed ................................................................ 7-24 Bulb
Capacities ............................................................. 12-4 Chart .................................................................... 12-9
Fluid.................................................................... 11-22 Replacing ............................................................ 11-50
Manual mode ................................................ 7-21, 7-27
Selector lever ................................................ 7-19, 7-25

Black plate (3,1)
Index 14-3
C Chime
Capacities ................................................................. 12-4 Key........................................................................ 3-5
Cargo area Seatbelt......................................................... 1-15, 3-29
Cover ................................................................... 6-14 Cleaning
Light....................................................................... 6-2 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-17 Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-12
Center Climate control system
Console .................................................................. 6-6 Automatic ............................................................... 4-7
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3 Manual................................................................... 4-3
Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3 Clock ........................................................................ 3-41
Changing Clutch
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4 Fluid ................................................................... 11-29
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-10 Pedal .................................................................. 11-31
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-32 Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Coolant ................................................................... 11-14
lamp...................................................................... 3-31 Cooling system ........................................................ 11-14
Checking Corrosion protection............................................ 8-10, 10-4
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-31 Cruise control ............................................................ 7-46
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-31 Indicator light ................................................. 3-40, 7-49
Clutch function...................................................... 11-31 Set indicator light............................................ 3-40, 7-50
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-32 Cup holder ................................................................. 6-8
Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-9 Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-8
Fluid level ............................... 11-22, 11-27, 11-28, 11-29 Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-9
Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-25
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-27 D
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-30 Daytime running light system ....................................... 3-47
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-35 Differential gear oil
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-38 Front................................................................... 11-24
Child safety .................................................................... 4 Rear ................................................................... 11-25
Locks ................................................................... 2-21 Dimensions................................................................ 12-2

Black plate (4,1)
14-4 Index
Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-19 Overheating ........................................................... 9-13

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-35 Starting .................................................................. 7-9
Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-57 Stopping................................................................ 7-11
Door Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
Locks ..................................................................... 2-5
Open warning light ................................................. 3-36 F
Step light ............................................................. 11-58 Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-4
Drive belts................................................................ 11-20 Floor mat................................................................... 6-13
Driving Fluid level
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-36 Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-22
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7 Brake.................................................................. 11-28
Drinking ..................................................................... 6 Clutch ................................................................. 11-29
Drugs ........................................................................ 6 Power steering ..................................................... 11-27
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-5 Fog light
Pets .......................................................................... 7 Bulb.................................................................... 11-53
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-40
Tips....................................... 7-16, 7-18, 7-23, 7-29, 8-5 Switch................................................................... 3-49
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 6 Front
Differential gear oil................................................ 11-24
E Fog light (bulb)..................................................... 11-53
ECO gauge ................................................................. 3-8 Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-24
Electrical system........................................................ 12-3 Seats ..................................................................... 1-2
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Side marker light .................................................. 11-53
system........................................................... 3-35, 7-37 Turn signal/Parking and front side marker light ......... 11-53
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-15 Front fog light............................................................. 3-49
Engine Indicator light ......................................................... 3-40
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-6 Front seats
Coolant................................................................ 11-14 Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-3, 1-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-3 Reclining .......................................................... 1-3, 1-4
Hood .................................................................... 11-4 Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Oil........................................................................ 11-9 Front side marker ..................................................... 11-53

Black plate (5,1)
Index 14-5
Front turn signal/Parking and front side marker ............. 11-53 I
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-5 Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-48
Gauge ............................................................ 3-6, 3-26 Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3
Requirements .......................................................... 7-3 Indicator light (security indicator light)................. 2-4, 3-38
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-47 Indicator light
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6 Cruise control ................................................ 3-40, 7-49
Cruise control set ........................................... 3-40, 7-50
G Front fog light......................................................... 3-40
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-15 Headlight............................................................... 3-40
Gear position indicator ................................................ 3-39 High beam............................................................. 3-40
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5 Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-4
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-15 S# PREP .............................................................. 3-39
Security.......................................................... 2-4, 3-38
H Selector lever position............................................. 3-39
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2 Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-40
Head restraint adjustment Shift-up ................................................................. 3-38
Front seat ............................................................... 1-7 SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-38
Rearseat............................................................... 1-10 Traction control system OFF .................................... 3-37
Headlight Turn signal ............................................................ 3-40
Flasher ................................................................. 3-47 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF......................... 3-38, 7-40
Indicator light......................................................... 3-40 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-37, 7-40
Headlights........................................................ 3-46, 11-51 Information display...................................................... 3-41
Heater operation (manual climate control system) ............ 4-5 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-56
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-40 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
High mount stop light................................................. 11-59 Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-25
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-46
Horn......................................................................... 3-59 J
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-14 Jack.......................................................................... 9-18
Jack handle ............................................................... 9-19

Black plate (6,1)
14-6 Index
Jump starting............................................................. 9-10 Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-33

Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-13
K Low fuel warning light .................................. 3-7, 3-27, 3-36
Key Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-33
Number .................................................................. 2-2 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-35
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5 LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-33
Replacement ........................................................... 2-4 Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-8
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-8
Keys .......................................................................... 2-2 M
Main fuse ................................................................ 11-49
L Maintenance
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
License plate light ..................................................... 11-56 Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Light Seatbelt................................................................. 1-23
Back-up (Sedan)................................................... 11-53 Tools..................................................................... 9-18
Back-up (Station wagon)........................................ 11-56 Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-31
Brake/Tail (Station wagon)...................................... 11-54 Manual
Brake/Tail and rear side marker (Sedan) .................. 11-53 Climate control system ............................................. 4-3
Cargo area.................................................... 6-2, 11-59 Mode ............................................................ 7-21, 7-27
Control switch........................................................ 3-46 Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-57 Transmission oil ................................................... 11-21
Door step............................................................. 11-58 Transmission-5 speeds ........................................... 7-15
Front fog............................................................... 3-49 Transmission-6 speeds ........................................... 7-17
High mount stop ................................................... 11-59 Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-57
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-22
License plate ........................................................ 11-56 Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5, 3-24
Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-57 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-56
Rear combination.................................................. 11-53 Moonroof................................................................... 2-28
Rear side marker (Station wagon) ........................... 11-54 Multi-information display ............................................... 3-9
Trunk................................................................... 11-59
Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-58

Black plate (7,1)
Index 14-7
N Seat....................................................................... 1-4
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2 Steering ................................................................ 7-34
Steering fluid........................................................ 11-27
O Windows ............................................................... 2-21
Odometer.................................................................. 3-25 Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-27, 1-66
Odometer/Trip meter .................................................. 3-10 Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 Printed antenna........................................................... 5-2
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-10
Oil level R
Engine.................................................................. 11-9 Rear
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-24 Combination lights ................................................ 11-53
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-21 Gate ............................................................. 2-27, 9-18
Rear differential .................................................... 11-25 Seats ..................................................................... 1-9
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-32 Viscous limited slip differential.................................. 7-33
Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-57 Rear differential
Outside temperature indicator ...................................... 3-42 Gear oil ............................................................... 11-25
Overhead console ........................................................ 6-7 Rear seat
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13 Folding down .......................................................... 1-9
Rear turn signal........................................................ 11-53
P Rear window
Parking Defogger button ..................................................... 3-54
Brake ................................................................... 7-45 Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-53
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-33 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-44
Light switch ........................................................... 3-48 Recommended
Tips...................................................................... 7-45 Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-23
Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-44 Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-29
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-30
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 OIL grade and
Pocket ........................................................................ 6-8 viscosity ..................... 11-12, 11-13, 11-22, 11-25, 11-27
Power Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-28
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-7 Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-20

Black plate (8,1)
14-8 Index
Refueling .................................................................... 7-5 S

Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-11 S# PREP indicator light ............................................... 3-39
Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-8 Safety
Replacement Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-32 Symbol...................................................................... 2
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-42 Warnings ................................................................... 2
Replacing Seat
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-18 Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...................... 2-11 Heater.................................................................... 1-8
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-13 Memory function...................................................... 1-5
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-50 Seat height adjustment................................................. 1-4
Back-up light (Sedan) ............................................ 11-53 Seatbelt......................................................................... 4
Back-up light (Station wagon) ................................. 11-56 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-23
Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Sedan) ........... 11-53 Pretensioners......................................................... 1-24
Brake/Tail light (Station wagon)............................... 11-54 Safety tips ............................................................. 1-13
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-59 Warning light and chime .................................. 1-15, 3-29
Dome light ........................................................... 11-57 Seatbelts ................................................................... 1-13
Door step light ...................................................... 11-58 Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-53 Security indicator light .......................................... 2-4, 3-38
Headlight ............................................................. 11-51 Selector lever..................................................... 7-19, 7-25
High mount stop light............................................. 11-59 Position indicator ............................................ 3-39, 3-40
License plate light ................................................. 11-56 Shift lock release................................................ 7-24, 7-30
Map light.............................................................. 11-57 Shift-up indicator light.................................................. 3-38
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-53 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-20
Rear side marker light (Station wagon) .................... 11-54 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-13
Trunk light............................................................ 11-59 SI-DRIVE mode.......................................................... 7-31
Vanity mirror light .................................................. 11-58 Snow tires ....................................................... 8-11, 11-34
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-13 Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Roof rail and crossbar ................................................ 8-15 Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-11
Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-20
Specifications............................................................. 12-2

Black plate (9,1)
Index 14-9
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6, 3-24 Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-14
SPORT mode indicator light ........................................ 3-38 Tire
SRS Chains .................................................................. 8-13
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-56 Inspection............................................................ 11-35
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-45 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-36
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-56 Replacement........................................................ 11-39
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-40 Rotation .............................................................. 11-39
SRS airbag system Types.................................................................. 11-33
Monitors................................................................ 1-63 Tire pressure monitoring system
Servicing............................................................... 1-65 (TPMS) ......................................... 3-33, 7-43, 9-9, 11-34
Warning light ......................................................... 3-30 Tires ......................................................................... 12-5
Starting the engine ....................................................... 7-9 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-33
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7 Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-35, 1-38
Steering wheel Towing ...................................................................... 9-13
Power................................................................... 7-34 All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-17
Tilt/telescopic......................................................... 3-59 Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-16
Stopping the engine ................................................... 7-11 Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-14
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5 Weight .................................................................. 8-22
Stowage boxes .......................................................... 6-17 Traction Control system
Sun shade ........................................................ 2-30, 2-31 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-37
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4 Trailer
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-40 Connecting ............................................................ 8-20
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5 Hitch ..................................................................... 8-19
Hitches.................................................................. 8-25
T Towing .................................................................. 8-21
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-6, 3-26 Towing tips ............................................................ 8-27
Temperature gauge ...................................... 3-7, 3-12, 3-27 Trip meter.................................................................. 3-25
Temperature warning light Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-24
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-33 Release handle ...................................................... 2-25
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2 Trunk light ............................................................... 11-59
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-35, 1-38

Black plate (10,1)
14-10 Index
Turn signal Charge.................................................................. 3-32

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-40 CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-31
Lever.................................................................... 3-47 Door open ............................................................. 3-36
Low fuel ................................................. 3-7, 3-27, 3-36
U Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-33
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-18 Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-32
Seatbelt......................................................... 1-15, 3-29
V SRS airbag system................................................. 3-30
Valet mode................................................................ 2-19 Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................... 3-37, 7-40, 7-41
Vanity mirror Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Light.................................................................... 11-58 Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-21
Vehicle Washing .................................................................... 10-2
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-14 Waxing and polishing .................................................. 10-3
Identification ......................................................... 12-11 Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-38
Symbols .................................................................... 2 Wheel
Vehicle Dynamics Control Alignment .............................................................. 12-5
OFF indicator light.................................................. 7-40 Aluminum ............................................................ 11-40
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-42 Balance............................................................... 11-38
Operation indicator light .................................. 3-37, 7-40 Replacement........................................................ 11-40
System ................................................................. 7-38 Windows ................................................................... 2-21
Warning light ................................................. 3-37, 7-40 Windshield
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2 Washer fluid......................................................... 11-41
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-51
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-42
W
Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-53
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-28
Winter
Warning light
Driving ................................................................... 8-8
ABS ............................................................. 3-34, 7-36
Tires ........................................................... 8-11, 11-34
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-36
Winter tire........................................................ 8-11, 11-34
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-33
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-49
Brake system ........................................................ 3-35

Black plate (1,1)
13
12
4
11
10
5
9
7 8
6 000134

Black plate (2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel: & Fuel octane rating
! 2.5 L non-turbo models This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.
higher.
! 2.5 L turbo models & Fuel capacity:
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
AKI or higher. For temporary purposes if premium unleaded
gasoline is not available, you may use regular unleaded & Engine oil:
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY
engine performance and driveability, it is required that you use CONSERVING” or ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with
premium grade unleaded gasoline. the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark).
! 3.0 L models
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or
& Engine oil capacity:
higher. Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 2.5 L models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
AKI or higher may be used. However for optimum engine 3.0 L models: 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)
performance and driveability, it is recommended that you use
91 AKI or higher grade unleaded gasoline. You may experience
reduced output, poor accelerator response, and reduced fuel
economy when using gasoline with an octane rating lower than
91 AKI, depending on your driving habits and conditions. If you
experience any of these conditions while using a lower octane
rated fuel, you may want to return to using 91 AKI octane rated
fuel as soon as possible. Additionally, if your vehicle knocks
heavily or persistently, or if you are driving with heavy loads
such as when towing a trailer, the use of 91 AKI or higher grade
unleaded gasoline is required.

Black plate (3,1)
& Cold tire pressure:

Tire size P205/55R16 P225/60R16 P205/50R17 215/45R17 P225/55R17 215/45R18 P215/45R18
89H 97H 88V 91W 95V 89Y 89W
Pressure Front 32 psi (220 32 psi (220 33 psi (230 35 psi (240 32 psi (220
33 psi (230 kPa,
kPa, 2.2 kgf/ kPa, 2.2 kgf/ kPa, 2.3 kgf/ kPa, 2.4 kgf/ kPa, 2.2 kgf/
2.3 kgf/cm2)
cm2) cm2) cm2) cm2) cm2)
Rear 30 psi (210 30 psi (210 32 psi (220 33 psi (230 30 psi (210
32 psi (220 kPa,
kPa, 2.1 kgf/ kPa, 2.1 kgf/ kPa, 2.2 kgf/ kPa, 2.3 kgf/ kPa, 2.1 kgf/
2.2 kgf/cm2)
cm2) cm2) cm2) cm2) cm2)
Rear at – 32 psi (220 – 32 psi (220 –
trailer tow- kPa, 2.2 kgf/ kPa, 2.2 kgf/
ing cm2) cm2)
Temporary *1
T135/70D17
spare tire Size T135/80R16 T155/70D17 T135/80R16 *2 T155/70D17 T155/70D17
T135/80R16
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
*1: 2.5 GT Limited model
*2: 3.0 R model

2009 Outback Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Outback Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Outback Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black plate (1,1)

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 1/ 18

This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 1/ 18

Chapter 4: Climate control

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION Vehicle symbols

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Mark Name Mark Name Mark Name 0

Child restraint top tether an- Turn signal Air recirculation

Horn Illumination brightness Outside air

Windshield wiper deicer Engine hood Engine oil

Wiper intermittent Trunk lid (Sedan) Washer

Windshield wiper and washer Fan speed Door lock (transmitter)

Instrument panel outlets and Trunk lid (Sedan) or rear gate

Rear window washer Foot outlets

Lights Windshield defroster and foot

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& California proposition 65

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A2450BE-A" Edited: 2008/ 1/ 18

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-5)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& Combination meter 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

! U.S.-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

! Canada-spec. models (with SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-7)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

! Canada-spec. models (without SI-DRIVE) 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-27)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Seatbelt warning light 3-29 Low tire pressure

/ ABS warning light 3-34 Front fog light indicator

/ Brake system warning 3-35

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

& Trunk/cargo area 1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

北米Model "A2450BE-A" EDITED: 2008/ 3/ 24

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats position when the SRS airbag